IntroductionWelcome| 00:00 | (Music playing.)
| | 00:03 | Welcome to the AutoCAD
2010 Essential Training title.
| | 00:06 | My name is Jeff Bartels and it's truly
an honor for me to be able to work with you
| | 00:10 | and take you step-by-
step through AutoCAD 2010.
| | 00:14 | AutoCAD is the industry-standard
tool for 2D drafting and design.
| | 00:18 | It's so popular in fact that you'd
be hard-pressed to find a form of
| | 00:21 | construction or production work today
that doesn't involve AutoCAD in some way.
| | 00:26 | I've based this title on techniques that
have proven successful in the classroom
| | 00:30 | and in the real world of production drafting.
| | 00:33 | We'll start our training by taking a
thorough look at AutoCAD's interface.
| | 00:36 | Next, we'll begin creating simple shapes.
| | 00:39 | As we become familiar with the basics,
we'll add to our tools, learning
| | 00:43 | more productive ways to
create and modify our geometry.
| | 00:47 | Soon our drawings will become larger
and we'll learn how to organize them using
| | 00:50 | layers, line types, and colors.
| | 00:53 | Next, we will get into annotation and add
text, dimensions, and leaders to our drawings.
| | 00:59 | Finally, we'll learn how to create
professional looking plots of our designs
| | 01:03 | using a standardized title block.
| | 01:05 | So if you're interested in
architecture, surveying, civil or mechanical
| | 01:09 | engineering, or design,
this title is perfect for you.
| | 01:13 | Well, we've got a lot to talk about and I've
got a lot of things I can't wait to show you.
| | 01:17 | So let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:01 | If you are a premium member of the
lynda.com Online Training Library or if
| | 00:05 | you're watching this tutorial on a disk,
you have access to the Exercise Files
| | 00:09 | used throughout this title.
| | 00:11 | Now I've placed my exercise files
folder on my desktop; you can place
| | 00:14 | yours wherever you like.
| | 00:16 | I've organized the folders based on
the chapter number and inside each folder
| | 00:21 | are all the drawings that we
use throughout that chapter.
| | 00:23 | In many cases, if I thought it was
helpful, I left you with a finished example.
| | 00:28 | If you are a monthly or annual
subscriber to lynda.com but you don't have access
| | 00:32 | to the Exercise Files, you can
follow along using your own drawings.
| | 00:36 | Let's get started!
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Touring the InterfaceLaunching the program for the first time| 00:01 | Well, this is where it all begins.
| | 00:02 | As you can see I'm
currently sitting at my desktop.
| | 00:05 | Let's launch the AutoCAD 2010
application by double-clicking on this icon.
| | 00:11 | And when the program comes up, the first
thing we see is the initial setup dialog box.
| | 00:16 | This is where AutoCAD is going to
ask us some questions, try and find out
| | 00:19 | what we do for a living.
| | 00:20 | And then it will use that information
to customize the content and tools that
| | 00:24 | we see on our screen.
| | 00:26 | So at this point we can move up and
down the list and choose a discipline that
| | 00:30 | best matches what we do.
| | 00:33 | In the big scheme of things by
making a choice here we're really doing
| | 00:36 | anything permanent.
| | 00:37 | All we're doing is building
a custom startup workspace.
| | 00:41 | For the purposes of this title, I'm
going to select Other (General Design and
| | 00:45 | Documentation) and I'll click Next.
| | 00:48 | Now on Page 2, I can look at these four
topics and determine if any of these interest me.
| | 00:53 | If they do, I can put a check in the box and I
can have the tools show up in my new workspace.
| | 00:59 | Once again this is nothing permanent.
| | 01:01 | If I leave the checks out of the boxes,
I can always add these tools later manually.
| | 01:05 | I'm going to leave these
unchecked and we'll click Next.
| | 01:09 | Finally, I can specify a drawing template file.
| | 01:13 | Currently AutoCAD is going to
use the default drawing template.
| | 01:16 | If we were using this in an office
environment and we had an office template,
| | 01:19 | we could select that right here or if I
wasn't sure what to use, I could check this box
| | 01:24 | and I could specify my template
based on the type of work I'm doing, whether
| | 01:28 | it's Imperial or Metric.
| | 01:31 | For this title, I am going to go with
the default and then I'll click Finish.
| | 01:35 | Now, based on the answers that I gave to
those questions, AutoCAD has customized
| | 01:39 | the tools and palettes that I see on my screen.
| | 01:42 | If we look right down here, we can see
the name of the workspace that we created.
| | 01:46 | It's the initial setup workspace.
| | 01:48 | Now I'm unsure at this point if this is
the first time you've launched your AutoCAD 2010.
| | 01:53 | Maybe you answered your
questions differently than I did.
| | 01:56 | Maybe you see different
tools on your screen than I do.
| | 01:59 | I think it's important that we all start
from the same interface so what I would
| | 02:03 | like you to do is come down and click
this flyout and I'd like you to select 2D
| | 02:08 | Drafting & Annotation.
| | 02:10 | You can always come back to your
initial workspace later if you wish, but for
| | 02:14 | right now if we're both working with
the 2D Drafting workspace, we can be sure
| | 02:18 | that the tools that you see on my
screen will match the tools on your screen.
| | 02:22 | Now that we've made the adjustment, it's
time to jump to the next video and get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding model space| 00:00 | The first part of the interface we're
going to talk about is this large area in
| | 00:04 | the middle of our screen.
| | 00:05 | This area is called model space and
this is where we do all of our drafting.
| | 00:10 | This is our virtual drafting board.
| | 00:12 | Now I've got some line work on my screen.
| | 00:14 | I don't expect you to open the same drawing.
| | 00:16 | I only have this line work here as an
example of what you might see in model
| | 00:20 | space in a typical AutoCAD file.
| | 00:22 | Now the nice thing about model
space is that it's infinite in size.
| | 00:27 | That means we can draft anything we
want at a scale of one to one or full size.
| | 00:33 | Think about this for a second.
| | 00:34 | Back in the days when we drafted with a
paper and pencil, if I was an architect and
| | 00:38 | I was drawing this floor plan, I'd have
to draw it to a scale such that it would
| | 00:42 | fit within the confines of my sheet of paper.
| | 00:46 | Now that we're drafting with a computer,
we don't have to worry about scale.
| | 00:49 | We can draft anything we want, whether
it's as small as a gear or as large as an
| | 00:54 | entire airport and
we can draft it at full scale.
| | 00:58 | Now this model space
environment is actually a tab.
| | 01:01 | If I look a little bit lower in my
interface, I can see a series of tabs down there.
| | 01:06 | If you're familiar with Microsoft
Excel, these tabs will work the same way.
| | 01:10 | Currently my Model Space tab is Current.
| | 01:12 | I'm going to click on the Layout1 tab.
| | 01:16 | When I do, it appears we're looking
at a sheet of paper on our screen.
| | 01:19 | Now this actually is a sheet of paper.
| | 01:21 | Every new AutoCAD drawing comes with
two sheets of paper that can be used to
| | 01:25 | plot our drawings later.
| | 01:27 | These sheets of paper are called
layouts and we'll talk about these guys a
| | 01:30 | little bit more when we get
into our chapter about plotting.
| | 01:34 | For right now just know that if you see
a sheet of paper on your screen and you
| | 01:37 | want a return to model space,
simply click the Model Space tab.
| | 01:42 | Model space is the place for all of our
designs take shape, no matter how small
| | 01:46 | or large they may be.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Accessing the Ribbon| 00:01 | Let's take a second and talk about how
we access our tools in AutoCAD and how
| | 00:04 | those tools are organized on our screen.
| | 00:07 | If we look at the top of the interface
this area right up here is called our Ribbon.
| | 00:11 | This is where we access our AutoCAD tools.
| | 00:12 | Now the Ribbon is divided up into tabs.
| | 00:16 | By default the Home tab is current.
| | 00:19 | If you'd like to flip to another tab,
you can simply click the tab name to
| | 00:23 | access additional tools.
| | 00:25 | Think of the ribbon as being like a
large tool chest and each one of these tabs
| | 00:30 | represents a drawer in the chest.
| | 00:33 | Now each drawer or each tab is
divided up into panels and each one of these
| | 00:38 | panels represents a small set of tools.
| | 00:41 | For instance this panel, the Draw
panel, will allow me to create geometry and
| | 00:47 | this panel, the Modify panel, gives me
tools that allow me to edit my geometry.
| | 00:53 | Notice the tools on the panel are
organized in the order in which you would use them
| | 00:57 | and the tools that you are going to use
most often are much larger than the others.
| | 01:03 | In some cases a panel is going to have
a little downward facing triangle.
| | 01:07 | That means there are more icons than what
can fit within this particular size.
| | 01:12 | If I click the triangle, it will
expand the panel and give me access to the
| | 01:16 | additional tools and after I've
selected my tool and moved my cursor into
| | 01:20 | model space, the panel will collapse.
| | 01:23 | If you'd like your panel to stay in the
open state, simply click the triangle to
| | 01:27 | open, click this pushpin and then
that panel will stay open until you come up
| | 01:33 | and click the pin again to remove it.
| | 01:37 | Let's jump to the Annotate tab momentarily.
| | 01:40 | Take a look at these panels.
| | 01:42 | Notice on the lower right-hand corner
some of these guys have little arrows.
| | 01:46 | This arrow means that there is a dialog
box that's associated with this panel.
| | 01:50 | For instance if this is the Text panel,
I will click this arrow and AutoCAD
| | 01:55 | brings up a dialog box that
allows me to create a Text Style.
| | 01:59 | So if you see an arrow on your panel
that is just a shortcut to a dialog box.
| | 02:05 | Let me close this guy and I'm
going to return to the Home tab.
| | 02:09 | This is the tab that we
are going to use most often.
| | 02:13 | Take a look at this icon on the
upper left, this big red letter A.
| | 02:17 | If I click this it opens up my
Application menu and this gives me access to my
| | 02:21 | file maintenance tools.
| | 02:23 | Notice I can create a new file or I can
open one or I can save, print, email,
| | 02:29 | as well as do some other drawing utilities.
| | 02:32 | Now we will talk about several of these
options a little bit later in the title.
| | 02:36 | For right now notice that many of them are
available right up here at the top of our interface.
| | 02:41 | This toolbar is called the Quick
Access Toolbar and it does just that.
| | 02:45 | It gives us quick access to
the tools that we use most often.
| | 02:50 | To exit the Application menu, I can
simply move my cursor in to model space
| | 02:54 | and hit the Escape key.
| | 02:56 | One thing is for certain. As you begin
to use the Ribbon and access the tools,
| | 03:00 | you'll find that they're extremely
well organized and very easy to find.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Leveraging dockable palettes| 00:01 | Probably the most versatile tools we
have in our interface are called palettes.
| | 00:05 | Palettes give us quick access to
drawing content, properties and commands.
| | 00:10 | In this lesson, we are going to learn how
to incorporate palettes into our interface.
| | 00:15 | Now there are several palettes
available in AutoCAD and we can find them in the
| | 00:19 | View tab of our ribbon.
| | 00:20 | They are located right here in the Palettes
panel and each of these guy serves a unique purpose.
| | 00:27 | For our example I am going to bring up the
Properties palette by clicking this icon.
| | 00:33 | In my opinion, this is the
most important palette in AutoCAD.
| | 00:36 | This is one we use to change
the properties of our objects.
| | 00:38 | Now let these guys open on the screen.
| | 00:41 | Take a look at the little X.
I can click this to close the palette.
| | 00:44 | I am going to do that right now because
I want to show you a shortcut to bring
| | 00:49 | up the Properties palette.
| | 00:51 | We don't actually have to go to the View tab.
| | 00:53 | If you hold down Ctrl+1 on your
keyboard, it will bring up the palette no
| | 00:57 | matter what tab you are on.
| | 00:59 | The first we notice about
palettes is that they are huge.
| | 01:02 | They do take up a lot of screen real estate.
| | 01:06 | We can resize them with our cursor.
| | 01:07 | If I place my cursor on the
edge of this guy, the icon changes.
| | 01:11 | If I click and hold on my mouse, I can
drag this guy and release, make him a
| | 01:16 | little wider. I can click, hold
and drag and I can make him narrower.
| | 01:23 | If I click and hold on this vertical mast,
I can drag and drop and I can change
| | 01:28 | his position on screen.
| | 01:31 | If I click, hold and drag close enough
to the left or right edge of my monitor,
| | 01:36 | notice the shape changes.
| | 01:37 | At this point if I release my
mouse button he will dock on screen.
| | 01:42 | Now think about this. If this guy
is docked, this is just one palette.
| | 01:46 | Notice all the other
palettes I have available AutoCAD.
| | 01:49 | We certainly don't have room to have
all these guys docked at the same time.
| | 01:53 | Let me show you a better way that we can
manage these so we can have quite a few
| | 01:57 | of them available and not
take up much space at all.
| | 02:01 | What I am going to do is undock this
palette by clicking and holding on the
| | 02:05 | palette name and then I am going to
drag away from the edge of the screen
| | 02:08 | towards the middle and release and
then I'm going to right-click on the mast
| | 02:14 | and select Anchor Left.
| | 02:16 | This collapses my palette to
the margin of my interface.
| | 02:21 | So now if I want access to this guy,
I can simply place my cursor in the margin.
| | 02:26 | The palette will open up.
| | 02:27 | Once again if I need to make it a little
bit bigger, I can click and hold on the
| | 02:30 | edge and drag him out.
| | 02:32 | I can do my business and when I'm
finished and move my cursor out, the palette
| | 02:36 | will automatically collapse.
| | 02:38 | Now we can even take it one step further.
| | 02:41 | If I right-click in the margin and
select Icons only, it will collapse the
| | 02:48 | palette down to a single icon in my interface.
| | 02:51 | This means that I can actually have
several palettes open and only be taking up
| | 02:55 | a couple of icons on my screen.
| | 02:57 | I am going to bring up another palette.
Another important one is the Design
| | 03:01 | Center palette right here.
| | 03:02 | Let me click the icon to turn on this palette.
| | 03:05 | We would use the Design Center to move
content from one AutoCAD drawing to another.
| | 03:11 | There is a keyboard shortcut for this guy
as well, if you hit Ctrl+2 on your keyboard.
| | 03:18 | Notice that I just turned the palette off.
| | 03:20 | Let me hit Ctrl+2 again to
bring Design Center back up.
| | 03:24 | I'm going to anchor this guy as well.
| | 03:26 | Let me right-click on the mast and
I can select Anchor Left or Anchor Right
| | 03:31 | depending on which side of
the screen I would like him.
| | 03:34 | There we go and now I have the capacity
of two palettes on my interface and they
| | 03:40 | are only taking up two icons.
| | 03:43 | If the time comes where you would like
to dock one of these palettes, if you'd
| | 03:46 | like it open for an extended length of
time you, can simply click this Auto Hide
| | 03:51 | button and this will dock the palette.
| | 03:54 | If you want to return it to the icon state,
we can hover over the palette name
| | 03:59 | and we can click Minimize.
| | 04:02 | palettes can be the most versatile
tool that we have in our interface.
| | 04:05 | They pack the functionality of an
entire dialog box beneath a single icon.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Monitoring the Status bar| 00:00 | The area at the very bottom of our
interface is called the status bar and this
| | 00:05 | is where we look to see the
current status of our AutoCAD session.
| | 00:09 | Let me give you an example.
| | 00:11 | As I move my cursor up in model space,
take a look at the numbers in the lower
| | 00:15 | left-hand corner of my screen.
| | 00:17 | These numbers represent coordinates
and what we are actually seeing is the
| | 00:21 | current location of my cursor on the screen.
| | 00:25 | If we look at the right side of the
status bar, we can see I've got several
| | 00:28 | tools and icons down here.
| | 00:30 | Now we'll talk about several of these
guys as we work our way through the title.
| | 00:34 | For right now I want you to
pay note to this row of icons.
| | 00:38 | These icons represent mode settings and
a mode is something that we can adjust
| | 00:43 | to change the way our AutoCAD works.
| | 00:46 | The important thing to remember
is that these icons are toggles.
| | 00:50 | We can use these to turn the mode on or off.
| | 00:52 | Now if an icon is blue,
it means that the mode is turned on.
| | 00:57 | If the icon is gray it's turned off.
| | 01:00 | What I'd like you to do is click all of the
blue icons and turn all of your mode settings off.
| | 01:07 | This way we are both
starting with a clean slate.
| | 01:09 | Now don't worry. We'll talk about what
several of these guys do as we work our
| | 01:13 | way through the title but for right now
I want make sure our mode settings match
| | 01:18 | because that's the best way to ensure
that what you see me do on my screen
| | 01:22 | matches what you see on your screen.
| | 01:25 | If at any point as we work through
the title you see differences, the first
| | 01:29 | thing I want you to do is check to make
sure our mode settings are identical and
| | 01:35 | as we work through the title and you
eventually learn what these guys do,
| | 01:38 | you can turn them on and off whenever you like.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding the anatomy of a command| 00:01 | As you can see I have just launched my
AutoCAD 2010 and I am currently sitting
| | 00:05 | in the blank Drawing1.dwg file.
| | 00:09 | I'd like to take this opportunity to
talk about the AutoCAD commands themselves.
| | 00:13 | We are going to look at the workflow
behind each command because you know what,
| | 00:17 | they all work the exact same way.
| | 00:19 | So in this lesson we are going to look
at the anatomy of an AutoCAD command.
| | 00:23 | I would like you to do this with me.
| | 00:25 | Let's come up to the Draw panel in
our ribbon and we will launch the Line
| | 00:28 | command by clicking the icon.
| | 00:31 | Now that the command's active,
take a look at the bottom of the screen.
| | 00:34 | This area right down here
is called the command line.
| | 00:37 | This is where AutoCAD speaks to us.
| | 00:39 | This is where AutoCAD tells us what it
needs to complete the current command.
| | 00:44 | Right now AutoCAD is
saying 'Specify first point'.
| | 00:47 | So I will left-click a point on screen
to start my line but if I look at the
| | 00:52 | command line I can see Specify
next point or if I want to I can undo.
| | 00:57 | I'm going to left-click a
few more points on screen.
| | 01:01 | Take a look at the command line now.
| | 01:03 | I have two options here within the brackets.
| | 01:06 | Anytime you see choices between brackets,
these guys are called sub-options of a command.
| | 01:12 | A sub-option is just an additional feature
that's located within the running command.
| | 01:18 | If I want to access a sub-
option there's two ways I can do it.
| | 01:21 | One way is by using the keys on my keyboard.
| | 01:24 | If I simply type the capitalized letter
of the sub-option I want and hit Enter,
| | 01:29 | that's one way to do it.
| | 01:31 | So if I wanted to back up one segment
I can type U for undo and hit Enter.
| | 01:37 | If I wanted to back up another
one, I can type U and hit Enter.
| | 01:41 | Notice I am still in the command.
| | 01:43 | So I could pick some more points on
screen and if I wanted to close this shape,
| | 01:48 | I can simply type C for close and hit Enter.
| | 01:53 | Let's launch the Line command again.
| | 01:55 | I am going to come up and click the icon.
| | 01:57 | Once again I am going to
pick a few points on screen.
| | 02:00 | Let's look at another way to access sub-options.
| | 02:04 | This happens to be my personal favorite.
| | 02:06 | I like to get them through the right-click menu.
| | 02:09 | If I right-click, the sub-options
are always going to be located right in
| | 02:14 | the middle of the menu.
| | 02:16 | So if I wanted to back up one step,
I can simply click Undo.
| | 02:18 | If you want to back up
another one, right-click Undo.
| | 02:23 | I could continue on if I wish and if I
wanted to close this shape, I could right-click
| | 02:28 | and select Close.
| | 02:30 | Virtually 90% of the AutoCAD commands
contain additional sub-options and we can
| | 02:35 | access them either way.
| | 02:38 | I want to show you one more thing.
| | 02:39 | Let's launch the Line command one more time.
| | 02:41 | We will pick a few points on screen.
| | 02:44 | Let's talk about how we can
cancel out of a running command.
| | 02:48 | If I have a command active in my
command line and I want to get out of it,
| | 02:51 | I can simply hit the Escape key on my keyboard
and AutoCAD will stop the command in its tracks.
| | 02:57 | Now since you are just starting out
with this program, I can't emphasize enough
| | 03:01 | the importance of keeping
an eye on the command line.
| | 03:04 | Remember this is where
AutoCAD is speaking to you.
| | 03:07 | Quite often as a beginner, people
struggle because they may be entering
| | 03:10 | something when AutoCAD is
expecting something else.
| | 03:13 | So if you are having problems, that's
one of the first places you can look.
| | 03:18 | Don't worry. Once you get the hang of it,
you'll realize that all the commands
| | 03:21 | are essentially set up the same way
and you will begin to anticipate what
| | 03:24 | AutoCAD needs before it even asks for it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Customizing AutoCAD's preferences| 00:00 | AutoCAD is a very customizable program.
| | 00:03 | The amount of flexibility we have can
easily be seen in the sheer number of user
| | 00:07 | preferences that are available.
| | 00:09 | In this lesson we are going to learn
how to change the way AutoCAD behaves.
| | 00:13 | Now I have got a drawing open on my screen.
| | 00:15 | I don't expect you to open the same drawing.
| | 00:17 | This is merely here as a visual representation.
| | 00:20 | So just play along with me for a second.
| | 00:22 | If I'd like to adjust my AutoCAD
user preferences, I need to bring up
| | 00:26 | the Options dialog box.
| | 00:28 | One way I can do that is by right
clicking in the middle of my screen and at the
| | 00:33 | very bottom of the menu, I can select Options.
| | 00:36 | This brings up a very large dialog
box that gives me access to literally
| | 00:40 | hundreds of AutoCAD preferences
that are divided up under these tabs.
| | 00:46 | Now we are certainly not going to
go through all of these settings.
| | 00:48 | I am going to show you a couple, give
you an idea of how they work and then
| | 00:52 | I am going to show you how you can get
information to explain what the other
| | 00:55 | settings do for you.
| | 00:56 | First thing's first.
Let's take a look at an example.
| | 00:58 | I am going to come down and
set my Display tab current.
| | 01:01 | Notice that each tab is
divided up into named groups.
| | 01:05 | This makes the settings a
little bit easier to find.
| | 01:08 | If we look in the Window Elements group,
notice I have a checkbox called Display
| | 01:12 | scrollbars in drawing window.
| | 01:14 | I am going to click, put a check in the box
and then I am going to come down and click Apply.
| | 01:18 | When I do, watch my model space.
| | 01:22 | Notice as soon as I clicked Apply, I
now have scrollbars in my drawing window.
| | 01:27 | Now in reality, scrollbars
really aren't necessary anymore.
| | 01:30 | There are better ways to adjust our view.
| | 01:32 | So I am going to turn these back off.
| | 01:34 | Let me remove the check from the box by
clicking on it and then I will come down
| | 01:38 | and click Apply one more time.
| | 01:39 | As long as we are here, there is one
setting that I would like you to change
| | 01:43 | for the duration of this title and that
involves the background color of model space.
| | 01:49 | Let me click and hold on the top of my
dialog box and I will drag this guy down
| | 01:53 | so we can see the drawing.
| | 01:55 | Notice that currently my model
space background is set to white.
| | 01:59 | Now in the old days, model space was
always black and truthfully black gives us
| | 02:03 | a much better contrast between our
background and the colors of our line work.
| | 02:08 | Notice I have got some boxes on my
screen and I have set these guys to the seven
| | 02:12 | or eight standard Windows colors that we have.
| | 02:15 | Notice that the yellow is very
hard to read on the white background.
| | 02:20 | Let's set our model space back to
black and see if this guy is a little
| | 02:24 | bit easier on our eyes.
| | 02:26 | To do that, I'm going to click and
drag this dialog box back to the middle of
| | 02:29 | my screen and once again this is a
display issue, so I'm going to be on the
| | 02:33 | Display tab and in the Window Elements area,
I am going to come down and click the Colors button.
| | 02:40 | This brings up a dialog box that allows me
to adjust the colors of my interface items.
| | 02:45 | Now fortunately by default, 2D model
space and Uniform background happen to
| | 02:50 | already be selected.
| | 02:52 | So I am going to come over to the color
area and click the flyout and I'm going
| | 02:55 | to select black and apply and close.
| | 02:59 | Once again we will move up and
grab the top of the dialog box.
| | 03:02 | Click, hold and drag him down and
notice that my layers are much easier to see
| | 03:06 | on a black background.
| | 03:08 | This honestly is the way I prefer to work.
| | 03:11 | Now that you know how to change it,
you can experiment with other model space
| | 03:14 | background colors if you like, but for
the rest of the title, I am going to be
| | 03:17 | using a black model space background.
| | 03:20 | Once again I am going to drag the
dialog box back to the middle of the screen.
| | 03:24 | Let me show you where you can go if you
want information about what the rest of
| | 03:27 | these settings do for us.
| | 03:29 | Notice AutoCAD brings up a small paragraph
that explains to me exactly what that guy does.
| | 03:33 | How about arc and circle smoothness?
| | 03:36 | Once again I will just hover and
AutoCAD gives me the information.
| | 03:40 | In fact these little pop up
paragraphs are a user preference themselves.
| | 03:45 | Take a look at this in the Window Elements area.
| | 03:47 | I've got an option that say Show tooltips.
| | 03:50 | If I uncheck this and click
Apply, that will turn off the
| | 03:54 | additional information.
| | 03:55 | Now since we are just starting out,
this information can be helpful.
| | 03:59 | So I'm going to turn this back on and
click Apply and then we will click OK to
| | 04:03 | dismiss the dialog box.
| | 04:05 | At first glance the Options dialog box
may seem little intimidating. However,
| | 04:10 | as you continue to use the software, you
will begin to recognize the relationship
| | 04:13 | between the commands, the
interface and your user preferences.
| | 04:17 | Soon changing your settings
will become second nature.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Saving a workspace| 00:01 | In this session I want to talk
about the concept of a workspace.
| | 00:04 | Now a workspace is a saved configuration
of tools on our screen and while we are
| | 00:09 | not going to be doing much screen
customization in this title, I feel it's
| | 00:13 | important for you to understand this
general concept in the event the tools that
| | 00:17 | you see on your screen don't
match the tools you see on mine.
| | 00:20 | If that's the case, you'll know
exactly where to go to make the changes.
| | 00:24 | Now if you look at my screen
you can see I have got a drawing open.
| | 00:26 | We are not going to be
doing anything with this file.
| | 00:29 | This guy is here merely to
serve as a nice background image.
| | 00:32 | That way we are not working
with a completely blank interface.
| | 00:36 | If I look at the lower right-hand
corner of my screen, I can see that we are
| | 00:39 | already working with a saved workspace.
| | 00:42 | This guy is called 2D Drafting and Annotation
and he comes preinstalled with AutoCAD 2010.
| | 00:48 | Now AutoCAD 2010 includes other workspaces
and I can see those by clicking this flyout.
| | 00:53 | Right here above the horizontal
line or the additional workspaces that
| | 00:58 | are installed by default.
| | 01:00 | To switch to a different workspace,
I can simply select it from the list.
| | 01:04 | Let's take a look at 3D Modeling.
| | 01:07 | Notice how my screen changes.
| | 01:08 | My ribbon is now populated with tools
that are appropriate for 3-D drafting.
| | 01:13 | The general reasoning behind having a
workspace is taking the tools that you use
| | 01:18 | most often for your type of work and
making them available on your screen.
| | 01:22 | I am going to come down
and click the flyout again.
| | 01:25 | Notice I have a workspace
called Initial Setup Workspace.
| | 01:29 | This guy was created automatically
when you first launched AutoCAD 2010.
| | 01:33 | If you remember, you were given a
couple of dialog boxes and based on the
| | 01:37 | answers that you gave, AutoCAD created
a default workspace setup just for you.
| | 01:43 | In this title, we are going to be doing
a lot of 2D Drafting and Annotation, so
| | 01:46 | I am going to set that workspace current again.
| | 01:50 | I am going to make a couple of changes however
just to show you how we can save a workspace.
| | 01:55 | To do that, I'm going to add something
to my interface and then we will save it.
| | 01:58 | I am going to bring up the Property Changer.
| | 02:01 | This is the tool that we use to change
our properties and I am going to bring
| | 02:04 | that guy up by hitting Ctrl+1 on my
keyboard and as soon as he pops up on
| | 02:09 | screen I am going to click and hold
and I am going to drag this guy to the left
| | 02:12 | until the shape changes and then I'll
release my mouse button subsidies docked on screen.
| | 02:19 | Let's save this current
configuration as a workspace.
| | 02:22 | To do that, I am going to come down and
click the flyout and then I am going to
| | 02:25 | select Save current as and then I am
going to give this a name and I am going to
| | 02:30 | call it Jeff's 2d Workspace and
when I am finished, I will click Save.
| | 02:38 | If I look down on the lower right-
hand corner, I can see that my custom
| | 02:40 | workspace is now current and if I was
to click the flyout and jump to another
| | 02:45 | workspace and then click the flyout
and return, I can see that my custom
| | 02:52 | workspace has been saved.
| | 02:54 | Now I must admit, I don't like having my
Properties palette docked on screen all the time.
| | 02:58 | It does take up a little too much space.
| | 03:00 | So what I am going to do is
minimize this guy to a single icon.
| | 03:04 | To do that I am going to place my
cursor over the palette name and click the
| | 03:07 | Minimize button. That will collapse
into the left margin of my screen and then
| | 03:12 | I'm going to right-click in the
margin and select Icons Only. There we go.
| | 03:17 | That's much more helpful.
| | 03:18 | Now if I want the Property Changer,
I can simply place my cursor over this icon
| | 03:22 | to get access to the tools.
| | 03:24 | Now that I'm done I'm
going to resave my workspace.
| | 03:27 | Let's come down and click the flyout.
| | 03:29 | I am going to select Save Current As
and then I am going to click this flyout,
| | 03:35 | select the original name and click Save.
| | 03:38 | And do I want to replace it? Yes, I do.
| | 03:41 | In the future if I make further changes
to my interface, I can always save those
| | 03:45 | changes by updating my current workspace.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Accessing Help| 00:01 | When learning a program as large as AutoCAD,
you're undoubtedly going to have questions.
| | 00:05 | In this session, I am going to show
you where you can go to get answers.
| | 00:09 | First thing's first.
| | 00:10 | Take a look at the top of my interface.
| | 00:12 | This area up here is called the ribbon, and
this is where all of our tools are located.
| | 00:16 | Take a look at some of these tool icons.
| | 00:19 | At first glance, those guys can seem a
little cryptic and it may be hard to tell
| | 00:23 | what each of those guys does. Watch this.
| | 00:25 | If I place my cursor over a tool,
AutoCAD will tell me what that tool does and
| | 00:30 | if I wait a little bit longer AutoCAD
will give me even more information and
| | 00:34 | in this case, I'm also getting an illustration.
| | 00:37 | This additional information is
called an extended tooltip and I'll get an
| | 00:40 | extended tooltip if I hover a
little extra long over an icon.
| | 00:45 | If I need even more information about this
tool, take a look at the bottom of the tooltip.
| | 00:50 | Notice it says, Press F1 for more help.
| | 00:53 | If I hit the F1 key, on my keyboard
AutoCAD will launch context sensitive help
| | 00:58 | for the specific command.
| | 01:00 | And if I grab my slider here, click and
hold and pull up and down, I can get all
| | 01:06 | the information I need.
| | 01:07 | When I am finished, I can come up and
click the X to close the Help feature.
| | 01:10 | Now, this tooltip concept
doesn't only work for just the icons.
| | 01:15 | It also works in dialog boxes. Watch this.
| | 01:18 | I am going to come up to the Quick
Access Toolbar and click my Plot icon.
| | 01:22 | This brings up the Plot dialog box.
From here, if I question what any of these
| | 01:26 | settings does, I can simply place my
cursor over the setting and AutoCAD will
| | 01:30 | give me a nice description.
| | 01:32 | If further information is needed, most
of the dialog boxes contain a hyperlink
| | 01:36 | where I can get extended information.
| | 01:39 | Now, what if I need help in the
middle of a command? Watch this.
| | 01:43 | I am going to come over to the Draw panel
in my ribbon and launch the Circle tool.
| | 01:47 | If we look at the command line,
I can see that command is active.
| | 01:50 | Take a look at some of these sub-
options and I don't know what these guys do.
| | 01:54 | Well, no matter. If you have a command
active on your screen, if you hit the F1
| | 01:59 | key on your keyboard, once again
AutoCAD will take you to context sensitive
| | 02:04 | help for this command.
| | 02:06 | Notice here's the sub-options
right here, and they're all hyperlinks.
| | 02:09 | If I click a hyperlink, AutoCAD
will tell me what that sub-option does.
| | 02:14 | Once again, I am going
to close the Help feature.
| | 02:17 | What if I need help,
finding a command? Watch this.
| | 02:20 | If I come over to my Application menu,
click the big red letter A, this area at
| | 02:25 | the top of the menu is
where I can do a command search.
| | 02:28 | For instance, let's do a
search for the Plot command.
| | 02:32 | I am going to type Plot. Notice AutoCAD
will search all of its commands and
| | 02:36 | then it will show me the result of the search.
| | 02:39 | Notice the Plot command is located in the Quick
Access toolbar, which happens to be right here.
| | 02:45 | The Plot command is also located in
the Application menu under the Print icon
| | 02:49 | and we can find the Plot command on the
output tab of our ribbon in the Plot panel.
| | 02:56 | Also notice as I hover over these
options, I am getting additional tooltip
| | 02:59 | information, and to be honest,
these options are hyperlinks.
| | 03:02 | If I want to launch the command,
I can click this hyperlink from here.
| | 03:06 | Now we'll get into this command a
little bit later in the title, so I am
| | 03:08 | going to close this.
| | 03:10 | Take a look at the top of the screen.
| | 03:12 | Right up here, I can take and type
keywords for a specific topic that I am
| | 03:16 | having trouble with.
| | 03:17 | This is kind of like doing
a search on the Internet.
| | 03:20 | Let's say I am having trouble with
a concept involving the ribbon.
| | 03:23 | I am going to type ribbon and hit
Enter and AutoCAD, will search all of its
| | 03:28 | known sources of information.
| | 03:29 | Let me grab this slider and push it up.
| | 03:32 | Notice AutoCAD is looking in the
User Guide, the Command Reference,
| | 03:36 | the Customization Guide and
the New Features Workshop.
| | 03:40 | These are all places that reference
the ribbon, and if I see a topic that I like,
| | 03:44 | I can click this
hyperlink to get more information.
| | 03:49 | AutoCAD is a very feature rich
application and it's nice to know that it goes
| | 03:53 | out of its way to help you learn the program.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Opening, Viewing, and Saving DrawingsOpening an AutoCAD drawing| 00:00 | The first order of business in learning a
new program is knowing how to open a file.
| | 00:05 | So in this lesson, we're going to
learn how to open an AutoCAD Drawing.
| | 00:08 | To open a drawing, I am going to come
up to the Quick Access Toolbar right up
| | 00:12 | here at the top of my interface, and
I am going to click the second icon.
| | 00:14 | This guy represents Open.
| | 00:18 | This brings up my Select File dialog box
where I can navigate through my hard
| | 00:22 | drive to find the drawing I'd like to open.
| | 00:25 | In my case, the drawing I am looking for
is inside the exercise files folder and
| | 00:29 | we are going to look inside chapter_02.
| | 00:32 | I'll double-click to open that folder.
| | 00:34 | Now that we are in the folder,
notice I can see several files, each of
| | 00:38 | these guys contains a blue icon. This icon
represents that the files in AutoCAD Drawing.
| | 00:43 | Just for a second, take a look
at the bottom of the dialog box.
| | 00:45 | Notice it says Files of type.dwg.
| | 00:49 | All AutoCAD drawings have a .dwg extension.
| | 00:52 | DWG stands for drawing.
| | 00:55 | In this case, the drawing I would
like to open is this first drawing,
| | 00:58 | the ball diamond drawing.dwg.
| | 00:59 | Let me click this once to select it.
| | 01:01 | Notice I get a nice preview
over here to the right side.
| | 01:04 | This is what the file looked like the
last time it was saved by the way and then
| | 01:08 | I'll come down and click Open and we
can see the file is opened on my screen.
| | 01:14 | Now that's one way to open an AutoCAD Drawing.
| | 01:16 | Let me show you another way.
| | 01:17 | Let's close this file first.
| | 01:19 | To do that I am going to come up and
click this X. That will close this drawing.
| | 01:24 | Another way we can open drawings is
by going to the Application menu.
| | 01:27 | Let me come up and click this big red
letter A. From here, I can come down to
| | 01:31 | the Open menu, come over and select
Drawing. This brings up the exact same
| | 01:36 | Select File dialog box.
| | 01:39 | From here, once again, I
can select a drawing to open.
| | 01:41 | Let me give you a shortcut.
| | 01:44 | Let's say there is a folder that we
go to frequently to open our AutoCAD drawings,
| | 01:48 | the exercise files folder perhaps.
| | 01:51 | Let me show you a fast
way that we can get there.
| | 01:54 | First thing I am going to
do is navigate to that folder.
| | 01:56 | Now my folder happens to be on the desktop.
| | 01:58 | Yours may be someplace else.
| | 02:00 | I am going to come down and click Desktop.
| | 02:02 | Here is the exercise files folder.
| | 02:04 | I am going to click and hold on this
guy, drag him over to the left side of
| | 02:08 | the dialog and release.
| | 02:10 | This adds this folder as a favorite place.
| | 02:13 | Now the next time I want to open a
drawing, I can come right to this dialog box,
| | 02:17 | I can come right over here and
click my favorite place and it opens up
| | 02:20 | that folder for me.
| | 02:22 | At any point in the future, if I want
to remove this guy from the list, I can
| | 02:25 | simply right-click and select Remove.
| | 02:28 | For now, I am going to leave
him there. That will be very handy.
| | 02:31 | Since I am in the folder, I am
going to double-click on chapter_02.
| | 02:34 | Once again, let's open up this first drawing.
| | 02:38 | I want to show you one more helpful aspect
of the Application menu. Take a look at this.
| | 02:42 | I am going to come up and click the A.
Right here on the right side of this menu
| | 02:46 | I can see a listing of my Recent Documents.
| | 02:49 | These are the last several
AutoCAD Drawings that I've opened.
| | 02:52 | Now if you're not seeing Recent
Documents, there are two icons here.
| | 02:56 | These are actually like a toggle.
| | 02:57 | Let me click this one, this one will show me
a listing of the open drawings that I have.
| | 03:02 | Currently, I've got my default
AutoCAD Drawing1 open, as well as this file.
| | 03:06 | Let me jump back to Recent Documents.
| | 03:09 | Notice that each of these file
names has a pushpin next to it.
| | 03:13 | If I click the pushpin, AutoCAD will
maintain this drawing name in the list.
| | 03:18 | It will never drop off.
| | 03:20 | That way if there is a file that I open
on a regular basis, I can just go right
| | 03:23 | to my Application menu
and I can grab it from here.
| | 03:27 | Since I'm already in my drawing right
now and I am finished with the Application menu,
| | 03:30 | I am going to move outside
the menu and hit Escape to close.
| | 03:34 | Opening drawings in AutoCAD is very
similar to opening files in other programs.
| | 03:38 | And if you make use of the Recent
Documents menu or the Favorite Places feature,
| | 03:43 | you can get even faster access to your drawings.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding mouse functions| 00:01 | Back in the old days, we used to
create our drawings using a drafting pencil.
| | 00:05 | Today, we work with a mouse.
| | 00:07 | In this lesson, we're going to explore how
our mouse buttons function inside of AutoCAD.
| | 00:11 | If you take a look at my screen, you
can see I've got a mechanical example.
| | 00:15 | This happens to be a
drawing of a handheld video game.
| | 00:18 | Now let's start our mouse discussion by
talking about, the left-mouse button or a left-click.
| | 00:24 | In AutoCAD a left-click
allows us to make a selection.
| | 00:27 | For instance, if I place my cursor
over this line and left-click, notice I
| | 00:32 | just selected the line.
| | 00:33 | Let me left-click on this
dimension. I just selected the dimension.
| | 00:36 | I am going to move up into the ribbon
and I am going to left-click on this tool.
| | 00:40 | This guy happens to represent Erase.
| | 00:43 | Notice that I launch the tool
and that line work is now gone.
| | 00:46 | So a left-click allows us to make a
selection, whether it would be entities on
| | 00:50 | our screen, an icon in the ribbon
or an option in one of the menus.
| | 00:54 | All right, let's talk about the
right-mouse button or a right-click.
| | 00:59 | In AutoCAD, a right-click will
bring up a context-sensitive menu.
| | 01:03 | For instance, let me right-click
right here on the middle of my screen.
| | 01:06 | Notice the menu that I have.
| | 01:08 | Now I set this as context-sensitive.
| | 01:11 | That means that the menu that you
see will change, depending on when and
| | 01:15 | where you right-click.
| | 01:16 | For instance, let me hit Escape to
clear this menu, and I am going to come down
| | 01:20 | and right-click over my command line.
| | 01:22 | Notice my menu is different.
| | 01:23 | This one gives me options
related to the command line.
| | 01:26 | Let me move up and I'll
right-click in my ribbon.
| | 01:29 | Once again, I get a different menu.
| | 01:31 | This one is related to my ribbon.
| | 01:33 | With this menu, I can turn my tabs on
and off or I can turn off my panels.
| | 01:38 | I am going to click on
screen to remove this menu.
| | 01:41 | Let's take it one more step.
| | 01:43 | I'm going to select this dimension by
left-clicking and then I'll right-click.
| | 01:48 | Notice now I get options in my
menu that are related to dimensions.
| | 01:52 | This is very helpful if I would like to
edit my geometry or entities on my screen.
| | 01:57 | Since I don't want to make a change
right now, I am going to hit Escape to clear
| | 01:59 | the menu, and then I am going to hit
Escape again to deselect this dimension.
| | 02:04 | So to recap, the left-click makes a selection;
| | 02:06 | the right-click brings up a menu.
| | 02:08 | Soon the left and right-click functions
of your mouse will become second nature,
| | 02:12 | and you'll wonder how people were able to
manage in the old days using a simple pencil.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Zooming, panning, and regenning| 00:02 | AutoCAD drawings come in all sizes.
| | 00:04 | We can work on everything from a small
mechanical part to an entire college campus.
| | 00:09 | And we can have all of that
geometry visible on our screen.
| | 00:12 | So it's important that we know how to
navigate our way around inside of our files.
| | 00:17 | In this lesson, we are going to learn
how to use the Pan and Zoom commands
| | 00:20 | to adjust our view.
| | 00:22 | If you look at my screen you can see
I have got an architectural example.
| | 00:25 | This is a drawing of a floor
plan for a college dorm room.
| | 00:28 | Let me also mention that I'm
currently using a wheel mouse.
| | 00:32 | I have got a wheel located
between the left and right mouse button.
| | 00:36 | This type of mouse is very common these days.
| | 00:39 | The trick to panning and zooming in
AutoCAD is knowing how to use this wheel.
| | 00:43 | For instance let's say I would
like to zoom in on this bathroom area.
| | 00:48 | To do that I'll place my cursor inside
the room, and I will roll my mouse wheel
| | 00:53 | forward to zoom in and if I
roll the wheel back I zoom out.
| | 00:58 | Notice that my zooming is
centered or focused on the cursor.
| | 01:02 | So if I want to zoom in on the bedroom
area, I can place my cursor in this room,
| | 01:07 | and roll my wheel forward, or back to zoom out.
| | 01:10 | We can also use our wheel to pan.
| | 01:13 | If I click and hold the wheel down,
remember your wheel is also a button.
| | 01:18 | Notice my icon changes.
| | 01:20 | And as long as I hold this wheel down,
and move my cursor, I can pan my drawing.
| | 01:24 | Let me release my mouse button.
| | 01:27 | I'll come over to this Bedroom, and I'll
click and hold and my wheel and it will
| | 01:30 | pan and center this guy on screen.
| | 01:33 | Panning around in an AutoCAD
Drawing is very similar to panning in an
| | 01:37 | Adobe Acrobat file.
| | 01:39 | The important thing to
remember is when we were panning,
| | 01:42 | we are not actually moving our geometry.
| | 01:44 | We are moving our position or are view in space.
| | 01:48 | Now what if you don't have a wheel mouse?
| | 01:51 | Well, for the time being you can access
Pan and Zoom through the right-click menu.
| | 01:56 | If I right-click on screen notice,
Pan and Zoom are located right here.
| | 02:00 | I am going to select the Pan from the menu.
| | 02:04 | Notice my icon and now I'm able to
pan just by clicking and holding down my
| | 02:09 | left mouse button. When I'm finished,
I can right-click and I can select Exit.
| | 02:15 | Notice I can also jump to
the Zoom command from here.
| | 02:18 | I am going to pan back
over to the other bedroom.
| | 02:22 | We'll center this guy on screen.
| | 02:24 | Notice in the upper right hand
corner I have got some geometry.
| | 02:27 | This represents a desk and chair.
| | 02:30 | Let's zoom in on the desk, we'll center
that guy on screen, and let's zoom in on
| | 02:35 | this geometry in the corner.
| | 02:37 | As I get little closer I can see
that that is a handheld video game.
| | 02:42 | If we zoom in on the screen we can see
that these screen contains a copy of the
| | 02:48 | dorm room floor plan.
| | 02:49 | I am going to zoom in a little
bit further on this bed area.
| | 02:54 | Notice that I have zoomed in
quite a bit on this drawing.
| | 02:57 | Take a look at the line work on my screen.
| | 02:59 | Notice it doesn't look pixelated like
you would see in a photo editing program.
| | 03:04 | That's because AutoCAD
drawings are not based on pixels.
| | 03:07 | They're based on vectors.
| | 03:09 | This is a vector-based application,
meaning this line work that we see on screen
| | 03:13 | is all based on underlying
mathematical computations.
| | 03:17 | So I can zoom in on this as close
as I want and the line work is always
| | 03:20 | going to look good.
| | 03:22 | With one exception. Watch this.
I am going to pan down to the Bathroom area.
| | 03:27 | Take a look at my toilet symbol.
Now that guy should be round.
| | 03:30 | Right now, he looks a little bit angular.
| | 03:32 | Since AutoCAD is a vector-based program,
| | 03:35 | if we pan and zoom great distances,
it could be taxing on our processor and on
| | 03:40 | our video card and AutoCAD will
sacrifice the quality of our arcs to allow us
| | 03:45 | to pan and zoom freely on our screen.
| | 03:48 | Now this geometry will still plot just fine.
| | 03:51 | It just happens that right
now it doesn't look very good.
| | 03:54 | If I want to clean this up, I am
going to use a command called REGEN.
| | 03:59 | Now unfortunately, there is no icon for
REGEN. I can't get the command in the ribbon.
| | 04:04 | The only way to access REGEN is
through the command line. I have to type it.
| | 04:08 | And fortunately, I don't have to type
the entire command. If I just type re and
| | 04:13 | hit Enter, AutoCAD, regenerates the
database, refreshes my geometry and now
| | 04:20 | I see a better representation of
what this geometry should look like.
| | 04:24 | At this point, I am going to zoom out.
| | 04:25 | Let me roll my wheel backwards,
got to keep rolling the wheel.
| | 04:29 | Got to keep going little bit further back.
| | 04:31 | And notice, I'm still rolling my
wheel backwards. If you look at my status bar
| | 04:35 | in the lower left-hand corner, AutoCAD is
saying, Already zoomed out as far as possible.
| | 04:40 | Let me try and pan at this point.
| | 04:42 | Let me click and hold and pan.
| | 04:44 | Notice as I pan it's like
I am slamming into a wall.
| | 04:46 | AutoCAD is restricting my amount of panning.
| | 04:49 | This is also a REGEN issue.
| | 04:52 | Remember that panning and zooming is
taxing on your processor, and your video card.
| | 04:55 | So at some point AutoCAD is going to say hey!
| | 04:58 | You have moved a pretty good range now.
I need to REGEN the geometry to allow
| | 05:02 | you to pan and zoom further.
| | 05:04 | No problem. I can simply the
launch the REGEN command again.
| | 05:08 | To do that, I'll re and hit Enter
and now I can pan and zoom as normal.
| | 05:13 | Let me show you one more helpful thing.
I am going to zoom in on the kitchen sink area.
| | 05:19 | If the time comes, where you want to
back up and see the extents of your
| | 05:22 | drawing, the quickest way to do that
is by double clicking your mouse wheel.
| | 05:27 | If I double click my wheel, AutoCAD will
give me a zoom extents, such that I can
| | 05:32 | see the entire extent of my line work.
| | 05:36 | Using Pan and Zoom we can quickly
move around our drawing environment,
| | 05:40 | no matter how large or
small that environment may be.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working in a multiple-document environment| 00:00 | AutoCAD's interface is
considered a multi-document environment.
| | 00:04 | This means we can have more
than one drawing open at a time.
| | 00:08 | Opening multiple drawings is a
great way to compare geometry from one
| | 00:11 | drawing to another.
| | 00:13 | It also allows us to steal components
from one drawing and place them in another.
| | 00:18 | In this lesson we are going to learn how
AutoCAD allows us to work with multiple drawings.
| | 00:23 | Now, if you look at my screen, you
can see I've already got a drawing open.
| | 00:26 | This is an architectural floor plan.
| | 00:29 | At this point, I would
like to open another drawing.
| | 00:32 | To do that I am going to come up to the
Quick Access toolbar, and click my Open icon.
| | 00:36 | From here, I am going to
look inside the Exercise Files folder.
| | 00:40 | We'll go into the chapter_02
directory and we'll open up this
| | 00:44 | drawing, kitchen_detail.
| | 00:45 | Let me select this guy and we'll click Open.
| | 00:48 | Now, at this point, I have two
drawings open in my AutoCAD interface, and
| | 00:53 | you may be wondering hey,
where did the other drawing go?
| | 00:56 | Let me show you where we can
go to view the other drawing.
| | 00:59 | To do that, I am going to come up
and click the View tab on my ribbon.
| | 01:03 | And then I am going to come
down to the Windows panel.
| | 01:06 | Right here I have got an
icon that says Switch Windows.
| | 01:09 | This tool will allow me to flip
from one open drawing to another.
| | 01:13 | If I click the icon, notice AutoCAD
gives me a menu showing me the two drawings.
| | 01:18 | This checkbox shows me which
drawing is current on my screen.
| | 01:22 | If I want to flip to the other drawing,
I can simply select it from the list.
| | 01:26 | If I want to flip back we can come up
and click Switch Windows, and we can
| | 01:30 | grab the other drawing.
| | 01:32 | Now I love shortcuts.
| | 01:34 | Let me show you a keyboard shortcut that
will allow us to do the exact same thing.
| | 01:39 | If I hit Ctrl+Tab on my keyboard,
I can also jump to the next open drawing.
| | 01:46 | Once again, if I hit Ctrl+Tab I can jump back.
| | 01:51 | Now, what if I want to view
more than one drawing at a time?
| | 01:54 | Maybe I would like to do a side-by
-side comparison of two drawings.
| | 01:58 | I have got an icon right here
that represents Tile vertically.
| | 02:02 | If I click this guy, AutoCAD will
split my screen and allow me to view each
| | 02:08 | drawing in its own
separate window, side-by-side.
| | 02:11 | Now this is kind of like having
multiple versions of AutoCAD running, because
| | 02:15 | I can pan, zoom and work in this file, or
if I click inside this drawing and put
| | 02:21 | the focus on this window,
| | 02:22 | I can pan, zoom and work in this file.
| | 02:26 | Now, when would something
like this come in handy?
| | 02:29 | Let me give you an idea.
| | 02:30 | I am going to zoom in on this kitchen area.
| | 02:33 | Let's say I am working on my floor
plan and in my kitchen I have got a
| | 02:37 | countertop that wraps around and
I've got an eating area right here.
| | 02:40 | Let's say I would like to
place a couple of stools here.
| | 02:43 | But instead of drawing new geometry,
I think to myself, you know what?
| | 02:47 | I created a drawing a couple of
weeks ago that had some stools that are
| | 02:50 | exactly like what I need.
| | 02:52 | Well, that would happen to be this drawing.
| | 02:55 | Since this drawing is also open, I
can steal components of this file and
| | 03:00 | place them into this one.
| | 03:01 | Let me show you how we can do that.
| | 03:03 | I am going to click inside this window.
| | 03:05 | We'll put the focus on this drawing.
| | 03:08 | To move my geometry, I will click on it
to select it, and then I will place my
| | 03:13 | cursor over the dashed line work, and
click and hold. This copies the line work
| | 03:19 | to my cursor, and then I will drag it
into the other drawing and release.
| | 03:24 | Now that I am done, I don't need
this drawing anymore. I can move up and
| | 03:26 | click the X to close.
| | 03:28 | I'm not going to save my changes and
then I can maximize this drawing on screen.
| | 03:35 | Don't forget when you're using AutoCAD,
you'll never have to draw the same thing twice.
| | 03:40 | If we use the multi-document feature, we can
quickly move geometry from one file into another.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Saving your work| 00:01 | The most important feature we have in
AutoCAD is the ability to save our work.
| | 00:05 | Saving allows us to walk away from an
unfinished drawing, and then resume work on it later.
| | 00:11 | In this lesson, we are going to
learn how to save an AutoCAD drawing.
| | 00:15 | I'm using this detail drawing to
show you how to save your work.
| | 00:19 | If you'd like to follow along you can
use any newly created file you want, and
| | 00:24 | this drawing has not yet been saved.
| | 00:26 | We can tell that by looking up the
header. Notice it still says Drawing1.dwg,
| | 00:31 | which is the blank drawing that we
start with whenever we launch AutoCAD.
| | 00:36 | So I've worked on this drawing up to this point.
| | 00:38 | Let's say we've reached the end of the workday.
| | 00:40 | It's time to go home.
| | 00:41 | So I'm going to save this drawing, such
that I can pick up where I left off tomorrow.
| | 00:46 | If I would like to save this drawing,
I am going to come up to Quick Access
| | 00:50 | Toolbar and click the Save icon.
| | 00:54 | This brings up my Save Drawing As
dialog box, and I am going to save my drawing
| | 00:59 | right here on the Desktop.
| | 01:01 | Let me come down on the File name area
and we'll change this from Drawing1 to
| | 01:06 | fence-detail and I'll click Save.
| | 01:11 | Take a look at the header now.
| | 01:12 | Notice we can now see
that this is a saved drawing.
| | 01:16 | At this point we will simulate the end
of the day. I am going to come over and
| | 01:19 | close this drawing by clicking the X.
All right, now I'm coming in the next day.
| | 01:24 | It's time to open this drawing.
| | 01:26 | To open the drawing I am going to come
up the Application menu and click and
| | 01:30 | I am going to move over into the Recent
Documents area, since this is the last
| | 01:34 | drawing that I worked on.
| | 01:35 | It's right here on the list and I can
open it by simply clicking the file name.
| | 01:39 | Now I can continue to work on the file.
I can add dimensions. I can change my geometry.
| | 01:44 | And if I ever have to save the drawing again,
I can simply come up and click the Save icon.
| | 01:49 | Now notice that time when I clicked
the icon, I didn't get a dialog box.
| | 01:53 | In fact, we really didn't see anything
happen, other than if we looked down at
| | 01:56 | the command line, we can see
that the QSAVE command was launched.
| | 02:00 | If we are working in a drawing that
has already been saved and we click
| | 02:05 | the Save icon, AutoCAD will overwrite the
original version with the current version.
| | 02:11 | So at any point in the future, saving
the drawing is as quick as coming up
| | 02:14 | and clicking the icon.
| | 02:16 | Now what if I want to save this
drawing with a different name?
| | 02:19 | Or maybe I'd like to save
it in a different place.
| | 02:22 | To do that, I am going to come up
to the Application menu and click.
| | 02:25 | Then I am going to come
down to Save As and hover.
| | 02:28 | Notice in the menu all the different choices
that I have that I can use to save this file.
| | 02:34 | Now typically we are always going to
save our files in AutoCAD Drawing.
| | 02:37 | So I can click it right from the menu
here, or as a shortcut, we really don't
| | 02:42 | have to go into the menu at all.
| | 02:43 | If I simply click right here on Save
As, AutoCAD is going to assume that I'd
| | 02:48 | like to save this is a DWG.
| | 02:51 | At this point I could navigate to a
different folder on my hard drive or I could
| | 02:54 | take and give this drawing a different name.
| | 02:57 | In this case, I am going to
leave the drawing just as it is.
| | 02:59 | I am going to come up and close
this dialog by clicking the X.
| | 03:01 | Very seldom where you start and finish an
AutoCAD drawing during a single session.
| | 03:06 | If the time comes, where you need
to walk away from your computer.
| | 03:09 | You can use the Save or Save As features to store
your drawing such that you can return to it later.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Saving time with templates| 00:01 | Instead of starting all of our drawings
from a blank slate, why not start with a
| | 00:05 | drawing that already
contains the items we use most?
| | 00:08 | In this lesson, we are going to take
a look at the concept of templates.
| | 00:12 | Now, if you look at my screen you can
see I have just launched my AutoCAD 2010.
| | 00:16 | We can see that because I'm currently
sitting in the Drawing1.dwg file, that
| | 00:21 | means that this file has not yet been
saved, and more importantly this drawing
| | 00:25 | is completely blank.
| | 00:27 | It contains no content whatsoever.
| | 00:29 | Anything I want in this drawing, I am
going to have to create in this drawing.
| | 00:33 | Instead of starting from this
drawing, let's say I would like to use a
| | 00:36 | different startup drawing.
| | 00:38 | I am going to start from a template.
| | 00:40 | To do that I am going to come up to my
Application menu and click the letter A.
| | 00:44 | I am going to come down to New and
I'll come over and select Drawing.
| | 00:48 | This brings up my Select template dialog box,
where I can choose a new startup drawing,
| | 00:53 | and we can see that there are several
files pre-installed with AutoCAD 2010.
| | 00:58 | First thing's first. Notice all of
these files have a .dwt extension.
| | 01:03 | DWT stands for Drawing Template, and
here's the secret. There is no difference
| | 01:08 | between an AutoCAD drawing
and an AutoCAD drawing template.
| | 01:11 | It's the exact same file,
just a different file extension.
| | 01:15 | Essentially all of these files are
AutoCAD drawings that already have content.
| | 01:20 | Now the example we are going to use is
not located inside the default template.
| | 01:24 | It's actually located inside our exercise files.
| | 01:27 | So I'm going to jump to my Desktop,
where I have placed my exercise files folder.
| | 01:32 | I will double-click to open this, we'll
go inside the chapter_02 folder, and
| | 01:37 | we will select this file as
our example and click Open.
| | 01:42 | Now it doesn't look like
a whole lot has changed.
| | 01:43 | If we look at the top of the
screen, we can see I'm in a new file
| | 01:46 | called Drawing2.dwg.
| | 01:49 | What AutoCAD has done, it's taken our
template drawing and used that as the
| | 01:53 | starting point of our new file.
| | 01:56 | At first glance, this file looks empty,
but if I come down here and take a look
| | 02:00 | at my Layout tabs, I can
see these guys have names.
| | 02:03 | I'm going to click to select the 8.5x11
and notice that I've got a title block
| | 02:08 | in this drawing already.
| | 02:09 | Let's come down and click
22x34 and we'll click 11x17.
| | 02:15 | So while this drawing contains
no geometry and model space,
| | 02:18 | it has three preset layouts with title
blocks that I can use when the time comes
| | 02:23 | that I'd like to print
the geometry that I create.
| | 02:26 | The idea behind a template is you take
the items that you use most, you put them
| | 02:30 | in an AutoCAD drawing, and then
you save that drawing as a template.
| | 02:34 | Your templates might contain text styles,
title blocks, company logo, dimension
| | 02:39 | styles or common symbols.
| | 02:42 | By starting your drawing from a template,
your drawing will already have many of
| | 02:45 | the components that you'll regularly use.
| | 02:47 | Now we are going to do any work in this file.
| | 02:49 | So I'm going to close it.
| | 02:51 | Let me move up and we'll click the X,
and I am not going to save changes.
| | 02:56 | This returns us to our
blank file that we started with.
| | 02:58 | Now you may be asking, how do
you go about creating a template?
| | 03:02 | Well, remember a template is
nothing more than a drawing.
| | 03:05 | So I'm in a drawing right now.
| | 03:07 | Let's turn this into a template.
| | 03:09 | First we have to add some content.
| | 03:10 | Now we haven't talked much about
creating content yet, so for the purpose of
| | 03:14 | this example, I am just
going to create a simple circle.
| | 03:16 | I am going to come up and
launch my Circle command right here.
| | 03:20 | I'll pick a point on screen
and then I'll pick another point.
| | 03:23 | Let's say this circle
represents our company logo.
| | 03:25 | This is something that would obviously
be in all the drawings that we create.
| | 03:30 | Now we can create other content. For right
now we are going to stick with just the circle.
| | 03:33 | Let's save this drawing as a template.
| | 03:36 | To do that I am going to come up
to the Application menu and click.
| | 03:39 | I'm going to come down to Save As and then I'm
going to come over and select a Drawing Template.
| | 03:46 | Once again AutoCAD returns
me to my Template directory.
| | 03:49 | Notice I am now saving
this drawing with a DWT extension.
| | 03:53 | I am going to change the file name to
my custom template and I'll click Save.
| | 04:01 | At this point, I could give
my template a description.
| | 04:03 | I'm going to keep the default
for now and I'll click OK.
| | 04:08 | Now let's close this drawing, and let's
try and start a new file using our template.
| | 04:16 | Let's click the Application menu,
I'll select New, and now we can find our
| | 04:21 | template in the list.
| | 04:23 | If you happen to be wondering,
the standard template that we always start with
| | 04:26 | in AutoCAD, it's this guy right here, acad.dwt.
| | 04:30 | That's the default that we typically start with.
| | 04:33 | Let's come down and find ours,
there we go, my custom template.
| | 04:37 | I will select this and click Open.
| | 04:40 | I have now created a new drawing
using my template as a starting point.
| | 04:46 | Templates can save you a lot of time.
Think of it this way. Why start every
| | 04:50 | drawing from an empty file, when you
can start from a template that already
| | 04:54 | contains the content you use most?
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Creating Basic GeometryConstructing lines| 00:00 | AutoCAD is all about
putting our designs on paper.
| | 00:03 | So it's time we start creating some line work.
| | 00:06 | In this lesson, we're going to look at
AutoCAD most basic tool, the Line command.
| | 00:12 | If you look at my screen, you can
see I have got a large green rectangle.
| | 00:15 | This shape is going to serve as a boundary.
| | 00:17 | It's kind of like a sandbox.
| | 00:19 | We're going to use the shape to play
around and explore AutoCAD's line Command
| | 00:24 | Let's launch the tool by coming up to the
draw panel in our ribbon and clicking the icon.
| | 00:29 | If I look at the command line, AutoCAD
says, 'Specify first point.' I'll pick a
| | 00:34 | point on screen and then
I'll pick a few more points.
| | 00:37 | Fairly easy to use the Line command.
| | 00:40 | Notice as I move my cursor for each
segment, take a look at how the line moves
| | 00:44 | with the cursor. This is
called the Rubber Band effect.
| | 00:48 | Before I create my next segment,
I'm going to at the command line.
| | 00:51 | Notice I can specify another point or
I've got some sub-options here. I could
| | 00:55 | close the shape or I could
undo to back up one segment.
| | 00:59 | To access a sub-option, I can right-click
and I can find them right here in the menu.
| | 01:04 | I'm going to select Undo to back up a segment.
| | 01:08 | You know what, I'm going to backup one more,
there we go and then I can continue on.
| | 01:13 | And if I want to close to shape I can
simply right-click and select Close.
| | 01:17 | I'm going to launch the command one more time.
| | 01:21 | Let's pick a few points on screen.
| | 01:23 | At this point let's say I was
finished with this geometry. To get out of the
| | 01:27 | command there's two ways I can do it.
| | 01:28 | One is by simply hitting
the Escape key like that.
| | 01:33 | AutoCAD stops the command
immediately or let me launch the command again.
| | 01:39 | If I'm in the middle of a command,
at the point I'm finished I can
| | 01:42 | right-click and select Enter.
| | 01:46 | That will also finish the command.
| | 01:47 | You will soon find that all
AutoCAD commands function the same way.
| | 01:52 | Now this line work that
we've created is well, it's nice.
| | 01:55 | It's very abstract.
| | 01:57 | It has no real geometric value.
| | 02:00 | Let's try and create some line work
that's based on dimensions. All right!
| | 02:03 | I'm going to come up and
launch the Line command again.
| | 02:06 | I'm going to pick a point on screen and
this time, I'm going to pull off to the
| | 02:11 | right here and I'm going to
type in a value on my keyboard.
| | 02:13 | I'm going type a distance of 5 and hit Enter.
| | 02:18 | Notice I've created a segment 5 units
long in the direction I was pulling.
| | 02:22 | Let me pull down in this direction.
I'm going to type 7 and hit Enter.
| | 02:26 | Let me pull in this direction and
I'm going to type 9 and hit Enter.
| | 02:32 | And when I'm finished with my shape I'm
going to only right-click and select Close.
| | 02:37 | This method of drawing is called
Direct Distance Entry and while we're still
| | 02:41 | scribbling on our screen this line
work is based on real dimensions.
| | 02:46 | Now that we have a functional
understanding of how to use the Line command,
| | 02:50 | we're ready to move onto the next
lesson where we'll learn how to create some
| | 02:53 | geometrically accurate line work.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Locking angles with the Ortho and Polar modes| 00:00 | The purpose of drafting is to
create and reproduce accurate geometry.
| | 00:05 | In this session, we're going to learn
how to use the Line command to create some
| | 00:08 | line work that has geometric value.
| | 00:11 | Now, before I get started, take a
look at my Status bar, right down here.
| | 00:14 | All of my mode settings happen to be turned off.
| | 00:17 | They all appear gray.
| | 00:19 | If you're going to work along with me
make sure that your mode settings match mine.
| | 00:23 | This guys are just toggles. If you
click it once it's blue, blue means it's on.
| | 00:27 | When it's gray, it's turned off.
| | 00:29 | Now that we've done our
housekeeping, let's launch the Line command.
| | 00:33 | I'm going to come up and click the
icon and then I'm going to start my
| | 00:37 | line right about here.
| | 00:38 | I'll pick a point on screen.
| | 00:40 | Let's say I would like to create
a simple square that measures 5x5.
| | 00:46 | While at this point, as I move my cursor,
it would be nice if I had a little bit
| | 00:49 | more control over the angle at
which I was pulling this line segment.
| | 00:54 | To get more control, I'm
going to use the mode setting.
| | 00:57 | I'm going to come down and click this
guy right here, the third one from the left.
| | 01:00 | This guy represents Ortho.
| | 01:02 | When I click this and turn it on, notice I am
now locked to 90 degree increments on my screen.
| | 01:08 | That means, I can pull to the right and
I can type 5 for a distance and hit Enter.
| | 01:13 | I can then pull down and type 5. Enter.
| | 01:17 | I can pull to the left, type 5 and hit
Enter and then I'm going to right-click
| | 01:23 | and select Close to close my shape.
| | 01:26 | So the Ortho mode locks our
cursor movements to 90 degree increments.
| | 01:31 | And its important note we can turn
that mode on and off even if we are in the
| | 01:35 | middle of a command.
| | 01:37 | Knowing what we know now, I'm going to
pan this drawing over and let's see if we
| | 01:41 | can replicate this
geometry that we see on screen.
| | 01:45 | Once again I'm going to launch the Line
command by clicking the icon, I'll pick
| | 01:49 | a point on screen and we'll draw
this guy in a clockwise direction.
| | 01:54 | Now my Ortho is locked.
| | 01:55 | So I will pull to the left and type 10.
| | 01:57 | I will pull up and type 10.
| | 02:01 | Pull to the right and type 4.
| | 02:03 | I'll come down and type 6.
| | 02:04 | Let me mention this. When you first
start using AutoCAD and you lock your Ortho,
| | 02:10 | your screen can look a little confusing,
especially if you pull back over a line
| | 02:14 | segment that you just created.
| | 02:16 | Notice that it looks like it disappears.
| | 02:19 | It's actually AutoCAD trying to
display both lines on top of each other.
| | 02:23 | Don't let that worry you. Simply move
your cursor away to see your line seg.
| | 02:27 | Let's finish this up. I'm going to
type 6 and hit Enter and then I'm going to
| | 02:31 | right-click and select Close to finish my shape.
| | 02:35 | Now once you turn Ortho on, it is
on forever until you turn it off.
| | 02:38 | If we would like to turn it off,
we can simply come down and click the mode
| | 02:42 | setting or here's a shortcut.
If you hit the F8 key on your keyboard.
| | 02:47 | F8 turns Ortho on, F8 turns Ortho off.
| | 02:51 | I'm going to pan to the right here just
a little bit more just get some blank space
| | 02:57 | and I would like to do a
little bit more drafting.
| | 02:59 | Let's launch the Line command again.
| | 03:01 | Let's pick a point on screen and
let's talk about another mode setting.
| | 03:05 | You know the Ortho works nice.
| | 03:06 | It locks us to 90 degree increments but
what if I want angles less than 90?
| | 03:12 | In that case I'm going to look at
to this mode setting right here.
| | 03:15 | The Polar Tracking mode.
| | 03:16 | Let me the click to turn this guy on.
| | 03:19 | Notice as I move my cursor now with Polar Tracking on,
AutoCAD will snap to 90 degree increments.
| | 03:26 | I can still draft at other awkward
angles but at any point if I'd like a 90,
| | 03:32 | I can simply snap to that ray to get the angle.
| | 03:37 | Let me hit Escape to
cancel out of this line segment.
| | 03:39 | Now at this point Polar Tracking isn't
going to help us much because we have 90 degree
| | 03:43 | increments with Ortho. Watch this.
| | 03:46 | If I come down and right-click on this
mode setting, AutoCAD will show me what
| | 03:50 | the current angle increments is set to
and if I would to like to change it,
| | 03:53 | I can simply choose a new angle
from this menu. I'm going to select 45.
| | 03:58 | Now when I launch my Line command and
pick a point on screen AutoCAD is now
| | 04:03 | snapping to every 45 degree angle.
| | 04:06 | That means if I would like to
create a diamond that measures 5x5,
| | 04:10 | I can simply pull up in this
direction and type 5, Enter.
| | 04:13 | I can pull downward in this
direction and type 5, Enter.
| | 04:17 | We will pull back this way and
type 5 and then finally I'm going to
| | 04:22 | right-click and select Close.
| | 04:24 | Now you may be wondering if there's a
shortcut to turn our Polar Tracking on and off.
| | 04:30 | That happens to be the F10 key.
| | 04:32 | If I hit F10 on the keyboard, I can
turn this guy on and off whenever I want.
| | 04:37 | Take a look at this.
| | 04:38 | If I try and turn on Ortho, Polar turns off.
| | 04:41 | As far as these modes go
it's an either/or proposition.
| | 04:44 | I can't have both of them on at the same time.
| | 04:46 | Let's pan the drawing over little bit more.
| | 04:50 | Knowing what we know now, let's
see if we can create this shape.
| | 04:54 | Since I've got some 45s in here,
I'm going to use Polar Tracking.
| | 04:57 | So I'm going to turn that on.
| | 04:58 | I'm going to hit F10.
| | 05:00 | Let me launch my Line command and
I'm going to start in the lower right-hand
| | 05:05 | corner and we will snap the left
here and I'll type in 6, Enter.
| | 05:10 | I'll will snap upward and type 2, Enter.
| | 05:14 | I will go to the 45 and type 4,
Enter, pull up and type, 2.
| | 05:20 | It's a race now to see who gets done first.
| | 05:22 | Let me pull up and type 2.
| | 05:25 | We'll pull over, do 6 and then finally,
I'm going to right-click and select Close.
| | 05:33 | As you can see, when combining the line
command with the Ortho and Polar modes,
| | 05:37 | we can quickly create
accurate geometry on our screen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Drawing circles| 00:01 | Drawing a circle in AutoCAD
is as easy as drawing a line.
| | 00:04 | Circles just require a
little bit more information.
| | 00:08 | In this lesson, we're going to
learn how to create some circles.
| | 00:11 | Now before I get started,
take a look at my status bar.
| | 00:14 | Notice that all of my mode
settings are currently turned off.
| | 00:18 | If you'd like to work along with me, make
sure that your mode settings match mine.
| | 00:21 | All right, let's talk about what
AutoCAD needs to create a circle.
| | 00:26 | Well, it's going to need the location of
the center point and then it's going to
| | 00:29 | need either the radius or the diameter.
| | 00:33 | Now a circle's radius is the distance
from its center point to an edge and the
| | 00:38 | circle's diameter is the distance
from one edge to the other that passes
| | 00:42 | through the center point.
| | 00:44 | It's essentially the width of a circle.
| | 00:46 | Now I'm going to pan
this geometry off my screen.
| | 00:49 | I'm going to hold down the wheel on my mouse.
| | 00:51 | It will push this off to the left.
| | 00:54 | Now that we've got some open space,
let's create our first circle.
| | 00:58 | To do that, I'm going to come up to the Draw
panel of my ribbon and click the Circle tool.
| | 01:04 | I'll then pick a point on screen to define my
center point and then notice as I move my cursor,
| | 01:09 | I'm getting the rubber band effect,
very similar to when we create a line segment.
| | 01:15 | In fact it just like the line command,
I can free pick a point on screen
| | 01:19 | to finish the circle.
| | 01:21 | Now this circle is nice, but it
wasn't created using any real geometry.
| | 01:25 | Let's create another circle and this
time we'll enter some real measurements.
| | 01:30 | Once again, we'll come up and launch the tool.
| | 01:33 | Pick a point on screen for our center
point and then take a look at the command line.
| | 01:37 | Notice that AutoCAD is
asking us to specify a radius.
| | 01:41 | Let's say I'd like to create
a circle with a radius of 3.
| | 01:45 | So I'm going to type 3 on
my keyboard and hit Enter.
| | 01:48 | I'm going to come up and launch the tool
again, because I would like to show you
| | 01:51 | something interesting.
| | 01:52 | Let me pick a point on screen for my
center and take a look at my command line.
| | 01:57 | Notice down on the far end, I can see
that AutoCAD is remembering the size of
| | 02:01 | the last circle that I made.
| | 02:03 | That means if I'd like to create
another circle of the same size, I can simply
| | 02:08 | hit Enter at this point and
accept the default value of three.
| | 02:12 | Let's create another circle and this
time we'll try entering a diameter.
| | 02:16 | I'm going to place this guy right over here.
| | 02:21 | We'll look at the command line
and notice I've got a sub-option for
| | 02:24 | Diameter right here.
| | 02:26 | To access that I can right-click, come
down and select Diameter from the menu
| | 02:30 | and then I can enter my diameter.
| | 02:33 | In this case, I'd like this
circle to have a diameter of eight.
| | 02:36 | So I will type 8 and hit Enter.
| | 02:38 | Essentially, that's it.
| | 02:39 | There is no real rocket science at
all to generating circles in AutoCAD.
| | 02:43 | Let's talk for a second about the Circle icon.
| | 02:47 | Take a look right up here.
| | 02:48 | Right next to the Circle
icon, there is a flyout.
| | 02:51 | If I click this, it opens up and
AutoCAD gives me a menu showing me that I can
| | 02:55 | create circles in six different ways.
| | 02:57 | I show you this because I want you to know
there is only one Circle command in AutoCAD.
| | 03:03 | These choices that you see in the menu
are merely shortcuts to be sub-options
| | 03:07 | within the Circle command.
| | 03:08 | For instance, let's try Center, Diameter.
| | 03:12 | I'm going to come down and
select this from the menu.
| | 03:15 | I'll then pick a point on screen for
my center point and if we look at the
| | 03:18 | command line, notice that AutoCAD
entered the Diameter sub-option for me.
| | 03:24 | So to finish this circle, I
can simply type in my diameter.
| | 03:27 | This circle is going to have a
diameter of 2, so I will type 2 and hit Enter.
| | 03:32 | So if you like the idea of the shortcut
icons, feel free to use them. Just know
| | 03:37 | that whichever one you use last
will become the default Circle command.
| | 03:42 | Now that we how to create some
circles I'm going to pan this geometry over.
| | 03:46 | Let's try and replicate some existing geometry.
| | 03:48 | I'm going to back up just a little bit,
I'll roll my wheel back and we will push
| | 03:52 | this geometry up on screen.
| | 03:55 | I'm going to launch the Circle command
by clicking the flyout and going back to
| | 03:59 | the standard Center, Radius method.
| | 04:02 | Then I'll pick a point on screen and
I will enter my radius of 3 and hit Enter.
| | 04:07 | Now I'd like to go right
back into the Circle command.
| | 04:09 | Let me give you another shortcut.
| | 04:11 | If you hit the Spacebar on your keyboard,
AutoCAD will re-launch the last command.
| | 04:16 | Notice I'm back in the Circle command.
| | 04:18 | I will pick a point on screen and
we'll type 6 for this radius and hit Enter.
| | 04:24 | Now let's take a look at this last circle.
| | 04:27 | I'm going to zoom in a little bit.
| | 04:29 | This is a diameter symbol, so this circle
must have a diameter of 8. Let's back up.
| | 04:36 | We'll center this on screen.
| | 04:39 | Once again, I'm going to come
up and launch the Circle command.
| | 04:43 | Since I'd like to enter the diameter,
I'm going to a right-click and select
| | 04:46 | Diameter from the menu.
| | 04:49 | I will then type 8 and hit Enter.
| | 04:51 | At this point in our training, we are
capable of creating any circle we wish,
| | 04:55 | so long as we know the
circle's radius or its diameter.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Activating the heads-up display| 00:01 | A major drawback to the command line
is that we must always glance back and
| | 00:04 | forth between our drawing
and the bottom of our screen.
| | 00:08 | Wouldn't be nice if we could have our
command line information show up at our cursor?
| | 00:12 | In this lesson, I'm going to
show you how we can do that.
| | 00:15 | The trick is by simply
turning on one of our mode settings.
| | 00:19 | I'm going to come down to my status
bar and I'm going to click this icon,
| | 00:22 | the third one from the right side.
| | 00:24 | This guy represents Dynamic Input.
| | 00:28 | Now that he is on, we really don't
notice anything different on our screen.
| | 00:32 | I'm going to launch a command.
| | 00:32 | I'm going to come up and click the
Line tool and notice that AutoCAD is now
| | 00:37 | speaking to me from my cursor.
| | 00:40 | This information that we see on screen
is also referred to as a heads-up display.
| | 00:44 | I'm going to pick a point to start my
line segment and notice as I move my
| | 00:49 | cursor I'm seeing a little more
information than I've seen before.
| | 00:53 | I can see a field that represents
the line length and the line's angle.
| | 00:58 | If I hit my Tab key, I can jump back
and forth between these fields and I can
| | 01:03 | use these fields to create accurate geometry.
| | 01:05 | For instance, let's say I'd like to
create a line segment that's 25 units long.
| | 01:11 | Right now, I am focused on the line
length and so I'm going to type 25 and hit Tab.
| | 01:18 | And what I do is move my cursor.
| | 01:19 | You can see that my length has got a
padlock meaning that no matter what I'm
| | 01:23 | going to create a 25 unit long line.
| | 01:26 | AutoCAD just needs to know the angle.
| | 01:28 | Now you may be wondering how the angles work.
| | 01:31 | That's why I have created the small
compass in the lower right-hand corner.
| | 01:35 | Let's say I'd like to create this line 25
units heading to the right or to the east.
| | 01:41 | That would have an angle of 0, so
I'm going to type 0 and hit Enter.
| | 01:46 | From this point, let's see if
we can create a 25x25 square.
| | 01:51 | To do that I'm going to type 25 for my
length and hit Tab. Make sure you don't
| | 01:55 | hit Enter, because if you hit Enter
you're going to do direct distance entry.
| | 01:58 | We don't want to do that.
| | 02:00 | Now my angle, I'm going to pull down in
this direction and my angle is going to be 90.
| | 02:06 | So I'll type 90 and hit Enter.
| | 02:08 | I'm then going to move in this
direction and type 25 for my length and Tab.
| | 02:14 | Now what's my angle?
| | 02:15 | You might think the angle is 90 degrees again.
| | 02:18 | The angles that we're entering are directions.
| | 02:20 | It's more like a compass and it's
not related to the last segment at all.
| | 02:24 | So if we look at our compass, we can
see that the angle is going to be 180.
| | 02:29 | That's the direction I want to go.
| | 02:30 | Let me type 180 and hit Enter and
to finish this guy up, I'm going to
| | 02:36 | right-click and select Close.
| | 02:39 | Now that we know how to use the Dynamic
Input or the heads-up display, let's try
| | 02:44 | and use it to replicate some geometry.
| | 02:46 | I'm going to pan my line work over
and let's create this simple rectangle.
| | 02:53 | Once again, I'm going to
launch the Line command.
| | 02:54 | I'm going to start in
the upper left-hand corner.
| | 02:57 | Let me pick a point on screen and my
line length is going to be 12, so
| | 03:02 | we'll type 12 and hit Tab.
| | 03:04 | The angle will be 0,
because I'm heading due east.
| | 03:08 | Let me pull down and I'll
type 30 for my length, Tab.
| | 03:15 | My angle is going to be 90, Enter.
| | 03:19 | Notice that my heads-up display is
allowing me to draft accurately without
| | 03:23 | having to use Ortho or Polar.
| | 03:26 | Let's type a distance of 12, Tab, and
my angle is going to be 180 because
| | 03:32 | now I'm heading west.
| | 03:34 | Then finally, I'm going to finish this
shape by right-clicking and selecting Close.
| | 03:39 | The heads-up display can be a very
helpful tool to use as we're drafting.
| | 03:43 | Not only does it give us additional
control over the creation of our lines,
| | 03:47 | it also allows AutoCAD to
speak to us from our cursor.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Understanding Drawing UnitsDefining a unit of measure| 00:00 | Up to this point, we've been
referring to our distances as units.
| | 00:04 | Now are these units inches, millimeters or feet?
| | 00:07 | Let's take a second and discuss
how we assign a real world unit of
| | 00:10 | measurement to our drawings.
| | 00:12 | If you take a look at my screen, you can
see I have just launched my AutoCAD 2010.
| | 00:16 | I'm currently sitting in
the default Drawing1.dwg file.
| | 00:20 | I am going to create a line segment.
| | 00:22 | So I am going to come up and launch the tool.
| | 00:25 | I'll pick a point on screen and then I'll
pull over to the right here with my cursor.
| | 00:30 | Now my angle is not important. I am
just going to type in at distance of 1 and
| | 00:34 | hit Enter, and when I'm finished with my line,
I'll hit Escape to get out of the command.
| | 00:40 | Let's zoom in on this guy.
| | 00:41 | We'll center them on the screen.
| | 00:44 | This line segment is one unit long.
| | 00:46 | Now my question is what
does this unit represent?
| | 00:50 | Is this line 1 mile?
| | 00:51 | Is it 1 millimeter?
| | 00:52 | Is this line 1 foot?
| | 00:54 | The answer is this line is whatever
unit of measurement I wanted to be.
| | 00:58 | All I have to do is tell AutoCAD the
units I'd like to assign to this drawing.
| | 01:02 | Let me show you where we'll go to do that.
| | 01:04 | I am going to visit the Application
menu by clicking on the big red letter A.
| | 01:08 | Then we'll come down and hover over
Drawing Utilities and when the menu pops up,
| | 01:14 | I am going to come up and select Units.
| | 01:17 | This brings up my Drawing Units dialog
box and right here in the middle of the
| | 01:21 | box is where I can assign a unit
of measurement to this drawing.
| | 01:25 | Currently, we can see that
AutoCAD is defaulting to Inches.
| | 01:28 | That means that technically speaking,
this line that I drew is 1 inch long.
| | 01:33 | Now I do have other choices.
| | 01:35 | If I click the flyout, it'll open up
a menu and we can see that most of the
| | 01:39 | popular choices are up at the top.
Unless you're working on the Death Star,
| | 01:43 | you're probably not going to be
using these guys down at the bottom.
| | 01:46 | For right now, I am going to leave
this set to Inches and you may be asking
| | 01:50 | yourself, you know, what unit of
measurement should I be using for my drawings?
| | 01:53 | Well, consider this rule of thumb.
| | 01:56 | If you're doing work for your own
personal usage, use whatever unit of
| | 02:00 | measurement is convenient for you.
| | 02:02 | If you're doing production work, check
with your CAD manager or other people
| | 02:06 | who work in your field to find out what the
industry standards are for your type of work.
| | 02:11 | I can tell you this. If you're an
architect, your drawings will always be set up
| | 02:15 | such that each unit equals an inch and
if you're a surveyor or a civil engineer,
| | 02:21 | your drawings will always be set up
such that each unit equals a foot.
| | 02:27 | Now that we've selected our units, take
a look at this note right here, Units to
| | 02:31 | scale inserted content.
| | 02:33 | This means if my next or neighbor is
using AutoCAD and he creates a drawing and
| | 02:37 | his units are set to millimeters and
he saves his file and gives it to me,
| | 02:42 | if I were to insert his drawing
into mine, AutoCAD will automatically
| | 02:46 | rescale his drawing such that it comes in at
the proportionally correct size in my drawing.
| | 02:53 | AutoCAD will do the units
conversion scaling for me.
| | 02:57 | Let's take a look at the top of the dialog box.
| | 02:59 | Notice I have got two groups, Length and Angle.
| | 03:02 | These settings control how
AutoCAD lists my geometry.
| | 03:06 | That means if I were to ask AutoCAD
about this line, AutoCAD will give me its
| | 03:10 | Length using decimal units to a
precision of four decimal spaces and I will see
| | 03:15 | its angle using decimals and the
precision will be to the even degree.
| | 03:20 | Note that in both cases, I can run
my precision up to eight spaces to the
| | 03:24 | right of the decimal.
| | 03:25 | I am going to leave this to four and
let's change our angle to two, just to make
| | 03:29 | a change and let's come down
and click OK and test this.
| | 03:35 | To list the properties of my line, I'm
going to use my Property Changer palette.
| | 03:39 | So I'm going to come up and select
my line. Now my palette happens to be
| | 03:43 | anchored to my interface. If your
palette is not visible on screen, you can
| | 03:47 | simply hit Ctrl+1 to turn yours back on.
| | 03:51 | Let me hover over the palette and when
this guy opens up, I can come right down
| | 03:54 | here and I can see the angle is being
given via decimal units to two spaces to
| | 03:59 | the right of the decimal.
| | 04:00 | Now that I am finished, I am going to
move my cursor outside the palette to let
| | 04:04 | that close, and I am going to hit
the Escape key to deselect my line.
| | 04:09 | Let's go back into the Units dialog box
and look at some of the other settings.
| | 04:13 | Once again, I am going to go to my
Application menu, we'll come down to Drawing
| | 04:16 | Utilities and we'll select Units.
| | 04:19 | Currently, I can see my Angle
type is set to Decimal Degrees.
| | 04:23 | If I click the flyout, I have some
additional choices, Degrees/Minutes/Seconds,
| | 04:25 | Grads, Radians or Surveyor Units.
| | 04:30 | The selection you make will depend
on the type of work that you're doing.
| | 04:33 | By far the most popular
option is Decimal Degrees.
| | 04:37 | If you've any questions regarding the
other options, simply hit the F1 key on
| | 04:41 | your keyboard and AutoCAD
will give you more information.
| | 04:45 | Currently, my Length type is set to
Decimal. I am going to click this flyout.
| | 04:49 | Notice we have additional choices here as well.
| | 04:52 | By far the most popular choices in
this menu are Decimal or Architectural.
| | 04:57 | For the purposes of our demonstration,
I am going to set this to Architectural.
| | 05:01 | If you've any questions about the other
settings, once again simply hit F1 on your keyboard.
| | 05:06 | Notice that since I've made this change,
my Precision is now being given to me
| | 05:09 | using fractional units.
| | 05:11 | This means if I was to list my geometry now,
it would be listed using feet and inches.
| | 05:17 | In fact, if you're an architect, this is how
you'll probably have all of your drawing set.
| | 05:21 | I am going to click OK to close this
dialog box and I'd like to open a couple
| | 05:26 | of real world drawing, so we can take a look
at how the units are set inside those files.
| | 05:30 | I am going to come up and launch the
Open command and we are going to go and
| | 05:34 | look inside our Exercise Files
directory, we'll look inside the Chapter_04
| | 05:38 | folder and let's open up
drawing number 01_survey.
| | 05:45 | This drawing represents a plan of survey.
| | 05:47 | This is a piece of property.
| | 05:49 | I can see there's a
couple of buildings on this lot.
| | 05:52 | This cyan line around the outside
represents the property boundary.
| | 05:56 | I'm going to zoom in on this line segment,
and I can see it's got a label of 234.88 feet.
| | 06:03 | Let's select the line segment and I am
going to go my Property Changer, and I
| | 06:08 | can see that the length of this line
is 234.88. So in this drawing each unit
| | 06:13 | must equal one foot.
| | 06:15 | To verify that, I am going to check my units.
| | 06:18 | Let's open the menu, we'll go to Drawing
Utilities and select Units and right here,
| | 06:25 | I can see this drawing is set up such
that each unit equals one foot. Let's close this.
| | 06:30 | We'll close this drawing, we won't
save changes and we'll open one more file.
| | 06:34 | I am going to click Open, we'll look
in the same Chapter_04 folder and
| | 06:38 | I'll select the 01_mounting_
bracket drawing and click Open.
| | 06:41 | This guy happens to be a metric example.
| | 06:44 | If I zoom in on the center of this
drawing, I can see this line is being
| | 06:47 | dimensioned at 465 millimeters.
| | 06:50 | If I select the line and go to my
Property Changer, I can see this line
| | 06:54 | is coming up at a length of 465, so in this
drawing each unit must equal 1 millimeter.
| | 07:00 | Once again, we can verify this by
bringing up our Units and we can see
| | 07:07 | this setting right here.
| | 07:10 | AutoCAD by nature is flexible enough to
allow you to draft using whatever unit
| | 07:14 | of measurement is most convenient for
you, and whether you like drafting in
| | 07:18 | inches, millimeters, feet or
something else entirely, you can always find
| | 07:23 | whatever you need in the Units dialog box.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Constructing geometry using architectural measurements| 00:00 | If you decide you'd like to draft using
architectural units, it's important to
| | 00:04 | note that AutoCAD is a little bit
picky about how you enter your values.
| | 00:08 | In this lesson, we are going to learn
the rules we need to follow when entering
| | 00:11 | architectural measurements.
| | 00:13 | If you take a look at my screen, you can
see I've got a drawing of a floor plan.
| | 00:17 | This happens to be a drawing of a
college dorm room and this drawing was created
| | 00:21 | using architectural units.
| | 00:23 | We can verify that by visiting our
Drawing Units dialog box. We can see right
| | 00:29 | here this guy is set to Architectural.
| | 00:30 | I am going to click OK to close this.
| | 00:33 | What I'd like to do in this drawing is
I'd like to take the geometry that we see
| | 00:37 | in this bedroom and I'd like to
replicate it in this bedroom and we're going to
| | 00:41 | enter our values using
architectural measurements.
| | 00:44 | So I am going to start up by zooming
in just a little bit, I will make this a
| | 00:47 | little closer on our screen, and we
are going to draw this rectangle first.
| | 00:52 | This represents a full-size bed and
the standard measurements for a full-size
| | 00:56 | bed are 6' 3'' x 4' 6''.
| | 01:01 | Let's come up and launch the Line command
and I am going to move over into this bedroom.
| | 01:05 | Now I am not going to be real
concerned about trying to match the distance
| | 01:08 | away from the wall.
| | 01:09 | That's not important right now.
| | 01:11 | I'm just going to pick a point on screen and
then I am going to make things easy on myself.
| | 01:16 | I am going to come down and lock
my Ortho to restrict my movements to
| | 01:19 | 90-degree angles, and then I am going pull
downward and I am going to type my first measurement.
| | 01:25 | I am going to type 4 and apostrophe.
| | 01:28 | The apostrophe is the key right
next to the Enter key on your keyboard.
| | 01:32 | AutoCAD needs this apostrophe to
recognize that we're entering feet.
| | 01:36 | I'll then type 6 and the quote.
The quote happens to be the exact same key.
| | 01:43 | The quote is the exact
same key as the apostrophe.
| | 01:45 | You just have to hold down
your Shift key to get it.
| | 01:48 | And AutoCAD needs this quote symbol
to know that we're entering inches.
| | 01:52 | At this point I am going to hit
Enter and I finished my first line.
| | 01:55 | Let me pull this to the left, now I am
going to type my next measurement 6' 3".
| | 02:04 | Notice that we're entering our values
that are very similar to how an architect
| | 02:07 | would write them on a piece of paper.
| | 02:09 | Once again, I'll hit Enter, I'm
going to pull in an upward direction and
| | 02:14 | we'll type 4' 6", Enter and then I'll right-
click and select Close to finish the shape.
| | 02:24 | Okay, now we'll draw this shape.
This rectangle represents a nightstand.
| | 02:29 | Once again, I am going to launch my Line
command and I'll pick a point near the bed.
| | 02:34 | Let's pulled down, I am
going to type 2' 3", Enter.
| | 02:39 | Now I'll pull the left and
we'll enter our next value.
| | 02:42 | Notice the next value has whole
inches and the fractional inches.
| | 02:47 | If there's anything tricky about this,
this is what you would consider the
| | 02:50 | tricky part. Watch this.
| | 02:52 | I am going to type 2' and then I'm
going to type 2 for my inches, dash,
| | 02:58 | three-fourth inches.
| | 03:03 | Notice where I put that dash. I put
it between the whole inches and the
| | 03:06 | fractional inches. We have to do that
otherwise AutoCAD looks at it as
| | 03:10 | 23 fourths which is incorrect.
| | 03:13 | Let me hit Enter to finish my line.
| | 03:16 | Once again, I'll pull up and I
am going to type 2' 3", Enter.
| | 03:22 | Then I could take the easy way out and
close but you know what, I'm going to
| | 03:25 | type the full dimension, just for
practice. I am going to type 2' 2-3/4 inches.
| | 03:34 | Always remember to separate your whole
inches from your fractional inches with a dash.
| | 03:38 | I'll hit Enter and then I can hit
Escape to cancel out of the command.
| | 03:41 | Now you may be wondering, are
there any shortcuts to entering
| | 03:45 | architectural measurements?
| | 03:46 | Well, there is one.
| | 03:47 | Let me show you how that works.
| | 03:49 | We are going to draw this last shape.
| | 03:50 | It's a circle that represents a lamp.
| | 03:52 | Let me come up and launch the Circle command.
| | 03:54 | I am going to pick a point approximately
in the middle of the nightstand and
| | 03:59 | then I'm going to type my radius 5-1/2.
| | 04:04 | That's your shortcut.
| | 04:05 | If you don't enter the quote symbol,
AutoCAD assumes you're entering inches.
| | 04:10 | Let's hit Enter to finish my shape.
| | 04:13 | As you can see entering architectural
measurements involves a little bit of
| | 04:16 | extra work on our part but it's still
quite simple so long as we remember how
| | 04:20 | AutoCAD wants us to enter the values.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with metric units| 00:00 | So you'd like to draft using metric units.
| | 00:03 | Well, in the big schema things, there
is a little more to drafting in metric
| | 00:06 | than merely changing our Unit Settings.
| | 00:09 | The first thing we need to understand
is that AutoCAD by default is set to an
| | 00:12 | Imperial Drafting Environment.
| | 00:15 | If you look at my screen, you could
see I have just launched my AutoCAD 2010.
| | 00:17 | I am currently sitting in
the default blank drawing.
| | 00:22 | Let's take a look at our Unit settings.
| | 00:24 | I am going to come up and click my
Application menu, then I am going to come
| | 00:28 | down to Drawing Utilities,
and I'll select Units.
| | 00:31 | Right here in the middle of the
dialog box, I can see that AutoCAD is
| | 00:34 | defaulting to Inches.
| | 00:36 | Now let's say I'd like to work in metric.
| | 00:37 | Maybe I'd like my units to be Millimeters.
| | 00:40 | I wish I could say it's as simple as
simply clicking this flyout, selecting
| | 00:44 | Millimeters from the list, and we're good to go.
| | 00:47 | I'm afraid that's not the case.
| | 00:48 | There is more to metric than
adjusting this one setting.
| | 00:52 | You see this setting doesn't account for
my line type scale or my metric paper sizes.
| | 00:58 | Watch this. I am going to click OK to accept
this setting, and then I am going to come up
| | 01:02 | to the top of the screen, and I am going to
launch the Plot command by clicking this icon.
| | 01:07 | We'll talk about Plot a little bit
later in this title, but for right now,
| | 01:10 | notice that AutoCAD is still
referencing my paper sizes using Inches.
| | 01:15 | So at this point, I am not
working in a full metric environment.
| | 01:19 | Let me click Cancel to close this.
| | 01:22 | The easiest way to work in metric is to
start from a metric template. Let's try that.
| | 01:27 | I am going to create a new drawing.
| | 01:28 | I am going to come up to the Quick
Access Toolbar, and we'll click the New icon,
| | 01:33 | and in the Template dialog box, I am
going to select this template, acadiso.
| | 01:38 | This template is designed for metric drafting.
| | 01:41 | Then I'll come down and select Open.
| | 01:44 | Let's take a look at our
units in this new drawing.
| | 01:51 | Notice in this drawing using the acadiso
template, I am defaulting to Millimeters.
| | 01:57 | Let's click OK.
| | 01:59 | Once again, I am going to come up and
launch the Plot command by clicking the icon,
| | 02:02 | and notice that in this drawing AutoCAD
is referencing my paper sizes in Millimeters.
| | 02:08 | As you can see, I am now
working in a metric environment.
| | 02:11 | I am going to click Cancel
to close this dialog box.
| | 02:14 | Now, you may be wondering what drawing does
AutoCAD default to when we launch it from the icon?
| | 02:20 | Let's take a look.
| | 02:21 | Once again, I am going to click the New icon.
| | 02:24 | AutoCAD normally starts using this
template, the acad template, and this drawing
| | 02:28 | represents an imperial drafting environment.
| | 02:30 | Now you may also be wondering if it's
possible to start using the acadiso template.
| | 02:36 | Yes, it is. Let me show
you how we can do that.
| | 02:38 | I'm going to close this dialog box, and
if we'd like to start using the acadiso
| | 02:44 | template, we're going to have
to make a change to our options.
| | 02:47 | So I'm going to right-click and select
Options from the bottom of the menu, then
| | 02:50 | I am going to go to the Files tab.
| | 02:52 | This is where we change the paths where
AutoCAD is looking to find the things.
| | 02:58 | I am going to come down and click the
plus and open up Template Settings. I will
| | 03:03 | then click the plus next to
Default Template File Name for QNEW.
| | 03:08 | I will select this entry, and I'll click Browse.
| | 03:11 | Notice AutoCAD takes me
right to the Template directory.
| | 03:14 | I can select acadiso and click Open.
| | 03:17 | If I pull the slider down, we can see I've
now added that path as my default template.
| | 03:24 | I can click Apply and OK.
| | 03:26 | At this point, I'm going
to close out of AutoCAD.
| | 03:29 | Let me click the X to close.
| | 03:33 | We will relaunch the application.
| | 03:43 | And once again, let's take a look at our units.
| | 03:49 | Notice this guy is defaulting
to millimeters. Let's click OK.
| | 03:52 | We'll launch the Plot command.
| | 03:57 | Notice this is also set to Millimeters.
| | 03:59 | So now by default, AutoCAD is
starting using the acadiso template.
| | 04:05 | Now, I know what happens.
| | 04:06 | You permanently change your AutoCAD's
default drawing, and then two days later
| | 04:09 | you say, you know what, I'd like
to go back to the other drawing.
| | 04:12 | How can I switch things back the way they were?
| | 04:15 | Let me show you how we can do that.
| | 04:16 | Once again we're going to go to Options.
| | 04:18 | Let me right-click and select Options.
| | 04:22 | We'll go to the File tab again.
| | 04:24 | We'll come down to Template Settings.
| | 04:26 | We'll open up Default
Template File Name for QNEW.
| | 04:30 | I will select to this
path and I'll click Remove.
| | 04:34 | I can then come down and click Apply
and OK, and from now on, the next time I
| | 04:39 | open AutoCAD, it will default
back to its original drawing.
| | 04:43 | If you have a desire to draft using
metric units, it's nice to know that AutoCAD
| | 04:47 | can be configured to suit your needs.
| | 04:49 | If you're an occasional metric
drafter, you can simply choose the acadiso
| | 04:53 | template drawing when needed.
| | 04:55 | For those of you who use metric units
all the time, AutoCAD can easily adapt to
| | 04:59 | a default metric environment.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Maintaining AccuracyUnderstanding the Cartesian coordinate system| 00:00 | In this session, we're going to
take a closer look at model space.
| | 00:03 | Our approach is going to be a little
bit different though, because we're going
| | 00:06 | to look at model space from
the computer's point of view.
| | 00:09 | Taking this behind the scenes look
can be very helpful in teaching us how
| | 00:13 | AutoCAD maintains our line work.
| | 00:15 | Model space is essentially an
infinitely large virtual grid, much like a
| | 00:19 | sheet of graph paper.
| | 00:21 | We construct our geometry on this grid
and AutoCAD uses the grid to maintain the
| | 00:26 | accuracy of our drawing.
| | 00:28 | Now, since this grid is infinite in
size, AutoCAD needed a way to reference
| | 00:32 | locations in space.
| | 00:34 | It does this through the use of baselines.
| | 00:37 | One of the major baselines runs East and West.
| | 00:40 | This guy is called the X-axis, and
the X-axis is also a number line.
| | 00:46 | Everything to the right of
0 is considered positive X;
| | 00:50 | everything to the left of
zero is considered negative X.
| | 00:53 | There is another major
baseline running North and South.
| | 00:57 | This guy is called the Y-axis.
| | 00:59 | It is also a numbered line.
| | 01:01 | Everything above the X-
axis is considered positive Y;
| | 01:05 | everything below the X-
axis is considered negative Y.
| | 01:08 | Now this grid is completely invisible.
| | 01:10 | We can't see them on our screen as we
draft, but it is there in the background.
| | 01:15 | AutoCAD uses this system to
identify all locations in space.
| | 01:19 | Now, it has a term for locations in
space and that term is coordinates.
| | 01:24 | AutoCAD references coordinates using
the format X, Y and AutoCAD uses these
| | 01:30 | coordinates to recognize
where we draft on the grid.
| | 01:33 | There is a formal name for
this grid and X and Y-axis system.
| | 01:38 | It's called the Cartesian coordinate system.
| | 01:40 | Let's take a look at how it works.
| | 01:42 | Look at the intersection of my X and Y-axis.
| | 01:46 | This location has a coordinate value of 0, 0.
| | 01:50 | This location also has a name.
| | 01:52 | It's called the origin.
| | 01:53 | I am going to pick another point on the grid.
| | 01:56 | What coordinate value would this point have?
| | 01:59 | Well, this guy would have a value of
5, 3 because it's 5 units in the positive
| | 02:04 | X direction and its 3 units in the positive Y.
| | 02:08 | All coordinates are measured from the origin.
| | 02:10 | Let's try another point.
| | 02:12 | What coordinate value would this point have?
| | 02:14 | Now this guy would have a value of
-7, 4, because it's -7 in the X and it's
| | 02:20 | +4 in the Y. Remember that AutoCAD
references coordinates using the format X, Y.
| | 02:27 | Let's try one more.
| | 02:29 | How about this point?
| | 02:30 | This guy has a coordinate value of 3,
-6, because there's 3 in the positive X
| | 02:36 | direction and negative 6 in the Y direction.
| | 02:41 | This means when I draw a line on my
screen, I am essentially picking two points
| | 02:45 | and AutoCAD is creating a line between them.
| | 02:47 | From the computer's perspective though,
AutoCAD is seeing a line that was drawn
| | 02:51 | from a coordinate of -8, -3, to a
coordinate of 8, 10 and AutoCAD can use these
| | 02:58 | coordinates to calculate the
length of my line, as well as the angle.
| | 03:02 | AutoCAD uses coordinates to maintain
the accuracy of all of our geometry.
| | 03:07 | Let's return to our AutoCAD interface.
| | 03:11 | Now, I have just launched my AutoCAD 2010.
I'm currently sitting in a blank drawing.
| | 03:15 | As I move my cursor around on screen,
take a look at my Status Bar in the
| | 03:19 | lower-left hand corner.
| | 03:21 | These guys are coordinates and they're
showing me the current location of my
| | 03:24 | cursor on my virtual grid.
| | 03:27 | Also notice this icon in the lower
left-hand corner. This guy is called the
| | 03:30 | UCS icon and he is showing me the direction
of positive X and positive Y on my screen.
| | 03:37 | Now this is a completely blank AutoCAD file.
| | 03:39 | I've just launched my AutoCAD 2010.
| | 03:42 | Let's try and create some
geometry using coordinates.
| | 03:45 | I am going to launch the Circle command,
and before I create the circle, I am
| | 03:50 | going to come down and make sure
that my Dynamic Input mode is turned off,
| | 03:54 | because the Dynamic Input will take
some liberties with my coordinates.
| | 03:57 | I don't want to deal with that right now.
| | 03:58 | So if yours is turned on, just
take and click the box to turn it off.
| | 04:02 | AutoCAD is asking us to specify a center point.
| | 04:05 | I'm going to type a
coordinate, 25, 25 and I'll hit Enter.
| | 04:10 | Now we can see right away that
coordinate is not visible on our screen.
| | 04:14 | I am going to hold down the wheel on
my mouse, and we'll pan this guy down.
| | 04:19 | There we go, and I am going to give
this circle a radius of 5 and hit Enter.
| | 04:24 | Let's create another circle.
| | 04:26 | I am going to do that by hitting my
Spacebar to go right back into the command.
| | 04:29 | I'm going to enter another
coordinate for the center of this circle.
| | 04:33 | I'm going to type 75, 25, Enter.
| | 04:38 | That point is also slightly off my screen.
| | 04:40 | Let me back up just a little bit.
| | 04:42 | We'll pan this over, there we go.
| | 04:43 | I am also going to give this guy a radius of 5.
| | 04:46 | So I'll hit Enter to accept the default.
| | 04:49 | Now, let's say I would like to draw a
line from the center of one circle to the
| | 04:53 | center of the other.
| | 04:55 | That's actually not a problem because
I know the coordinate of the center of
| | 04:58 | each of these circles.
| | 04:59 | I am going to come up and launch my
Line command and for my first point, I am
| | 05:04 | going to type a coordinate
of 25, 25 and hit Enter.
| | 05:09 | And for my second point, I'll type a
coordinate of 75, 25 and hit Enter.
| | 05:15 | Then when I am finished, I'll hit the
Escape key to cancel out of the command.
| | 05:19 | Now, most of the time we won't be
entering coordinates as we draft.
| | 05:23 | However, it is important for you to
understand the fundamental way AutoCAD
| | 05:27 | processes our line work in the background.
| | 05:29 | Think of it this way.
| | 05:30 | Everything we draft is mapped out on an
underlying X, Y coordinate system, and
| | 05:35 | AutoCAD uses this system to
maintain the accuracy of our drawings.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Locking to geometry using object snaps| 00:00 | One thing is certain.
| | 00:01 | We'll never create a drawing by
simply free picking points on screen.
| | 00:06 | If we want to draft accurately, we'll
need to know how to use the AutoCAD's
| | 00:10 | coordinate system to lock on to our geometry.
| | 00:12 | In this lesson, we're going to
learn how to use object snaps.
| | 00:15 | Now, if you take a look at my screen,
you can see I've got two rows of geometry.
| | 00:20 | This upper row contains finished designs.
| | 00:23 | The lower row contains some unfinished
line work, and what we're going to do is
| | 00:28 | go right down the line and we're going
to complete each of these drawings, such
| | 00:32 | that they match the design above.
| | 00:34 | Before I get started, take a look at
my Status Bar. Notice the only the mode
| | 00:37 | setting that I'm currently
running is the Dynamic Input mode.
| | 00:41 | If you're going to work along with me,
make sure that your mode settings match mine.
| | 00:45 | Okay let's get started. I'm going to
pan this over and we'll zoom in the on
| | 00:48 | this guy on the left.
| | 00:50 | Now, I'm going to complete this
drawing using the Line command.
| | 00:54 | So, let's come up and launch the tool.
| | 00:57 | And obviously, I'm going to have to
start my line at the end of this line.
| | 01:01 | Now, that endpoint does have a coordinate.
| | 01:04 | Unfortunately, I don't know what it is.
| | 01:05 | I can wave around here and we can look
in the lower left corner, but that's not
| | 01:09 | a very accurate way to find it.
| | 01:11 | Instead I'm going to use an object snap.
| | 01:14 | Now, I'm in the Line command.
| | 01:15 | AutoCAD is looking for a point.
| | 01:17 | I'm going to hold down the Shift key on
my keyboard and right-click on my mouse.
| | 01:23 | This brings up my object snap menu
and this menu allows me to lock on to a
| | 01:27 | specific coordinates.
| | 01:28 | For instance, I'm going to select
Endpoint and then I'm going to place my cursor
| | 01:33 | over this line and notice
AutoCAD is finding an endpoint.
| | 01:37 | If I move my cursor a little bit
further, notice that AutoCAD will find the
| | 01:41 | endpoint closest to my cursor.
| | 01:43 | Pretend your cursor is AutoCAD's eye.
| | 01:46 | If you place the eye on the line,
AutoCAD will find the endpoint.
| | 01:49 | Let me click to accept this.
| | 01:51 | I've just locked to that
co-ordinate in my drawing.
| | 01:54 | Well, to finish this up, I'm going to
Shift+Right-click, we'll select Endpoint
| | 01:59 | again, and I'll come down
and I'll grab this endpoint.
| | 02:02 | Note that I don't have to be
right on the icon to grab it.
| | 02:06 | As long as I'm 50% of the way or better
on my line, I can click and AutoCAD will
| | 02:12 | find the correct Endpoint.
| | 02:13 | Now that I'm finished, I'll hit Escape.
| | 02:16 | Let's hit the Spacebar to go right back into
the Line command. And where do I want to start?
| | 02:21 | Shift+Right-click, we'll grab Endpoint
from the menu and we'll click here to
| | 02:26 | grab this endpoint and then we'll Shift
+Right-click, select Endpoint from the
| | 02:32 | menu and we'll click right here
to finish and then I'll hit Escape.
| | 02:36 | That is the Endpoint object snap.
| | 02:39 | Okay let's pan this over.
| | 02:41 | I'm going to backup just a little bit.
| | 02:42 | We're obviously going to use the
Circle command to complete this design.
| | 02:47 | Let's come up and launch the tool.
| | 02:49 | Now, where is the center
of my Circle going to be?
| | 02:51 | Well, I'm going to Shift+Right-
click and I'm going to select Midpoint.
| | 02:57 | Let's place the center of our
circle at the midpoint of this line.
| | 03:00 | Notice as I get close to the line,
I can see the icon for Midpoint.
| | 03:04 | Also note that icon is different
than the one that we see for Endpoint.
| | 03:07 | Let me click to accept that, there we go.
| | 03:11 | Now, what's my radius is going to be?
| | 03:13 | Well, I don't have to know the number,
because this endpoint, Shift+Right-click,
| | 03:18 | let me select Endpoint. I can grab
this endpoint to define my radius.
| | 03:23 | This is the Midpoint object snap.
| | 03:26 | Let's go down little bit further.
| | 03:29 | This time we're going to look at Intersection.
| | 03:31 | I'm going to come up and launch my
Line command and I would like my line to
| | 03:35 | start at the intersection of these two lines.
| | 03:38 | So I'm going to Shift+Right-click,
select Intersection, I will place my cursor
| | 03:45 | at the intersection and click
and I'll Shift+Right-click again.
| | 03:49 | We'll select Intersection, I'll place
my cursor on this intersection and click
| | 03:54 | and then I'll hit Escape when I'm finished.
| | 03:57 | Now, the circle above is placed at
the intersection of these two lines.
| | 04:01 | Now, here's the problem. These two lines
don't physically intersect. It doesn't matter.
| | 04:06 | We can still use the Intersection object snap.
| | 04:09 | Let me zoom in just a little bit.
I'm going to launch my Circle command again.
| | 04:14 | I want to place the center point
at the intersection, so I'm going to
| | 04:17 | Shift+Right-click, we'll
select Intersection and watch.
| | 04:21 | If I place my cursor over this line,
note I'm not at the intersection.
| | 04:25 | I'm just on the straight portion of the line.
| | 04:28 | I get what's called an Extended Intersection.
| | 04:31 | Let me click to accept this and then
I'll place AutoCAD's eye over this line,
| | 04:36 | and notice AutoCAD finds the
intersection of the two entities.
| | 04:39 | Let me click to accept this and
then my radius is going to go to the
| | 04:44 | Shift+Right-click, endpoint of this line.
| | 04:49 | That is the Intersection object snap.
| | 04:52 | Let's pan down little bit further.
| | 04:54 | This time we're going to
look at the Center point.
| | 04:56 | AutoCAD allows me to lock onto
the center of a circle or an arc.
| | 05:00 | I'm going to launch my Line command and
I would like to create my line from the
| | 05:05 | center of this circle.
| | 05:07 | So I'll Shift+Right-click and select Center.
| | 05:12 | I will then place AutoCAD's eye on the arc.
| | 05:15 | Note that it finds the center.
| | 05:16 | At this point I can click to accept it.
| | 05:19 | Let's Shift+Right-click, we'll grab
Center again, and then I'll place the eye on
| | 05:25 | this arc and click and when
I'm finished I'll hit Escape.
| | 05:29 | This is the Center object snap.
| | 05:32 | Now to finish this design, I'm going to
have to use a couple of other object snaps.
| | 05:35 | Let's see if we can do this.
| | 05:37 | I'm going to launch the Circle command
and its center point is going to be the
| | 05:41 | midpoint of the line.
| | 05:42 | So let's Shift+Right-click, select
Midpoint, I'll place my cursor on the
| | 05:47 | line and click and my radius is
going to be to the Shift+Right-click,
| | 05:53 | Intersection, right here.
| | 05:57 | Using object snaps, we can draw a very
precise geometry and we can draft fairly quickly.
| | 06:03 | Let's pan this down.
We'll try another one.
| | 06:05 | The object snap we're going to
look at now is called Quadrant.
| | 06:08 | Let me show you where the quadrants are located.
| | 06:11 | If I click the line to select it, these
little blue grips show me where my quadrants are.
| | 06:17 | Essentially, quadrants are associated
with circles and arcs and quadrants show
| | 06:22 | up at the North, South, East and West locations.
| | 06:25 | Let me hit Escape to deselect this
circle and let's try and complete the design.
| | 06:30 | I'm going to launch my Line command
and I'm going to start my line at the
| | 06:36 | Shift+Right-click, Quadrant, right here.
| | 06:41 | Note that as I move my eye or my
cursor around the arc, I can grab whichever
| | 06:46 | quadrant I'm closest to.
| | 06:48 | I'm going to click right here to start
at the top and then I'm going to draw to
| | 06:52 | the Shift+Right-click, Quadrant here,
and then I'm going to go over the
| | 06:57 | Shift+Right-click Quadrant here, to
the Shift+Right-click Quadrant here, then
| | 07:05 | we're going to the Center point.
Shift+Right-click, I'll select Center,
| | 07:11 | put my cursor on the arc, AutoCAD finds
the center and I'll click and then finally
| | 07:16 | I can Right click and select
Close to finish the shape.
| | 07:19 | Let's pan over a little bit more.
| | 07:23 | This time we're going to look at Perpendicular.
| | 07:25 | These lines are forming a 90-
degree angle, with the central line.
| | 07:30 | Perpendicular essentially
means a 90-degree or a right angle.
| | 07:35 | I'm going to come up and launch my Line
command and I'm going to start from the
| | 07:40 | Shift+Right-click Midpoint of this line.
| | 07:45 | Let me click and I'm going to draw that
to Shift+Right-click Perpendicular and
| | 07:53 | I'll select this line.
| | 07:55 | Notice I can click anywhere I'd like
along this line and AutoCAD will still find
| | 07:59 | the perpendicular location.
| | 08:02 | I'm going to click to get that and then
I'll hit Escape to get out of the command.
| | 08:06 | We'll do one more.
| | 08:06 | I'll hit my Spacebar to back in the
Line command and we're going to draw a line
| | 08:11 | from Shift+Right-click Midpoint of
this line, to a point, Shift+Right-click,
| | 08:19 | perpendicular to this line
and I'll hit Escape to finish.
| | 08:25 | Let's pan this over and
we'll look at our last one.
| | 08:27 | This object snap is called Tangent,
and it allows us to snap to the tangent
| | 08:32 | point of an arc or a circle.
| | 08:34 | I'm going to come up and launch my Line command.
| | 08:37 | Now, where do I want to start my line?
| | 08:39 | I will Shift+Right-click and select Tangent.
| | 08:44 | I will then place my cursor over the
line work and click and notice this.
| | 08:48 | As I pull away AutoCAD is creating a
line segment that is tangent to that circle.
| | 08:54 | I will then draw this to a point, Shift
+Right-click, Tangent to this circle.
| | 08:59 | Let me place my cursor on the line and click.
| | 09:03 | When I'm finished, I'll hit Escape.
| | 09:06 | Let's finish this guy up.
| | 09:07 | I'll hit the Spacebar to go back to
into the Line command and we'll start from
| | 09:11 | a point, Shift+Right-click, Tangent
to this circle and I'll go to a point,
| | 09:17 | Shift+Right-click, Tangent to this circle
and then I'll hit Escape to exit the command.
| | 09:25 | From this moment on, we will
always use object snaps as we draft.
| | 09:29 | Using object snaps is the only
way to guarantee that we're creating
| | 09:32 | accurate geometry.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Automating object snap selection| 00:00 | The first thing people notice when they
start using object snaps is that it's a
| | 00:03 | little tedious to have to
Shift+Right-click for each one.
| | 00:07 | In this lesson, we're going to learn
how to automate some of our object snaps.
| | 00:11 | If you look at my screen, you can
see I've got an abstract example.
| | 00:15 | Just for a second, let's assume that I
had to close off all of these shapes on
| | 00:19 | the left to create some squares.
| | 00:22 | Well I would come up and launch my Line
command and then I would have to start
| | 00:26 | at the endpoint of this line.
| | 00:27 | So I'm going to Shift+Right-click,
select Endpoint and click right here and then
| | 00:32 | I'm going to have to go the other Endpoint.
| | 00:34 | So I'll have to Shift+Right-click,
select Endpoint and click here and then I'll
| | 00:39 | hit Escape to get out of command.
| | 00:40 | As you can see to finish the rest of
these shapes I'm going to have to go
| | 00:45 | into that menu six more times and if I
also wanted to create a line segment
| | 00:49 | that connected the centers of these
circles, I'm going to have to bring up
| | 00:53 | the menu eight more times.
| | 00:55 | Let's look at how we can
automate some of our object snaps.
| | 00:59 | We can do that by
adjusting one of our mode settings.
| | 01:01 | If I look right down here, in
the Status bar, it's this icon.
| | 01:04 | He is fifth from the left side.
| | 01:07 | This guy represents our
running Object Snap mode.
| | 01:10 | I'm going to click to turn this on and
then let's find out what we just turned on.
| | 01:15 | I'm going to right-click on this icon
and if we look at the menu right here,
| | 01:19 | I can see a listing of object snaps.
| | 01:22 | Notice that some of these guys
have squares around the icon.
| | 01:26 | That means these guys are running object snaps.
| | 01:29 | This means unless I specify otherwise
AutoCAD is always going to be looking for
| | 01:34 | these object snaps when it needs a co-ordinate.
| | 01:37 | Now, I would like to change these settings.
| | 01:38 | I'm going to come down and click the
Settings option in the menu, and from
| | 01:42 | here I can place a check in the box of
any of these object snaps I would like
| | 01:46 | to be running as I work.
| | 01:48 | For right now, I'm going to uncheck
these two and I'm only going to have a
| | 01:52 | running object snaps set
for Center point and Endpoint.
| | 01:56 | Let's click OK and I'm going to
complete the rest of my geometry.
| | 01:59 | Let me come up and launch the Line command.
| | 02:03 | I'm going to place my cursor next to this line.
| | 02:05 | Notice AutoCAD is already
looking for the Endpoint.
| | 02:09 | If I was to place my cursor next to
this circle, AutoCAD would find the center,
| | 02:12 | because right now Center point and
Endpoint are running object snaps.
| | 02:16 | So I'm going to click right
here and right here and hit Escape.
| | 02:21 | Let's hit the Spacebar to go right
back into the command and I'll click right
| | 02:24 | here and right here and hit Escape.
| | 02:27 | I'm going to hit Spacebar again to
back in the command and I'll click right
| | 02:31 | here and right here and hit Escape.
| | 02:33 | I'm going to go right back into the
command and then I'm going to connect all of
| | 02:38 | these center points and it's as
fast as simply clicking on the arcs.
| | 02:42 | All the way down the line AutoCAD is
automatically finding that center point and
| | 02:47 | when I'm finished, I'll hit Escape.
| | 02:50 | Let's go back and take another
look at our running object snap menu.
| | 02:54 | Once again I'm going to right-click on the
Object Snap mode icon and select Settings.
| | 02:59 | Now, I must admit it's real tempting to
come over here and click Select All and
| | 03:04 | set all of these guys as running
object snaps, thinking that, you know what?
| | 03:08 | Whatever my cursor is closest to,
that's what I'm going to grab.
| | 03:11 | Unfortunately as you start working
on more complicated drawings, the more
| | 03:15 | running object snaps you have means
the better chance that you're going to
| | 03:18 | accidentally grab an incorrect snap.
| | 03:22 | So I'm going to clear these and I would
suggest that you pick the top two object
| | 03:27 | snaps that you use most often,
set those as running object snaps.
| | 03:32 | I prefer to use Center and Endpoint to
myself and then I would suggest that you
| | 03:36 | grab all of your other object
snaps from the Shift+Right-click menu.
| | 03:40 | Let's come down and click OK and I'm
going to pan my geometry over a little bit.
| | 03:44 | Let me zoom in a little and let's try
and use our new running object snaps to
| | 03:49 | help us complete this geometry we see here.
| | 03:51 | I'm going to start by launching my
Line command and I'm going to pick a point
| | 03:55 | right about here, then I'm
going to have to lock my Ortho.
| | 03:59 | Let me come down and click
my Ortho mode to turn it on.
| | 04:01 | I will pull down and type 5, Enter.
| | 04:05 | I'm going to pull to the left and type
5, Enter, I pull up 5, Enter and then
| | 04:12 | since I have the running object snap set,
I can simply come over and click this
| | 04:15 | line to finish the shape
and then I'll hit Escape.
| | 04:18 | Now let's see if we can find
the location of this circle.
| | 04:22 | What I'm going to do is
launch my Circle command.
| | 04:24 | I am going to create a circle at this Endpoint.
| | 04:26 | Once again, no Shift+Right-click
necessary and I'm going to give this guy a
| | 04:30 | radius of one and hit Enter.
| | 04:33 | Now, what if I launch my Line command?
I'm going to create a line from the
| | 04:37 | intersection right here.
| | 04:39 | Now I don't have a running object
snap set for that so I'm going to
| | 04:42 | Shift+Right-click and select Intersection.
| | 04:45 | I'll click right here and my Ortho is locked.
| | 04:47 | I am going to pull down and type 1 for the
distance, hit Enter and then I'll hit Escape.
| | 04:53 | This endpoint represents
the center of the circle.
| | 04:57 | Now, one thing I notice we don't
have dimensions on these circles.
| | 05:00 | No matter. Let's find out
what the radius of the circle is.
| | 05:03 | If I simply click to select the circle,
I can come over to my Property Changer,
| | 05:08 | which happens to be anchored to my interface.
| | 05:10 | If yours is not visible on screen
simply hit Ctrl+1 to turn yours back on.
| | 05:14 | Let me hover over the palette and I'm
going to come down and I can see the
| | 05:18 | Radius of this circle is .5. So I'm
going to move outside the palette and I'll
| | 05:23 | hit Escape to deselect that circle and
then I'm going to generate my circle by
| | 05:27 | launching the command.
| | 05:29 | I'm going to click the Endpoint of this line
and I'll type a radius of .5 and hit Enter.
| | 05:35 | All right we can do the exact same thing
to find the circle down in this corner.
| | 05:39 | I'm going to hit my Spacebar to go
right back into the Circle command.
| | 05:43 | I'm going to grab the endpoint of this
line as its center point and I'm going to
| | 05:48 | give it a radius of 1.
| | 05:49 | So we'll type 1 and hit Enter.
| | 05:51 | Once again we'll launch the Line command.
| | 05:54 | I'm going to create a
line from the intersection.
| | 05:56 | So I will Shift+Right-click
select that from the menu.
| | 06:01 | I'll click this intersection and I'll pull up.
| | 06:03 | This line will have a length of 1.
| | 06:05 | Simply type 1 and hit Enter.
| | 06:06 | Then I'll hit Escape to get out of the command.
| | 06:10 | I'll then re-launch the Circle command
and I'll create my circle at the Endpoint
| | 06:14 | of this line and it'll
have a radius of .5, Enter.
| | 06:18 | All I have to do is get this guy in the center.
| | 06:21 | Now notice there is no dimensions on this guy.
| | 06:24 | But as long as I place it right in the
middle of the square, I should be fine.
| | 06:27 | I am going to create an
object snap at that location.
| | 06:31 | What if I came up and
launched the Line command?
| | 06:34 | I start at my line at
the Endpoint of this corner.
| | 06:37 | Now, as I pull away, notice my Ortho is
making my line look a little bit unusual.
| | 06:41 | I'm going to come down and turn
this off for a second, there we go.
| | 06:45 | I'll draw my line to this Endpoint
and hit Escape and then I will create my
| | 06:50 | circle from the Midpoint of this line.
| | 06:53 | That should fall right in
the middle of that square.
| | 06:56 | So I'll Shift+Right-click and
select Midpoint from the menu.
| | 07:00 | I'll click this line and then I'm
going to hit Enter to accept the default of
| | 07:04 | .5, which is the same size as
the last circle that I made.
| | 07:08 | Now that I'm done, I can select
the geometry I'd like to get rid of.
| | 07:12 | Now that I'm finished, I can
remove the sketch geometry.
| | 07:16 | I'll do that by clicking on each
unnecessary object and then I'll press the
| | 07:19 | Delete key on my keyboard to erase.
| | 07:23 | Taking the object snaps that you use
most often and setting them as running
| | 07:26 | object snaps can save you
a lot of time when drafting.
| | 07:30 | Personally, I like to use Endpoint and
Center point as my running object snaps
| | 07:35 | and for the remainder of this title,
unless I specify otherwise, this is how
| | 07:39 | my running object snaps will be set.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using temporary tracking to find points in space| 00:00 | Sometimes it's hard to find locations in
space, without first creating some sketch lines.
| | 00:06 | This usually means going back and erasing
the unnecessary line work when we're finished.
| | 00:11 | In this lesson we're going to look at
a way to place geometry in our drawing
| | 00:14 | without creating any extra line work.
| | 00:16 | If you look at my screen, you can see
I've got a drawing of a couple of speakers
| | 00:20 | and what we're going to in this lesson
is we're going to take the dimension to
| | 00:24 | circles that we see on this speaker and
we're going to recreate them over here.
| | 00:27 | Now before I get started,
take a look at my Status Bar.
| | 00:30 | Notice my current mode settings.
| | 00:33 | Right now my Dynamic Input mode is
turned on, as well, as my running object
| | 00:37 | snaps and if I right-click on this, we
can see that I currently have a running
| | 00:41 | object snaps set for
Center as well as Endpoint.
| | 00:44 | If you're going to work along with me,
make sure your settings match mine.
| | 00:48 | I'm going to hit Escape to clear this menu,
then I'm going to zoom in a little bit.
| | 00:52 | We'll center this on screen, and I'm going to
create it using the sketch line method first.
| | 00:58 | I can see that my circle is 13
inches down from this Endpoint.
| | 01:03 | This drawing happens to be set
for decimal inches by the way.
| | 01:07 | And I can see that the circle
is 4.75 inches from this edge.
| | 01:11 | Well I can find that
location by using my Line command.
| | 01:14 | I'm going to come up and launch Line.
| | 01:17 | Let me grab the Endpoint right here,
and I'm going to lock my Ortho.
| | 01:25 | Let's pull straight down and I'm
going to type 13 and hit Enter.
| | 01:29 | I will then pull to the left
and type 4.75 and hit Enter.
| | 01:34 | At this point, I can hit Escape to
get out of the command and this Endpoint
| | 01:38 | represents the center of the circle.
| | 01:41 | So we could come up and launch the
Circle command, we can click to grab the
| | 01:45 | Endpoint of that line and
the circle has a radius of 2.
| | 01:49 | So I'll type in 2 and hit Enter.
| | 01:52 | Now there's nothing wrong with this
method, except I have to go back and delete
| | 01:56 | this unnecessary line work.
| | 01:57 | Let me click to select these guys and
I'll hit the Delete key on my keyboard
| | 02:02 | to get rid of them.
| | 02:03 | In fact as long as we're at it I'm
going to click this circle and hit Delete.
| | 02:06 | We'll get rid of this.
| | 02:07 | And I'm going to show you a way to
place this circle without creating any
| | 02:11 | unnecessary line work.
| | 02:12 | I'm going to do that by using a
feature called Temporary Tracking.
| | 02:16 | Let me come down and turn my
Ortho off and let's try this.
| | 02:20 | I'm going to come up and
launch my Circle command.
| | 02:24 | AutoCAD wants me to specify a Center point.
| | 02:27 | I'm going to type tk on my keyboard.
| | 02:30 | This stands for Temporary
Tracking and I'm going to hit Enter.
| | 02:34 | Notice as soon as Temporary Tracking is
turned on, AutoCAD automatically turns
| | 02:38 | on my Ortho and from here,
| | 02:40 | I can simply guide AutoCAD to where I
want to place the center of the circle.
| | 02:45 | So my first tracking point is
going to be the endpoint of this line.
| | 02:50 | I'm going to pull down
and type 13 and hit Enter.
| | 02:54 | I will then pull to the
left and type 4.75, Enter.
| | 02:59 | Essentially, I'm creating an invisible line.
| | 03:01 | Now that I'm where I want to be, I
can hit the Enter key on my keyboard to
| | 03:06 | finish the Temporary Tracking.
| | 03:08 | Notice AutoCAD automatically turns off
my Ortho and I can enter my radius.
| | 03:13 | I am going to type 2 and hit Enter.
| | 03:15 | Let's see if we can place this
circle using Temporary Tracking.
| | 03:18 | I am going to hit my Spacebar to go
right back into the Circle command.
| | 03:23 | Let's type tk for Temporary Tracking.
| | 03:27 | My first tracking point is
going to be the Endpoint right here.
| | 03:30 | I'm going to pull to the
left and type 6.5, Enter.
| | 03:35 | I will pull down and type 6, Enter.
| | 03:39 | Now that I am at my location, I am going
to hit the Enter key again and the big
| | 03:43 | circle has a radius of 3.5, Enter.
| | 03:48 | Now, to create the rest of the circles,
I don't have to use Temporary Tracking.
| | 03:51 | I can simply use the
Center point of this circle.
| | 03:54 | Let me hit Spacebar to go back into the
Circle command. I'll select the center
| | 03:58 | of the circle and the next radius is 1.5, Enter.
| | 04:04 | I'll hit my Spacebar again, I'll grab
the center of circle and I'll type 1.4
| | 04:10 | for that radius, Enter.
| | 04:12 | I'll hit my Spacebar one more time.
| | 04:14 | I'll select the circle and
the final radius is .5, Enter.
| | 04:20 | Using Temporary Tacking, we can easily
place geometry into our drawing without
| | 04:24 | the need for extra unnecessary line work.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Using Specialized Drawing CommandsDrawing rectangles| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to learn
a way to draft a little bit faster.
| | 00:04 | We're going to take a look at
AutoCAD's Rectangle command.
| | 00:07 | Rectangle allows us to create
rectangular shapes in just a couple of steps.
| | 00:12 | The Rectangle tool is located
in the Draw panel of our ribbon.
| | 00:15 | I'm going to click the icon
right here, to launch the command.
| | 00:19 | Now, when we create rectangles in
AutoCAD, the only thing AutoCAD is really
| | 00:23 | interested in are the
locations of the opposite corners.
| | 00:27 | Notice AutoCAD is asking me
for my first corner point.
| | 00:30 | I'm going to pick a point on the
screen and now, AutoCAD is asking for the
| | 00:34 | other corner point.
| | 00:35 | I'm going to move right up here and
click and that's it, my rectangle is done.
| | 00:40 | Now that this guy is finished I'm
going to select it and notice that AutoCAD
| | 00:43 | looks at this geometry
as being a single entity.
| | 00:47 | To deselect this line work, I'm going
to hit the Escape key on my keyboard.
| | 00:51 | Now, this rectangle is nice, but it
wasn't based on any real measurements.
| | 00:55 | Let's create another rectangle and
this time we'll use some actual dimensions.
| | 00:59 | If we look right down here, you can see
I already have a dimensioned rectangle.
| | 01:03 | This guy represents a standard home
size pool table, and we can see it measures
| | 01:08 | 9'5" long by 5'10" wide.
| | 01:12 | Let's do one more thing.
| | 01:13 | I would like to take a look at the
units that are assigned to this drawing.
| | 01:17 | Let's come up and click the
Application menu, we will come down to Drawing
| | 01:20 | Utilities and we'll select Units.
| | 01:23 | Notice this drawing is set to Architectural.
| | 01:26 | Because this is set to Architectural,
when I enter my measurements I'm going to
| | 01:30 | have include the apostrophe and the
quotes to designate between feet and inches.
| | 01:34 | I'm going to close this dialog box
and let's recreate the rectangle.
| | 01:39 | I'm going to come up and
launch the Rectangle tool.
| | 01:42 | We'll pick a point on the screen and
then take a look at my command line.
| | 01:46 | Notice I have a sub-option
down here called Dimensions.
| | 01:49 | I'm going to a right-click and select
Dimensions from the menu and now all I
| | 01:54 | have to do is answer the questions.
| | 01:56 | What is the length of my rectangle?
| | 01:58 | I'm going to type 9'5'', Enter.
| | 02:02 | What's the width of my
rectangle? 5'10'', Enter.
| | 02:08 | And notice I'm still in the command.
| | 02:10 | That's because AutoCAD needs to know
where the opposite corner is locate.
| | 02:14 | Based on my dimensions,
that corner could be up here.
| | 02:17 | It could in the upper left, it could be in the
lower left or it could be in the lower right.
| | 02:22 | I'm going to place my cursor in this
area and click to finish my rectangle.
| | 02:26 | Now, that we get an idea of how this
works, I'm going to pan my drawing over.
| | 02:31 | We'll zoom in a little bit.
| | 02:33 | Let's see if we can replicate this geometry.
| | 02:35 | This line work represents a small couch
and what I would like to do is recreate
| | 02:40 | the geometry over here, and let's see
if we can have our version of the couch
| | 02:44 | facing the original.
| | 02:45 | I'm going to start by drawing
the back of the couch first.
| | 02:49 | So I'm going to launch my Rectangle command.
| | 02:51 | I'm going to pick a point on the
screen, right-click and select Dimensions.
| | 02:57 | The length of my rectangle is 10''
inches, Enter and the width of my rectangle
| | 03:03 | is 58''. Now could I have
also typed 4'10''? Yes.
| | 03:09 | But you know what, 58'' works just as well.
| | 03:13 | Now that I've entered my values I'm going
to pick on screen to finish my rectangle.
| | 03:17 | All right let's take care of the armrests.
| | 03:20 | I'm going to hit my Spacebar to go
right back into the Rectangle command.
| | 03:23 | I'm going to create my
rectangle from the endpoint right here.
| | 03:27 | Fortunately, I have a running
object snaps set for Endpoint.
| | 03:31 | Let's right-click, select Dimensions
and this guy is 24'' long by 6'' wide and
| | 03:42 | I'll pick to finish.
| | 03:44 | Let's hit Spacebar again. We'll start
our next rectangle at this endpoint.
| | 03:50 | Right-click and select Dimensions.
| | 03:52 | Now, take a look at the command line.
| | 03:54 | Notice AutoCAD is remembering the
size of the last rectangle we created.
| | 03:58 | Now, this does say 2' but the
2' is the same thing as 24''.
| | 04:03 | So I'm going to hit Enter to accept
the default value then I'm going to hit
| | 04:07 | Enter to accept the 6'' and then I'm
going to pick up here so that my armrest is
| | 04:12 | on the correct side.
| | 04:13 | Let's launch the Rectangle command again.
| | 04:15 | I'm going to create my next
rectangle from this Endpoint.
| | 04:19 | We'll right click and select Dimensions.
| | 04:23 | This guy has a length of 26'' and a width 23''.
| | 04:31 | And I'll pick to finish.
| | 04:33 | One more, I'm going to hit Spacebar
to go right back in, I'm going to start
| | 04:38 | rectangle at this endpoint and you know
what, I don't have to enter dimensions
| | 04:41 | for this one, because this
rectangle goes to the endpoint of this one.
| | 04:46 | Don't forget AutoCAD is only
looking for the location of the corners.
| | 04:49 | Rectangular shapes are a huge
part of two-dimensional drafting.
| | 04:53 | And I'm sure you'll agree that the
Rectangle command allows us to create the
| | 04:56 | shapes four times faster than the Line command.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Drawing polygons| 00:00 | Another shape we see frequently
in AutoCAD Drawings are polygons.
| | 00:04 | An example of a polygon would be a
hexagon or an octagon or a square.
| | 00:10 | In this lesson, we are going to learn
how to quickly create the shapes using
| | 00:13 | the Polygon command.
| | 00:15 | If you look at my screen, you can see
I have several examples of polygons.
| | 00:18 | Each of these guys was
created using the Polygon tool.
| | 00:22 | Now, polygons are considered
equilateral shapes, meaning that each of the sides
| | 00:26 | is the same length, and another
important note. All of the polygons that we
| | 00:31 | create in AutoCAD, are
based on an imaginary circle.
| | 00:35 | If I pan this drawing over, we can see the
circles that were used to create the shapes.
| | 00:41 | In fact, the workflow behind creating a
polygon is identical to creating a circle.
| | 00:46 | AutoCAD is going to ask us for the center
point and then it's going to ask us for the radius.
| | 00:50 | There is one other thing to consider.
Is my polygon inscribed or circumscribed?
| | 00:58 | Since the polygons are based on circles,
AutoCAD needs to know, if the polygon
| | 01:02 | falls inside the circle or outside.
| | 01:05 | How do we know which method to choose?
| | 01:07 | It depends on how our polygon is dimensioned.
| | 01:10 | If the polygon is dimensioned to the
corners, it's considered inscribed because
| | 01:15 | it would fall on the inside of the circle.
| | 01:17 | And if the polygon is dimensioned to
the faces, it's considered circumscribed
| | 01:21 | because it would fall on
the outside of the circle.
| | 01:24 | Let's create some polygons.
| | 01:25 | I am going to backup a little bit.
| | 01:27 | We'll pan our drawing over.
| | 01:29 | On my screen, I've got a
drawing of a skateboard.
| | 01:32 | I am going to zoom in on this upper half.
| | 01:36 | Let's see if we can use the Polygon
command to finish the hardware on the
| | 01:40 | bottom of this board.
| | 01:41 | To launch the tool, I am going to
come up to the Draw panel in my ribbon.
| | 01:45 | Now unfortunately, Polygon didn't
make it into the upper half of the panel.
| | 01:48 | So I am going to click the fly-
out and select the tool right here.
| | 01:52 | Now AutoCAD is asking me for a number
of sides. 6 happens to be perfect.
| | 01:58 | I am going to be recreating one of these
hexagons, so I'll hit Enter to accept 6.
| | 02:03 | Now AutoCAD wants the center of my polygon,
I will grab the center of this circle.
| | 02:08 | Fortunately I have a running
object snap set for Center.
| | 02:11 | Now is this guy inscribed or circumscribed?
| | 02:14 | Take a look at my dimension.
| | 02:15 | Notice it's being dimensioned to the faces.
| | 02:18 | So this guy must be circumscribed.
| | 02:20 | I am going to select that from the menu.
| | 02:23 | And then finally, AutoCAD wants
to know the radius of the circle.
| | 02:26 | While the overall distance is
0.3, that would be the diameter.
| | 02:31 | So the radius of my circle must be
0.15, so I will type that and hit Enter.
| | 02:36 | Let's create the hexagon in
the lower right-hand corner.
| | 02:39 | Once again, I am going to come up to
the Draw panel and launch the tool.
| | 02:43 | We will hit Enter to accept the number of sides.
| | 02:45 | I'll select the center of this circle.
| | 02:49 | Notice AutoCAD is remembering my
previous setting. I can select this from
| | 02:53 | the menu or simply hit Enter to accept
circumscribed and then I will enter my radius of 0.15.
| | 02:58 | I have got one more hexagon
I would like to create.
| | 03:02 | He goes right here.
| | 03:04 | I've got the dimension that I
would like to use right over here.
| | 03:07 | To go back into the Polygon
command, I am going to hit Spacebar.
| | 03:11 | We'll accept the number of sides.
| | 03:14 | I'll select my center point.
| | 03:17 | Now is this guy inscribed or circumscribed?
| | 03:20 | In this case, my dimension is to the corners.
| | 03:23 | So this guy must be inscribed.
| | 03:26 | Finally, what's my radius?
| | 03:28 | Well, my diameter in this case is 0.62.
| | 03:32 | So my radius must be 0.31.
| | 03:36 | Now that I am finished, I will
eliminate my sketch geometry by selecting it and
| | 03:41 | hitting the Delete key on my keyboard.
| | 03:44 | As you can see using the Polygon
command is a much more efficient way of
| | 03:47 | creating the shapes than
using the standard Line command.
| | 03:51 | Once you understand the meaning
behind inscribed and circumscribed, you can
| | 03:55 | easily create any polygon you can imagine.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Drawing ellipses| 00:00 | Back in the paper and pencil days,
creating an ellipse required the use of
| | 00:03 | a plastic template.
| | 00:05 | Today using AutoCAD's Ellipse command,
we can create any size ellipse we like
| | 00:10 | and it's as easy as creating a circle.
| | 00:12 | If you look at my screen you can see
I have got a diagram of an ellipse.
| | 00:16 | Essentially an ellipse is a
circle that has two diameters.
| | 00:20 | You can see that we've got a horizontal
diameter called the major axis and we've
| | 00:24 | also got a vertical
diameter called the minor axis.
| | 00:28 | Note that if we are looking at the
distance from the center to the edge,
| | 00:32 | these guys are called the major and the minor radius.
| | 00:35 | Creating an ellipse in AutoCAD is very
similar to creating a circle. Let's try it out.
| | 00:40 | I am going to pan this drawing over.
| | 00:42 | I have got a couple of ellipse examples here.
| | 00:46 | Let me push these up and we
will center them on screen.
| | 00:49 | Let's try and use the Ellipse
command to re-create this geometry.
| | 00:53 | The Ellipse tool is located in
the Draw panel of our ribbon.
| | 00:56 | The icon is right here.
| | 00:58 | I'm going to hover for just a second,
because I want to show you that the
| | 01:01 | default method of creating an
ellipse is the center method.
| | 01:04 | Let's click to launch the tool.
| | 01:06 | I will then click to define my center
point and now I have to tell AutoCAD
| | 01:11 | the major and the minor radius.
| | 01:13 | Well, I am going to lock my Ortho.
| | 01:15 | Let's come down and click the
Ortho mode and turn that on.
| | 01:17 | Then I will pull it to the right or
left, doesn't matter which way, and I'll
| | 01:22 | type in my major radius.
| | 01:25 | Right now I can see the diameter is 24,
so my major radius must be 12 inches.
| | 01:31 | Don't forget the quote.
We are doing an architectural example.
| | 01:34 | Let's hit Enter and now I
can enter my minor radius.
| | 01:38 | In this case, since the diameter is 14,
my minor radius must be 7 inches, Enter.
| | 01:46 | Let's look at another way
we can create an ellipse.
| | 01:49 | I'm going to come back up to the tool.
| | 01:50 | Notice right next to the
icon I have got a flyout.
| | 01:53 | Let me click to open this up and
notice there are three ways to create
| | 01:57 | an ellipse in AutoCAD.
| | 01:58 | This time we are going to
look at the Axis, End method.
| | 02:01 | With Axis, End we will define our major
axis and then we will define our minor radius.
| | 02:07 | I am going to click to launch the tool.
That now becomes the default Ellipse method.
| | 02:12 | I am going to come down here and I'll
click once to define the left side of my
| | 02:16 | major axis and my Ortho is locked, I am
going to pull across and my major axis
| | 02:21 | distance is 15 inches.
| | 02:22 | So, I will type 15 inches, Enter and
then notice where I am pulling from,
| | 02:27 | the center point, so I will
now enter my minor radius.
| | 02:31 | In this case the diameter is 8, so
my radius must be 4 inches, Enter.
| | 02:37 | Now that we understand how we can create
an ellipse, let's try and use this tool
| | 02:41 | in a practical example.
| | 02:42 | I am going to pan my drawing over.
I am going to zoom in just a little bit and
| | 02:48 | let's try and replicate this drawing.
| | 02:50 | This line work represents a symbol for a
basin that you would see in a typical washroom.
| | 02:55 | I am going to start by drawing the large
ellipse first and we will use the Axis, End method.
| | 03:01 | So that happens to be the default.
| | 03:02 | I'll come up and click the icon.
| | 03:04 | I am going to start my axis end point
right here and I am going to pull to the
| | 03:07 | left and my major axis is 20 inches, so
I will type that and hit Enter and then
| | 03:14 | my minor radius in this case would
be 8 inches, since the overall is 16.
| | 03:20 | Let's hit Enter and that ellipse is finished.
| | 03:23 | Now the next ellipse is placed
at the centre of the first one.
| | 03:27 | Currently I have a running
object snap set for center.
| | 03:30 | Let's create the next
ellipse using the Center option.
| | 03:33 | I will click the flyout and select Center.
| | 03:37 | Now where is the center
of my ellipse going to be?
| | 03:39 | I will hover over this ellipse.
| | 03:41 | Notice that AutoCAD finds the center
of an ellipse just like it does the
| | 03:44 | center of a circle.
| | 03:45 | I am going to click to accept that
object snap and we will pull to the right and
| | 03:50 | my major radius for this guy
is going to be 8 inches, Enter.
| | 03:55 | I will then pull in an upward direction
and my minor radius is going to be 6 inches.
| | 04:02 | The only thing we have left is
this circle that represents the drain.
| | 04:05 | It looks like it has a radius of 1 inch
and it is positioned 4 inches above the
| | 04:10 | centre of the ellipse.
| | 04:12 | Let's come up and launch the Circle
command and I'm going to place this
| | 04:15 | using temporary tracking.
| | 04:17 | AutoCAD is asking for a center point.
I am going to type TK and hit Enter and
| | 04:22 | then I am going to guide
AutoCAD to the location.
| | 04:25 | So, my first tracking point is going to
be the centre of this ellipse. I'll click.
| | 04:30 | I will then pull in an upward
direction and type 4 inches, Enter.
| | 04:36 | Now that I'm at the point where I want
to be, I'll hit Enter again and I'll set
| | 04:40 | my radius for 1 inch, Enter.
| | 04:44 | As you can see creating an ellipse is very easy.
| | 04:46 | Once you understand the concept of the
major and minor axis, creating an ellipse is
| | 04:51 | as simple as drawing a circle.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Organizing with hatch patterns| 00:00 | Hatch patterns have been a part of
drafting since the days of paper and pencil.
| | 00:04 | Well-placed hatch patterns can add
visual interest to your drawings, as well as
| | 00:08 | represent materials to be used for construction.
| | 00:11 | In this lesson, we are going to
learn how to create some hatches.
| | 00:15 | If you look at my screen you can
see I've got several abstract shapes.
| | 00:18 | We are going to use this geometry
to learn how the Hatch command works.
| | 00:22 | Let's start by hatching this circle.
| | 00:24 | I am going to pan this guy over the
center and I will zoom in a little bit.
| | 00:29 | The Hatch command is located
in the Draw panel of our ribbon.
| | 00:33 | The icon is right here.
| | 00:36 | This brings up my Hatch dialog box and the
first thing I'd like to do is select my pattern.
| | 00:41 | There are two ways I can do this.
| | 00:43 | I can click the Pattern flyout and I
can select the pattern name from this menu
| | 00:48 | or-- Let me hit Escape to close the
menu, probably the most intuitive way to
| | 00:53 | select your pattern is by
clicking this Ellipsis button.
| | 00:57 | This brings up the Hatch Pattern
Palette where our patterns are divided under
| | 01:01 | these tabs and each tab shows me the
pattern name, as well as a representation
| | 01:07 | of what the pattern looks like.
| | 01:09 | For my first pattern, I am going to go
to the ANSI tab and I'm going to come
| | 01:13 | down and select ANSI37 and click OK.
| | 01:16 | Notice I can see a preview
of that hatch right here.
| | 01:19 | Now that we've chosen our pattern, we
need to tell AutoCAD what we want to hatch.
| | 01:23 | We can do that in two ways.
| | 01:25 | I can either select an object,
otherwise known as my boundary, or I can pick a
| | 01:31 | point inside my geometry and AutoCAD
will find the boundary automatically.
| | 01:36 | Since I'm dealing with a nice closed shape,
I am going to use the Select Objects method.
| | 01:41 | I will then select my circle and right-click
and in the menu, I am going to select Preview.
| | 01:48 | And this is a very dense pattern.
| | 01:49 | Let me zoom in a little bit.
| | 01:51 | That piece is very dense on our screen.
| | 01:53 | Let me back up, so I can see the
entire circle and let's make a change.
| | 01:57 | I am still in the Preview mode,. If I
hit the Escape key on my keyboard, I can
| | 02:02 | bring back the dialog box and
let's make a change to our scale.
| | 02:06 | The scale controls the size of our pattern.
| | 02:09 | Now there is a flyout here but
unfortunately it's not very helpful.
| | 02:13 | It only goes up to two.
| | 02:15 | So instead, I am going to click in
this field and I am going to type 30.
| | 02:18 | And I'm going to come down and click Preview.
| | 02:20 | And that looks a little bit better.
| | 02:22 | Now that I like my hatch,
I can right-click to accept it.
| | 02:26 | Let's pan the drawing over a little bit
and we will take a look at these shapes.
| | 02:31 | Now each of these guys was
created using the Rectangle command.
| | 02:34 | I am going to hit Escape to deselect them.
| | 02:37 | Let's try and create a hatch pattern
that falls in between these two shapes.
| | 02:42 | Once again I am going to
launch the Hatch command.
| | 02:44 | I am going to go with a different
pattern, so I am going to click the
| | 02:47 | Ellipsis button and let's go to the
Other Predefined tab and I am going to
| | 02:52 | select the square pattern.
| | 02:56 | Once again, since I am dealing with
closed shapes, I am going to use the Select
| | 02:59 | Objects method. I will then select this
shape and this one and right-click and
| | 03:08 | I will select Preview.
| | 03:09 | Now before I finish my hatch, let's hit
the Escape key and bring back the dialog box
| | 03:13 | and we will look at a
couple of other settings.
| | 03:16 | Let's take a look at angle.
| | 03:18 | Angle controls the rotation of my pattern.
| | 03:21 | In this case, the flyout
is a little bit more helpful.
| | 03:24 | I am going to click this and I am
going to set this to 45 degree rotation.
| | 03:28 | If you have any questions about the
other settings in this box, simply place
| | 03:32 | your cursor over the setting and
AutoCAD will give you more information or you
| | 03:37 | can always come down and click Help
and AutoCAD will direct you to the
| | 03:41 | information you need.
| | 03:42 | Since I have set this to 45,
I am going to click Preview.
| | 03:45 | Notice that my pattern is now rotated.
| | 03:48 | Let's bring up the dialog box one more
time and take a look at this setting
| | 03:52 | right here under Options.
| | 03:53 | It says Associative.
| | 03:55 | By default all of the patterns that
we create in AutoCAD are associative,
| | 03:59 | meaning they're related to our geometry.
| | 04:01 | Let me show you what I mean.
| | 04:03 | I am going to click OK to accept this
hatch pattern and then I'm going to click
| | 04:08 | on one of my entities.
| | 04:10 | Notice I get these little
blue grips on the corners.
| | 04:13 | If I click on a grip and then move my
cursor and click again, I can change my
| | 04:18 | geometry and notice the
hatch goes along for the ride.
| | 04:22 | Since it's associative, I can change my
geometry as much as I like and my hatch
| | 04:26 | will always look correct.
| | 04:28 | Once again, to deselect,
I am going to hit my Escape key.
| | 04:32 | Let's pan this over and we
will take a look at this geometry.
| | 04:35 | Let's say I would like to hatch
this interior area. Here's my problem.
| | 04:40 | This is not a closed shape.
| | 04:42 | It's a bunch of individual line segments.
| | 04:45 | No problem. We will hatch this
using the Pick Points method.
| | 04:48 | Let's deselect this.
| | 04:50 | I am going to go right
back to the Hatch command.
| | 04:53 | Once again we will choose a different pattern.
| | 04:54 | I am going to come down and I'm going to
select the cross pattern this time and click OK.
| | 05:02 | Notice AutoCAD is
remembering our previous angle.
| | 05:05 | Let me set this back to zero and this
time I am going to come up and select Pick
| | 05:09 | Points and this works a lot like
you are throwing a rock into a puddle.
| | 05:15 | I will pick inside this shape and AutoCAD
will fan out and find the boundary for me.
| | 05:20 | Then I can right-click and select
Preview and if that looks good, I can
| | 05:24 | right-click to accept.
| | 05:26 | Let me show you one more thing.
| | 05:28 | Occasionally you will create a pattern like
this and then you will want to make a change.
| | 05:32 | If you want to edit your AutoCAD hatch,
all you have to do is double-click on it.
| | 05:38 | This brings the dialog box back
and we can make any change we like.
| | 05:41 | For instance, I'm going to change my pattern.
| | 05:45 | Let's go with the Escher pattern this time.
| | 05:47 | I'm always looking for a reason to use Escher.
| | 05:49 | I will click Preview and I will
right-click to accept my hatch.
| | 05:56 | Now that we understand how to hatch
objects in AutoCAD, let's try and use this
| | 05:59 | tool in a practical example.
| | 06:01 | I am going to pan my drawing over.
| | 06:05 | On my screen I have got a
portion of an architectural floor plan.
| | 06:09 | This happens to be a public
restroom inside a movie theater.
| | 06:13 | Let's say I would like to put a hatch
pattern on the interior of my walls to
| | 06:17 | help simplify the appearance of my drawing.
| | 06:20 | Well, first thing's first,
what method am I going to use?
| | 06:23 | I obviously don't have a
perfectly closed shape here.
| | 06:27 | So, this is going to be a job for Pick Points.
| | 06:29 | Let me deselect this geometry.
| | 06:31 | We will launch the Hatch command.
| | 06:34 | I'm going to choose a pattern.
| | 06:37 | Let's go to ANSI and I am going
to set this to ANSI31 and click OK.
| | 06:41 | I'm going to change my Scale to 20.
| | 06:43 | We will make this a little bit smaller and
then I'm going to come up and click Pick Points.
| | 06:48 | I will then pick inside the wall.
| | 06:51 | Notice how AutoCAD finds the boundary for me.
| | 06:54 | I can then right-click and
select Preview. That looks good.
| | 06:58 | I will right-click again to accept.
| | 07:00 | Hatch patterns can be very effective in
helping you visually organize your drawings.
| | 07:05 | They can also transform an average drawing
into a professional looking presentation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Making Primary ModificationsMaking geometric changes using the property changer| 00:00 | The Property Changer is the most
powerful palette with an AutoCAD.
| | 00:04 | With it, we can modify or
correct anything in our drawing.
| | 00:07 | In this lesson, we are going to learn
how to use the Property Changer to make
| | 00:10 | some geometric changes to our objects.
| | 00:13 | If you look at my screen, you can
see I have two mechanical parts.
| | 00:16 | Now these guys are supposed to be identical.
| | 00:19 | The part on the right has been drawn correctly.
| | 00:22 | The part on the left has got some problems.
| | 00:25 | The goal in this lesson is to fix the
geometry of this part using the Property Changer.
| | 00:30 | My Property Changer palette is
currently anchored to my interface.
| | 00:34 | If you're not seeing yours on screen, simply
hit Ctrl+1 on your keyboard to turn it back on.
| | 00:39 | Now, I am going to be using this guy
frequently in this lesson, so I'm going to
| | 00:43 | click the Auto-hide icon so
that it stays docked on my screen.
| | 00:49 | Notice the palette is filled with
settings that are organized into major groups.
| | 00:54 | If we want, we can expand and contract
the groups by clicking these triangles
| | 00:59 | and it's important to note that the
number of settings that we see will change
| | 01:03 | depending on what we select.
| | 01:04 | For instance, I'm going to select
this circle, and if we look at the top of
| | 01:09 | palette, we can see that AutoCAD
recognizes that I've selected a circle.
| | 01:13 | For the work we're going to do in
this lesson, we are going to look at the
| | 01:16 | Geometry group of settings.
| | 01:19 | So, I'm going to collapse 3D
Visualization, so I can see all of my
| | 01:23 | Geometry settings on screen.
| | 01:25 | Take a look at the settings that we have.
Note that they're all specific to circles.
| | 01:30 | If I'd like to change one of these
values, I can simply click in the field.
| | 01:33 | For instance, we'll change the Radius
and from here I can type a new value.
| | 01:37 | I'm going to type 0.5 and hit Enter.
| | 01:40 | Notice the geometry
changes instantly on my screen.
| | 01:44 | Take a look at some of the
other things we can change.
| | 01:46 | We could change the circle's diameter,
we could change its circumference, or
| | 01:49 | we could change its area.
| | 01:51 | Notice that some of the
fields have gray backgrounds.
| | 01:55 | If a field is grayed out,
the value cannot be changed.
| | 01:59 | Now that we know how this works, let's
assign the appropriate radius to the circle.
| | 02:03 | If I look right up here, I can see it
should be set to 0.25, so I'll click in
| | 02:08 | the field and we'll type 0.25 and hit Enter.
| | 02:11 | And when I'm finished making my changes,
I can hit the Escape key on my keyboard
| | 02:15 | to deselect my circle.
| | 02:17 | At this point, I have
three more circles to correct.
| | 02:20 | Let's try and fix these and
we'll do it a little bit faster.
| | 02:22 | I am going to select this circle,
and I'll select this one and this one.
| | 02:29 | Take a look at my heading. Notice
that there are three circles selected.
| | 02:32 | Once again, we'll come down to
Geometry and in the Radius field I can see it
| | 02:36 | currently says Varies.
| | 02:38 | That means each of these
circles has a different radius.
| | 02:41 | No matter. I can click in the field and
I can type in the value I'd like, 0.25,
| | 02:46 | and hit Enter and we just corrected
all of those circles in a single step.
| | 02:50 | Once again, I'll hit
Escape to deselect my entities.
| | 02:54 | Finally, let's correct the ellipse.
| | 02:56 | I will select this guy.
| | 02:58 | Notice there are many more
Geometry settings for an ellipse.
| | 03:02 | If I click on this slider and hold, I can
pull this down so we can see all of them.
| | 03:07 | Right now my ellipse has a major radius of 1.25.
| | 03:11 | If I look right over here, my major
radius should be 2 because the overall
| | 03:15 | diameter is 4, so let's click in the
field and I'll set this to 2 and hit Enter.
| | 03:21 | Notice that aspect of the ellipse is now
correct and my minor radius is now highlighted.
| | 03:27 | Let's set this to 1.25, since the
overall diameter is 2.5 and now that I am
| | 03:34 | finished, I will hit Escape and then I
am going to come up to the top of the
| | 03:37 | palette, and click Minimize to
collapse this guy back down to an icon.
| | 03:42 | Without a doubt, the Property Changer is
the most valuable tool in our interface.
| | 03:46 | As we continue exploring AutoCAD and
learn how to create more objects,
| | 03:50 | keep looking to the Property Changer as a
means of modifying anything on your screen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Moving and copying elements| 00:00 | AutoCAD's Move and Copy commands work
side-by-side, allowing us to reposition or
| | 00:05 | duplicate our entities.
| | 00:07 | Now I say side-by-side because these
commands essentially work the exact same way.
| | 00:11 | Let me show you what I mean.
| | 00:12 | We are going to look at the Move command first.
| | 00:15 | Let's say I would like to move my circle,
such that its center point is located
| | 00:20 | at the upper-left corner of my rectangle.
| | 00:23 | To do that I am going to use the Move
command. Move is located right up here in
| | 00:27 | the Modify panel of the ribbon.
| | 00:30 | I will then select my circle and right-click.
| | 00:33 | Now AutoCAD wants a base point.
| | 00:34 | The base point is the point I would
like to use to pick this object up.
| | 00:39 | I'm going to pick it up
from the center of the circle.
| | 00:42 | Notice I'm holding it from that location,
and now where do I want to put it down?
| | 00:46 | I would like to put it down
at the endpoint of this line.
| | 00:49 | So I'll click right here, and
that's it. We just completed our move.
| | 00:54 | Let's move it again, this time I am going
to place it to the upper right-hand corner.
| | 00:58 | Let's launch the Move command.
| | 01:00 | I'm going to select my circle and then
I'm going to right-click so that AutoCAD
| | 01:05 | knows I'm done selecting objects.
| | 01:08 | Let's pick it up from the center
point and I am going to place it to the
| | 01:12 | endpoint right here.
| | 01:13 | I am going to pan the drawing
down a little bit and let's try
| | 01:15 | something different.
| | 01:17 | Let's say I would like to move this
circle, such that its center point is 10
| | 01:22 | units above my rectangle.
| | 01:25 | Once again, we'll launch the Move command.
| | 01:26 | We'll select the circle and right-click.
| | 01:29 | I'm going to pick it up from its
center point and now instead of using an
| | 01:34 | object snap, I am going to
come down and lock my Ortho.
| | 01:37 | I am going to pull in an upward direction,
and then I am going to type in my distance.
| | 01:42 | In this case I am going to
type in 10 and hit Enter.
| | 01:46 | That is called the direct
distance method of moving our geometry.
| | 01:50 | Let's take a look at the Copy command.
| | 01:52 | Functionality-wise, Copy
works the exact same way as Move.
| | 01:56 | Let's say I would like to create a copy of
this circle at all four corners of my rectangle.
| | 02:01 | Now, the Copy command is also
located in the Modify panel.
| | 02:05 | The icon is right here.
| | 02:07 | I'm going to select my circle and right-click.
| | 02:10 | Let's pick it up from the center of
the circle, and my Ortho is locked.
| | 02:14 | I really don't need that on right now.
| | 02:16 | I am going to turn it off by
hitting F8 key. All right.
| | 02:20 | Where would I like to create my first copy?
| | 02:22 | I am going to drop one at the endpoint of
this line, and notice I am still in the command.
| | 02:29 | That's because AutoCAD always
assumes you want to make multiple copies.
| | 02:33 | So, I can drop one at the endpoint of
this line, I could click the endpoint
| | 02:37 | of this line to make another one and we'll
drop another one at the endpoint of this line.
| | 02:41 | And when I am finished I can hit the
Escape key to get out of the command.
| | 02:44 | Now that we get the idea of how these
tools work, let's try and use them in
| | 02:47 | a practical example.
| | 02:48 | I am going to pan my drawing over
and we'll zoom out a little bit.
| | 02:52 | On my screen I have got
an architectural example.
| | 02:56 | This happens to be a floor
plan for a public restroom.
| | 02:59 | I'm currently working on the
stalls. As you can see I have the two
| | 03:02 | handicap stalls finished.
| | 03:05 | Let's take this symbol that represents a
toilet and place it in this next stall.
| | 03:09 | I am going to pan over and we'll
center that on screen a little bit.
| | 03:13 | Let's launch the Move command.
| | 03:15 | I'm going to select my symbol and right-click.
| | 03:18 | Now where would be the most
logical place to pick this guy up from?
| | 03:21 | Well, I am going to pick him
from the midpoint of the back.
| | 03:25 | Now, I don't have a running object snap
for a midpoint, so I will hold my Shift
| | 03:29 | key and right-click and
select Midpoint from the menu.
| | 03:33 | I will then select the
midpoint of this back line.
| | 03:37 | Now, where do I want to put it down?
| | 03:39 | Well, I'd like it to be
centrally located in the stall.
| | 03:43 | Let's look at another object snap.
| | 03:45 | I am going to Shift+Right-click
and I am going to use the object snap
| | 03:49 | Midpoint Between 2 Points.
| | 03:52 | I will then click the endpoint of this
line and the endpoint of this line and
| | 03:58 | AutoCAD places my symbol directly between them.
| | 04:02 | I am going to backup a little bit.
| | 04:03 | I am going to center this on
the screen a little better.
| | 04:05 | And let's use the Copy command to
finish the rest of these stalls.
| | 04:09 | Let's come up and launch Copy.
| | 04:10 | I am going to select my symbol and right-click.
| | 04:13 | Now, where do I want to pick it up from?
| | 04:15 | Well, I am going to zoom in and I am going
to pick it up from the endpoint of this wall.
| | 04:20 | Because this point is
common among all of the stalls.
| | 04:23 | So, we'll pick it up from here.
| | 04:26 | Notice where I am holding it from and
I will place one to the endpoint here, to
| | 04:31 | the endpoint here, we will pan over a
little bit, place one here and one to
| | 04:36 | the endpoint here.
| | 04:37 | Then when I am finished, I'll hit my Escape key.
| | 04:41 | As you can see the functionality of the
Move and Copy commands are essentially
| | 04:44 | the same. Using either of these tools
along with object snaps we can quickly
| | 04:48 | modify or add to our drawing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Rotating elements| 00:00 | Rotate is another fundamental skill
we need to work effectively in AutoCAD.
| | 00:05 | I'm sure you'd agree that it's much
faster to rotate an object than it would be
| | 00:08 | to draw new one at a different rotation.
| | 00:11 | In this lesson, we are going to
learn how to use the Rotate command.
| | 00:15 | If you look at my screen you can see I
have got a drawing that represents a clock.
| | 00:18 | Let's start out by rotating this hand.
| | 00:22 | To do that we are going
to use the Rotate command.
| | 00:24 | Rotate is right up here in the Modify panel.
| | 00:28 | I will then select the object I
want to rotate and right-click and now
| | 00:32 | AutoCAD wants a base point.
| | 00:34 | The base point is the point I'm
going to be rotating my object around.
| | 00:38 | In this case I'd like it to
rotate around the center of this end.
| | 00:42 | Now be careful when you pick this point.
I currently have a running object snap
| | 00:46 | set for Endpoint and Center, and whichever
of these snaps my cursor is closest to,
| | 00:51 | that's what I am going to get.
| | 00:51 | So, I am going to click right
here to make sure I get center.
| | 00:55 | And now all I have to do is specify my angle.
| | 00:58 | I could pick a point on screen to
do that, or I could type in a value.
| | 01:01 | I am going to type in 45 to
represent 45 degrees and I'll hit Enter.
| | 01:08 | When using the Rotate command, if you
use a positive angle, your entities will
| | 01:13 | rotate counterclockwise.
| | 01:15 | To rotate this hand clockwise,
I'd have use a negative angle.
| | 01:19 | Let's watch the command again and this time
we are going to look at one of the sub-options.
| | 01:23 | I am going to come up and click the icon.
| | 01:24 | I'll select the object I
want to rotate and right-click.
| | 01:29 | Let's rotate him around the center of the end.
| | 01:33 | Now before I enter my angle take a
look at my command line. Notice I have got
| | 01:36 | a sub-option of Copy.
| | 01:38 | I can create a rotated copy
of my original. Let's do that.
| | 01:42 | I'm going to right-click and select Copy
from the menu, and I would like my copy
| | 01:47 | to be rotated at 65 degrees
clockwise from the original.
| | 01:52 | So, I am going to type -65
for my angle and hit Enter.
| | 01:57 | Now that we get the basic idea of how
this command works, let's try and use it
| | 02:00 | in a practical example.
| | 02:01 | I am going to pan my drawing over
and we'll zoom out a little bit.
| | 02:05 | On my screen I have got
an architectural example.
| | 02:09 | This is a floor plan for a single-family home.
| | 02:12 | If you take a look right up here in the
master bedroom area, notice I have got a
| | 02:16 | symbol that represents a queen size bed.
| | 02:19 | I would also like to have a queen size
bed in my second bedroom right down here.
| | 02:23 | Let's zoom in a little
bit and I'll center this.
| | 02:26 | And I am going to start out by
creating a copy of the original.
| | 02:29 | So, let's launch the Copy command.
I will grab the bed and right-click.
| | 02:34 | Now, where should we pick
it up from? Watch this.
| | 02:37 | I am going to pick it up
from a point right out here.
| | 02:40 | Since this is furniture and I'm not
going to be placing it precisely in the
| | 02:44 | other room just yet, holding it out here
can actually help me because my running
| | 02:48 | object snaps won't get in
the way when I put this down.
| | 02:50 | I am going to drop it right here and
then I'll hit Escape. Let's zoom in.
| | 02:56 | Now, I don't want the bed
situated in this room like this.
| | 03:00 | I would like to rotate it, so that the
headboard of the bed is along this wall.
| | 03:04 | So, let's rotate this guy.
| | 03:06 | I am going to come up and
launch the Rotate command.
| | 03:08 | We'll select our geometry and right-click.
| | 03:12 | Now what point do I want to rotate around?
| | 03:14 | Now, I am going to rotate around a
point right in the middle of the bed.
| | 03:17 | Once again, it's furniture.
| | 03:19 | I don't have to be that
precise. And my rotation angle,
| | 03:22 | since I want to go
clockwise, it's going to be -90.
| | 03:24 | Let me zoom in a little bit more.
| | 03:27 | Now, let's place this guy precisely in the room.
| | 03:31 | I would like to place him such that he
is 6 inches away from this wall and 6
| | 03:34 | inches away from this wall.
| | 03:36 | And since this is an architectural
example, we are going to be using the quotes
| | 03:40 | when we enter our inches.
| | 03:41 | I am going to launch the Move command and
I will select the geometry and right-click.
| | 03:46 | I'm going to pick it up from the
endpoint right here and I'm going to use
| | 03:50 | temporary tracking to help me place this.
| | 03:52 | I am going to type tk, Enter.
| | 03:55 | And then I'm going to guide AutoCAD
to where this thing should be placed.
| | 03:58 | I am going to start out at the
endpoint here and I'm going to pull up and
| | 04:03 | type 6 inches, Enter.
| | 04:05 | Then I'm going to pull to
left and type 6 inches, Enter.
| | 04:12 | Now that I am where I want to be, I will hit
the Enter key one more time to place the bed.
| | 04:18 | When using the Rotate command, the
most important thing to remember is that a
| | 04:21 | positive angle will rotate
your objects counterclockwise.
| | 04:25 | Once you understand this concept,
you can easily rotate your entities to
| | 04:29 | match their surroundings.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Trimming and extending geometry| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to
learn how to clean up our geometry.
| | 00:03 | We are going to take a look at
the Trim and Extend commands.
| | 00:06 | Trim and Extend help us correct our
line work after we've made changes.
| | 00:10 | If you look at my screen you can
see I have got some simple geometry.
| | 00:13 | Notice I've got a horizontal
line passing through this circle.
| | 00:17 | Let's say I'd like to remove the portion
of the line that falls outside my circle.
| | 00:23 | To do that, I'm going use the Trim command.
| | 00:26 | Trim is located right up here in the
Modify panel and when I launch the command,
| | 00:31 | take a look at our command line.
| | 00:33 | Notice AutoCAD is asking
me to select a cutting edge.
| | 00:37 | When we use the trim command, we are
essentially using one object to cut another.
| | 00:42 | So, I'm going to select my circle as
my cutting edge, and I'll right-click.
| | 00:47 | I will then select the portion of the
line I would like to trim and notice
| | 00:50 | AutoCAD pulls it back to meet the cutting edge.
| | 00:54 | Let's select this end as well, and when I
am finished I am going to hit the Escape key.
| | 00:59 | Now let's look at the exact opposite situation.
| | 01:01 | Let's say I would like this
horizontal line to be drawn such that it meets
| | 01:05 | these outer circles.
| | 01:07 | In this case I need to extend my geometry.
| | 01:09 | Extend is also located in the Modify panel.
| | 01:12 | I am going to click the flyout right
next to Trim, and notice that Trim and
| | 01:16 | Extend share the same menu.
| | 01:20 | Once again, let's take a
look at our command line.
| | 01:22 | This time AutoCAD is asking
us to select a boundary edge.
| | 01:26 | You see Trim and Extend work the same way.
| | 01:28 | Whereas Trim pulls our geometry back to
meet a cutting edge, Extend projects our
| | 01:33 | geometry forward to meet a boundary edge.
| | 01:36 | So, I'm going to select this circle, and this
one is my boundary edges, and I'll right-click.
| | 01:42 | I will then select this end of my line
to extend and then I'll select this end
| | 01:46 | as well, and when I am
finished I'll hit my Escape key.
| | 01:50 | The Trim and Extend commands are so
similar in fact that we can launch one
| | 01:54 | from within the other.
| | 01:55 | Let me show you what I mean.
| | 01:57 | I am going to pan my drawing over.
| | 01:59 | On my screen I have got
some more simple line work.
| | 02:03 | Let's try and convert this
geometry into the shape of a ladder.
| | 02:06 | Well to do that, I would have to extend
some of these lines, and I would have to
| | 02:11 | trim off some of the others.
| | 02:13 | Let's try and do all of it with one command.
| | 02:15 | I am going to come up and launch the
Extend command, which happens to be the
| | 02:19 | default now, since we launched that one last.
| | 02:23 | I will then select this vertical line,
and this one as my boundary edges,
| | 02:27 | and I'll right-click.
| | 02:29 | And I'll extend this line, and
this one, and this one, and this one.
| | 02:34 | And take a look at my cursor.
| | 02:36 | I can select more objects to extend,
or if I hold my Shift key I can toggle
| | 02:41 | to the Trim command.
| | 02:43 | So as long Shift is held down I can
click this line and this one, this one and
| | 02:49 | this one, and you can see that my
boundary edges become cutting edges.
| | 02:53 | When I'm finished I'll hit the Escape key.
| | 02:56 | Now that we understand the workflow
behind Trim and Extend, let's try and use it
| | 03:00 | in a practical example.
| | 03:01 | I am going to pan my drawing over.
| | 03:05 | We'll center this on screen.
| | 03:08 | Let's see if we can finish the window
on the left, such that it looks like the
| | 03:11 | window on the right.
| | 03:12 | I am going to start by creating the arch top.
| | 03:15 | I am going to do that by using the
Circle command and I would like to create my
| | 03:18 | circle from the Shift+Right-
click, Midpoint of this line.
| | 03:25 | And I can see that this
circle must have a diameter of 39.
| | 03:27 | So, I'm going in right-click and select
Diameter and I'll type 39 and hit Enter.
| | 03:34 | Let's create one more circle.
| | 03:36 | I am going to hit my Spacebar to
go right back into the command.
| | 03:39 | I'll create my new circle
from the center of this one.
| | 03:44 | And looking at my dimensions, it looks
like the radius of my inner circle is 1.5
| | 03:49 | inches less than the outer one.
| | 03:51 | So, the diameter must be 3 inches less or 36.
| | 03:54 | So, I am going to right-click and select
Diameter and I'll type 36 and hit Enter.
| | 04:00 | Let's zoom in a little bit.
| | 04:02 | Now I don't need the bottom half of these
circles, so I am going to trim them off.
| | 04:06 | I am going to come up and
click the fly-out and select Trim.
| | 04:10 | We'll use the top of the window as our
cutting edge and I'll right-click and
| | 04:14 | then I will select the bottom
half of each of these circles.
| | 04:17 | Now I also don't need
these little pieces on the end.
| | 04:21 | Let's trim those off.
| | 04:23 | Once again, I am going to launch the
Trim command and I'll select this arc and
| | 04:27 | right-click and then I will
click to remove these outer pieces.
| | 04:33 | Before I get out of the command, I
am going to hold down my Shift key to
| | 04:36 | toggle to extend and I'm going to project
each of these lines up to meet that same edge.
| | 04:43 | And then I'll hit my Escape key.
| | 04:45 | Finally, I need to remove a bunch of
little tiny pieces, so I am going to need a
| | 04:49 | lot of cutting edges this time.
| | 04:51 | Let's take a look at this option.
| | 04:52 | I am going to launch Trim again.
| | 04:55 | Instead of selecting all of my
cutting edges, take a look at my cursor.
| | 04:59 | AutoCAD says select cutting edges, or
if I hit the Enter key I'm selecting
| | 05:10 | everything as a cutting edge.
| | 05:12 | I am going to hit Enter and then I
will trim off this line and this one, this
| | 05:18 | one and this one, this one, a couple more.
| | 05:23 | There we go and when I am
finished, I will hit Escape.
| | 05:26 | As you can see the Trim and Extend
commands have essentially the same workflow.
| | 05:30 | Jumping from the one to the other is
as simple as pressing your Shift key.
| | 05:34 | Knowing how to use both of these
commands will allow you to quickly and
| | 05:37 | accurately clean up your geometry.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating offsets| 00:00 | In this lesson we are going to look
at another way to copy our geometry.
| | 00:04 | This time we will use the Offset command.
| | 00:06 | What makes Offset special is that it
creates parallel copies of our line work.
| | 00:10 | On my screen I have got these simple
line segment, a circle and a rectangle.
| | 00:15 | Let's create a parallel copy of this line first.
| | 00:18 | To do that, I am going to
launch my Offset command.
| | 00:20 | Offset is right here in the Modify panel.
| | 00:24 | I will then enter my Offset distance.
| | 00:26 | This is the distance between the copies.
| | 00:28 | I am going to type 0.5 and hit Enter.
| | 00:31 | I will select my entity and then
finally I will click on screen to identify on
| | 00:36 | which side of the object
I'd like to create my copy.
| | 00:40 | Since I would like my copy below the
object, I am going to click down here
| | 00:43 | to finish my Offset.
| | 00:45 | Notice I'm still in the command.
| | 00:46 | AutoCAD always assumes you want to make
multiple offsets. So if we also wanted
| | 00:51 | to offset our circle, we could click
the circle and then click to the outside.
| | 00:56 | If I wanted to make an offset to the inside
I would grab the circle and click to the inside.
| | 01:00 | When I am finished with the Offset
command, I can hit the Enter key to exit or
| | 01:05 | I can always hit the Escape key.
| | 01:08 | Let's create another offset.
| | 01:09 | Let's say I would like to offset this
rectangle 0.25 units to the outside.
| | 01:14 | We will launch the command.
| | 01:16 | I am going to type in my distance, 0.25, Enter.
| | 01:21 | I will select my rectangle and I'll
click to the outside to make my offset.
| | 01:26 | Now, when you are making offsets be
mindful of your running object snaps.
| | 01:30 | I currently have a running object
snap set for Endpoint and I'm still in
| | 01:34 | the Offset command.
| | 01:35 | Let me click this line and if I'd
like to create my copy above the line
| | 01:40 | I need to pick far enough away such that the
running object snap isn't getting in my way.
| | 01:45 | If I was to click here, this could
confuse AutoCAD because I'm not really
| | 01:48 | picking to the side of the object. My
endpoint is grabbing a point on the object itself.
| | 01:54 | So, when you're picking your side, make
sure you're far enough out so that your
| | 01:57 | running object snaps aren't getting in the way.
| | 02:00 | Now that I'm finished with the command,
I am going to hit the Escape key to get out.
| | 02:02 | Now that we understand the basic workflow
behind Offset, I am going to pan my drawing over.
| | 02:09 | Let's see if we can re-create this drawing and
we'll see how Offset can help us along the way.
| | 02:14 | I am going to start out by launching
the Line command and I am going to pick a
| | 02:18 | point on screen right about here.
| | 02:20 | I am going to come down and lock my
Ortho and I'll pull straight across.
| | 02:25 | The length isn't important right now.
| | 02:27 | I'm going to click right here to
define my length and then I will hit Escape.
| | 02:31 | This line is going to
represent the center line of the part.
| | 02:34 | I am going to go right back into the
Line command by hitting the Spacebar and
| | 02:38 | I am going to pick a point right about
here and my Ortho is still locked.
| | 02:42 | I am going to pull my line down
and click and hit Escape.
| | 02:47 | This intersection that I've created
will represent the intersection right here.
| | 02:51 | Let's create our inner circle.
| | 02:53 | I will launch the Circle command
and I'd like to place that at the--
| | 02:58 | Shift+Right-click to
bring up the Object Snap menu.
| | 03:01 | We will select Intersection and I will
put it right at the intersection here.
| | 03:05 | This circle has a radius of 1,
so I will type 1 and hit Enter.
| | 03:10 | Now these circles share the same
center point and I can see their
| | 03:13 | radiuses differ by one unit.
| | 03:15 | So, let's offset this circle out 1 unit.
| | 03:18 | We will launch the Offset command.
| | 03:21 | My distance will be 1, Enter.
| | 03:24 | I will select my circle and I will
click to the outside and hit Escape.
| | 03:29 | Now, let's find the
center point of these circles.
| | 03:32 | If I offset this vertical line 7
units over, that would show me where the
| | 03:36 | centers are located.
| | 03:38 | Once again, we will launch the Offset command.
| | 03:41 | My distance is 7, Enter.
| | 03:43 | I would like to offset this line
to the right and I'll hit Escape.
| | 03:48 | Now I could create two new circles,
but instead I am going to use the Copy command
| | 03:52 | and I am going to copy this
circle and this one. Right-click.
| | 03:56 | We will copy them from the center and
I will place them to the intersection
| | 04:04 | right here and I'll hit Escape.
| | 04:06 | Now let's find the top
and the bottom of the part.
| | 04:09 | Well, if the radius of this circle is 2,
that means if I was to offset this
| | 04:14 | center line 2 units up and 2 units
down, that would show me the top and
| | 04:18 | the bottom edge of the part.
| | 04:21 | So, we will launch Offset again.
| | 04:22 | I am going to type in 2 for my distance.
| | 04:25 | I will offset this line up and
this line down and I will hit Escape.
| | 04:32 | Let's trim up our line work.
| | 04:33 | I will launch the Trim command and I am
going to use this edge and this edge as
| | 04:38 | cutting objects and right-click.
| | 04:40 | We will trim off these outer lines and
we will trim off the inner half of these
| | 04:47 | circles and I will hit Escape.
| | 04:49 | Finally, we just need to
find the edges of these notches.
| | 04:53 | Well, if I offset this vertical line
over 2 units and then if I offset it
| | 04:58 | another 3 that would give me the vertical edges.
| | 05:01 | If I offset my center line up and down,
that would give me these horizontal edges.
| | 05:08 | Let's launch Offset again and my distance is
already 2, so I will hit Enter to accept that.
| | 05:13 | I will offset this line over and hit Escape.
| | 05:17 | Unfortunately you can't change
distances in the middle of the Offset command.
| | 05:21 | You have to get out and get back in.
| | 05:23 | Let's go right back into the command and
I will type in 3 for my distance and hit Enter.
| | 05:28 | We will offset this line over and hit Escape.
| | 05:31 | Finally, we will go right back into the command.
| | 05:33 | This time I am going to do
it by hitting the Spacebar.
| | 05:36 | I'll type in a distance of 1 and hit
Enter and we will offset our center line up
| | 05:42 | and down and I'll hit Escape. All right.
| | 05:45 | All we have to do is some cleanup work.
| | 05:47 | I am going to launch my Trim command
and I'm going to use these two vertical
| | 05:51 | lines as cutting edges.
| | 05:52 | I will use these horizontal lines as
cutting edges and I'm going to want to
| | 05:57 | trim off these outside pieces so I'll use these
lines as cutting edges and I will right-click.
| | 06:04 | Then we will trim off the
lines at the top and the bottom.
| | 06:07 | I'll remove this line to create my gap.
| | 06:11 | I'll remove these lines on the left and
right side and then finally, I'll remove
| | 06:17 | these vertical lines and when
I am finished I will hit Escape.
| | 06:21 | As you can see creating offsets is a
great way to build your geometry on screen.
| | 06:26 | I think you will find the Offset command
to be one of AutoCAD's most useful tools.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Erasing elements| 00:00 | Let's face it.
| | 00:01 | You're not going to keep all the
line work you create in AutoCAD.
| | 00:04 | Along the way you may create some
sketch lines. Your design may change.
| | 00:08 | You may even make a couple of mistakes.
| | 00:10 | In this lesson, we are going to look
at how do we erase unwanted entities.
| | 00:13 | On my screen I have got
an architectural example.
| | 00:16 | This is a drawing of a small cabinet.
| | 00:19 | On one side of the cabinet I have got a door
and on the other side I have got three drawers.
| | 00:24 | Let's make a design change.
| | 00:26 | Maybe I would like to remove these drawers and
have two shelves on this side of the cabinet.
| | 00:32 | So, I obviously don't need
my drawer hardware anymore.
| | 00:35 | To remove these guys, I am
going to use the Erase command.
| | 00:38 | Erase is located right up
here in the Modify panel.
| | 00:41 | Once I launch the tool, I can select the
objects I'd like to erase and right-click.
| | 00:48 | Now that's one way to remove
geometry from your drawing.
| | 00:52 | Let's say I would also
like to remove the shelves.
| | 00:55 | Another way I can erase line
work is by selecting it first.
| | 00:59 | Let me select all four of these guys
and then I'll press the Delete key on my
| | 01:04 | keyboard and we get the same result.
| | 01:07 | Now, I don't want to leave this side
of my cabinet open. Tell you what.
| | 01:11 | Let's match the door that
we have on the right side.
| | 01:14 | To do that, I'm simply
going to copy the handle over.
| | 01:18 | And I can see from the dimension that the
center of the handle is 2 inches from this edge.
| | 01:23 | So, I am going to launch my Offset
command and for my distance, I am going to
| | 01:27 | type 2 inches. Remember this is an
architectural example. I'm going to select
| | 01:33 | this line and offset it to
this side and I will hit Escape.
| | 01:36 | And we will launch the Copy command and
we will grab this circle and right-click.
| | 01:42 | I am going to copy it from the center
and I'd like to place it to the midpoint
| | 01:51 | of this line and I will hit Escape.
| | 01:55 | Finally, I don't need this sketch line.
| | 01:57 | I am going to come up and launch my Erase
command, we will select the line and right-click.
| | 02:03 | So, if your design needs a change or you
need to get rid of some sketch lines or
| | 02:07 | you just feel like throwing away a
portion of your drawing and starting over,
| | 02:11 | you can always remove your unwanted
entities by using the Erase command.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Undoing and redoing actions| 00:00 | If you ask most AutoCAD users what
their favorite command is, Undo is
| | 00:04 | usually the answer.
| | 00:06 | That's because we all make mistakes and
when we do the Undo command will let us
| | 00:10 | put things back the way they were.
| | 00:12 | In this lesson, we're going to
learn how to use the Undo command.
| | 00:15 | On my screen I've got a mechanical
example. This is a drawing of a gasket and
| | 00:20 | this happens to be a metric drawing.
| | 00:21 | It was created such that
each unit equals 1 millimeter.
| | 00:25 | Now, to demonstrate Undo,
first we have to do something.
| | 00:28 | So, I'm going to make a
design change to this geometry.
| | 00:31 | Currently this tab is
rotated at a 45-degree angle.
| | 00:36 | I would like to rotate it 15 degrees
clockwise from its current position.
| | 00:41 | To do that I'm going to launch the
Rotate command and I'll select the geometry
| | 00:46 | I'd like to rotate and right-click.
| | 00:49 | I'd like to rotate this around the
center of this circle and to rotate
| | 00:53 | clockwise, I would typically type -15.
| | 00:56 | But remember, we're talking about
Undo, so I'm going to make a mistake.
| | 01:00 | I'm going to type -115 and hit
Enter and that's obviously incorrect.
| | 01:08 | To fix this I'm going to use the Undo command.
| | 01:11 | Undo is located at the top of our interface.
| | 01:13 | It looks like the backward pointing arrow.
| | 01:16 | Now, before I click this, notice
there's also a forward pointing arrow that
| | 01:20 | happens to be grayed out and we'll
talk about this command in just a second.
| | 01:23 | I'm going to click Undo and
notice AutoCAD backs me up one command.
| | 01:29 | Also notice that since I've done the
Undo, the forward arrow is now available.
| | 01:34 | This is the Redo command.
| | 01:36 | Redo will reverse the effect of an Undo.
| | 01:39 | So, if I click this, I can put the
geometry back to its previous position.
| | 01:44 | Now, I don't want it there, so I'm going
to click Undo again and let me give you
| | 01:48 | one important tip with regard to Redo.
| | 01:51 | The Redo command can only follow an Undo.
| | 01:55 | Since I just did an Undo we
can see the command is active.
| | 01:58 | If I so much as pan my drawing on
screen, notice Redo is no longer available.
| | 02:03 | Now let's rotate this geometry correctly.
| | 02:06 | I'm going to launch Rotate command again,
select the geometry and right-click.
| | 02:14 | I'll rotate it around the center.
| | 02:17 | And then I am going to
rotate it -15 and hit Enter.
| | 02:21 | Let's make a more significant design change.
| | 02:23 | I'm going to change the tab geometry itself.
| | 02:26 | I'm going to start by selecting this arc,
then we'll go to the Property Changer
| | 02:31 | and I can see that this arc has a radius of 115.
| | 02:33 | I'm going to click in this field.
| | 02:36 | Let's change it to 85 and I'll hit Enter.
| | 02:39 | Now that I've revised the geometry,
I'll move off the palette and let it
| | 02:43 | collapse and then I'll hit
Escape to deselect the arc.
| | 02:46 | Now, these lines are no longer
useful so I'm going to erase those.
| | 02:51 | Let's launch the Erase command, we'll
select the lines and right-click and then
| | 02:55 | we'll create some new lines.
| | 02:56 | I'm going to launch the Line command
and then I'm going to Shift+Right-click.
| | 03:01 | It will bring up the Object Snap
menu and I'm going to use the Tangent
| | 03:05 | object snap, because I'd like my line
to be tangent to this arc and then I
| | 03:10 | will Shift+Right-click.
| | 03:11 | We will select Tangent and I want a
tangent of this arc and I'll hit Escape.
| | 03:16 | I'm going to hit the Spacebar to go
right back into the Line command and we will
| | 03:20 | do the same thing for the other side.
| | 03:29 | One more thing. I'm going to zoom
in and check the geometry where the
| | 03:32 | straight line meets the arc.
| | 03:36 | Now at first glance that can seem
a little frightening because that
| | 03:39 | geometry should touch. Don't worry.
| | 03:41 | It's a regen issue.
| | 03:43 | My arc isn't appearing as smooth as it should.
| | 03:45 | I'm going to type re and hit
Enter to regenerate my geometry.
| | 03:51 | And I can see the tangency point
from the previous arc to the new arc is
| | 03:55 | obviously different.
| | 03:56 | So, I'm going to have to trim off
a little bit of this arc segment.
| | 03:59 | I'm going to launch my Trim command and I'll
select this cutting edge and you know what?
| | 04:04 | It's going to be the same on the other side.
| | 04:06 | So, let's zoom out and I'll pan over
and I'll select this line as a cutting
| | 04:10 | edge and right-click.
| | 04:11 | Now, I'll zoom back in and
I'll trim off this piece.
| | 04:17 | We'll zoom out, we'll pan over
and I'll trim off this piece.
| | 04:24 | Now my geometry touches end-
to-end all the way around.
| | 04:27 | Let's hit Escape to get out of the
command and then we'll center this
| | 04:30 | geometry on screen.
| | 04:33 | Now, here's a question. What if I hit
another design change that said, put this
| | 04:37 | part back the way it was?
| | 04:38 | Well, we could go through and click
Undo, Undo, Undo and just keep backing up
| | 04:44 | one step at a time or notice there
is a flyout next to the Undo command.
| | 04:49 | If I click this, I can go back
several commands in one step.
| | 04:53 | Notice here is where I
created my two new line segments.
| | 04:56 | Here is where I change the radius of the arc.
| | 04:58 | I'm going to click right here to
take away all those steps and notice my
| | 05:02 | geometry is restored to its previous state.
| | 05:04 | The Undo command is a lot like an
insurance policy. No matter what we may do to
| | 05:08 | our drawing, we can always restore
our geometry by using the Undo command.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Selecting GeometrySelecting entities using a window| 00:00 | Selecting our entities one at a time is okay
but it's not the most efficient way to work.
| | 00:05 | In this lesson, we're going to learn how to
select multiple objects by using a window.
| | 00:10 | If you look at my screen, you
can see I have several shapes.
| | 00:13 | Let's say I'd like to erase these 6 circles.
| | 00:16 | To do that, I'm going to launch my
Erase command and instead of picking these
| | 00:20 | guys one at a time, I'm going to click
on the screen right here and I'm going to
| | 00:24 | pull to the right and notice what's happening.
| | 00:27 | This is called a window selection,
and a window selection will select the
| | 00:30 | entities that fall completely within the window.
| | 00:34 | So I'll move my cursor down here so that
all of my circles fall inside the shape
| | 00:38 | and I'll click to finish my window and
now that I'm done selecting objects,
| | 00:42 | I'll right-click to finish the command.
| | 00:46 | Let's click Undo to bring our
circles back and we'll look at another type
| | 00:50 | of window selection.
| | 00:51 | This time let's say I'd
like to erase my rectangles.
| | 00:56 | Let's launch the Erase command and to
select these, I'm going to move my cursor
| | 01:00 | over here and click and then pull to
the left and notice this selection.
| | 01:05 | This is called a crossing window.
| | 01:07 | A crossing window will select all of
the entities that fall completely within
| | 01:10 | the window or cross over its boundary.
| | 01:14 | So if I move my cursor over here and
click to finish my selection window, all of
| | 01:18 | the rectangles are selected
because they crossed over the boundary.
| | 01:22 | Once again, now that I'm done selecting
objects, I'll right-click to finish the command.
| | 01:27 | Let's bring our rectangles back.
| | 01:30 | These window selection methods will
work with any AutoCAD command that asks
| | 01:34 | us to select objects.
| | 01:35 | For instance, if I launch the Move command,
AutoCAD is asking me to select objects.
| | 01:40 | I'm going to pick on screen.
| | 01:42 | Note that the type of selection that I
get depends on which way I move my cursor.
| | 01:46 | If I move to the right, I get a window.
| | 01:48 | If I move to the left, I get a crossing window.
| | 01:51 | Since we're in the Move command,
let's move our 6 circles 100 units down.
| | 01:55 | I'm going to place my window
around the circles and click.
| | 01:59 | I'll right-click to finish the selection.
| | 02:01 | I'm going to pick these up from the
center of this circle and my Ortho happens
| | 02:05 | to be locked, so I'm going to pull
straight down and type 100 and hit Enter.
| | 02:10 | Now that we understand the workflow
behind the window selections, let's try and
| | 02:14 | use this tool in a practical example.
| | 02:16 | I'm going to pan my drawing over.
| | 02:21 | We'll center this geometry on screen.
| | 02:23 | Let's say we'd like to rotate the
tab portion of this gasket 25 degrees
| | 02:28 | clockwise from its current position.
| | 02:30 | I'm going to launch the Rotate command
and at the Select Objects prompt,
| | 02:35 | I'm going to click right up here and
I'm going to pull to the left to create a
| | 02:38 | crossing window and click.
| | 02:41 | Notice that that simple window was
enough to select all of that geometry.
| | 02:44 | Let me right-click to finish the selection.
| | 02:47 | I'd like to rotate this geometry around
the center of this circle and my Ortho
| | 02:52 | is still locked. Don't worry about that.
| | 02:53 | I'm going to enter my angle.
| | 02:55 | I'm going to type -25 and hit Enter.
| | 02:59 | Let's make one more change.
| | 03:00 | Maybe I'd like to rotate this
inner geometry and these slots 45
| | 03:05 | degrees counterclockwise.
| | 03:07 | Once again, we'll launch the Rotate
command and this time, I'm going to pick
| | 03:10 | right about here on the screen and
I'm going to make a window around just
| | 03:15 | this geometry and click.
| | 03:17 | Notice that it's the only geometry
that we've selected because it's the only
| | 03:20 | geometry that fell completely within the window.
| | 03:23 | Let's right-click to finish selecting objects.
| | 03:26 | I'm going to rotate these around the
center of this circle and I'll type 45 and
| | 03:32 | hit Enter, since we're going counterclockwise.
| | 03:36 | More than half the work you do on
AutoCAD will require you to make selections.
| | 03:40 | Knowing how to use windows to select
multiple objects is one of the fastest ways
| | 03:44 | to increase your productivity.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding and removing from selections| 00:00 | Sometimes when selecting objects we
may select more than what we intended.
| | 00:04 | In this lesson, we're going to learn
how to remove objects from a selection.
| | 00:08 | Take a look at my screen.
| | 00:09 | We're going to work with
this geometry on the left first.
| | 00:13 | Let's say I would like to
erase all of these green circles.
| | 00:16 | To do that, I'm going to launch the
Erase command and then I'm going to make a
| | 00:19 | window around this geometry.
| | 00:21 | Now I've obviously selected too much.
| | 00:24 | Let me show you how we
can deselect entities.
| | 00:27 | If I hold my Shift key, I can click
to select each of these rectangles and
| | 00:31 | they'll all be removed from the selection.
| | 00:34 | I can now take my finger off the Shift
key and since I'm done selecting objects,
| | 00:38 | I can right-click to finish the command.
| | 00:41 | Let's bring our geometry back
and we'll turn it up a notch.
| | 00:44 | This time, let's try and erase all
of the green circles in this drawing.
| | 00:48 | Once again, I'm going to launch the
Erase command. I'm going to make a window
| | 00:52 | around all of these geometry.
| | 00:53 | I'll then hold my Shift key to deselect
and instead of picking these guys one at a time,
| | 00:59 | I'm going to click right here in
the middle of this rectangle and notice
| | 01:03 | that we can also use a selection
window to deselect their entities.
| | 01:07 | Let me click right down here to finish and
these guys have been removed from my selection.
| | 01:12 | I'm still holding down the Shift key.
| | 01:14 | Let me click right here and I'll
make a crossing window to right down here
| | 01:18 | to remove these guys.
| | 01:20 | I will then release the Shift key and
now that I'm finished, I'll right-click to
| | 01:24 | complete the command.
| | 01:26 | Once again we'll bring the geometry back.
| | 01:28 | Let's try one more.
| | 01:30 | This time I'd like to move these rectangles
and let's see how fast we can select them.
| | 01:36 | I'm going to launch my Move command
and I'm going to click right here.
| | 01:40 | We'll make a window around these guys.
| | 01:42 | I'll then hold my Shift key and click
right here and it'll make a crossing
| | 01:47 | window to deselect these circles.
| | 01:50 | Now that I'm finished selecting objects,
I will right-click and we'll pick these
| | 01:54 | rectangles up from this endpoint.
My Ortho happens to be locked.
| | 01:59 | I'm just going to pull to the
left and type 10 and hit Enter.
| | 02:04 | Now that we understand how to remove
objects from a selection, let's try and use
| | 02:08 | this tool in a practical example.
| | 02:10 | I'm going to pan my drawing over and
on my screen I've got pair of speakers.
| | 02:17 | Now, there's been a design change.
The newest version is on the right-hand side.
| | 02:22 | I can see that the speaker mount
for this speaker has changed from a
| | 02:26 | semi-rectangular shape to a simple circle.
| | 02:29 | Let's see if we can correct the
geometry on the left so that it looks like the
| | 02:33 | geometry on the right.
| | 02:34 | I'm going to zoom in on the speaker
and I obviously don't need this line work
| | 02:38 | around the outside anymore,
so I'm going to erase it.
| | 02:42 | When I launch the Erase command and
probably the easiest way to select this
| | 02:46 | geometry is by selecting everything.
| | 02:48 | I'm going to make a window around the
entire speaker and I want to keep the
| | 02:52 | geometry on the inside so let's
remove that from the selection.
| | 02:55 | I'll hold my Shift key and click.
| | 02:57 | It'll make a crossing
window this way and I'll click.
| | 03:02 | Now that I'm finished selecting
objects, I'll right-click, there we go.
| | 03:05 | Let's back up a little bit. It looks like we
need to create a circle with a diameter of 8.8.
| | 03:10 | I'm going to launch my Circle command.
| | 03:13 | I'll create my circle from the
center of this one and I want to enter a
| | 03:16 | diameter so I'm going to right-click
and select Diameter from the menu and then
| | 03:21 | we'll type 8.8 and hit Enter.
| | 03:25 | So the next time you select more
than what you need, whether it be
| | 03:28 | intentional or unintentional, you
can always remove entities from your
| | 03:31 | selection by using your Shift key.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using keyboard shortcuts| 00:00 | Sometimes using a window isn't the
most effective way to select our objects.
| | 00:04 | At times like these, we can use the
key-in functions to quickly select objects
| | 00:08 | that are difficult to select using a rectangle.
| | 00:11 | In this lesson, we're going to
learn how to select objects using some
| | 00:14 | keyboard shortcuts.
| | 00:16 | On my screen, I've got a
civil engineering example.
| | 00:18 | This drawing happens to be a small
public park, created such that each unit
| | 00:22 | equals 1 foot, and we're going to
make some changes to this drawing and
| | 00:27 | in doing so we are going to learn some
key-in functions that will allow us to
| | 00:30 | quickly select our objects.
| | 00:33 | The first key-in I'd like to look at is all.
| | 00:35 | Let's say I would like to erase
all of the geometry in this drawing.
| | 00:39 | I'm going to come up and launch my
Erase command and at the Select objects
| | 00:42 | prompt, I'm going to type all and hit Enter.
| | 00:46 | This selects everything in my drawing.
| | 00:48 | In fact any command in AutoCAD that
asks us to select objects, we can type all
| | 00:52 | to select everything.
| | 00:53 | Now that I am done selecting objects
I can right-click to finish the command.
| | 00:58 | Let's click Undo to bring the
geometry back and let's zoom in on this
| | 01:02 | southeast corner of the park.
| | 01:05 | Down here I've got some geometry that
represents a couple of tennis courts.
| | 01:09 | Notice this yellow dashed line. This
line shows me the buildable area of my lot,
| | 01:15 | and I cannot build anything south of this line.
| | 01:18 | We can obviously see the tennis
courts are encroaching on the setback.
| | 01:21 | So we'll have to move this geometry, and
in doing so we'll look at another key-in.
| | 01:26 | I'm going to launch my Move command,
and selecting all this geometry with a
| | 01:31 | rectangle or a crossing window is
going to be difficult. Instead I'm going to
| | 01:34 | type wp and hit Enter.
| | 01:38 | Wp stands for Window Polygon.
| | 01:40 | I'm going to click right here to set my
first polygon point and then I'm going
| | 01:45 | to click here, and then I'm going to come down.
| | 01:47 | Now, be careful of the running object snaps.
| | 01:50 | Let me turn those off momentarily.
| | 01:53 | There we go. I'll pick another point
on screen, and I'll pick another one.
| | 01:56 | Notice the type of selection I'm making.
| | 01:59 | Essentially, this is a window
selection but I am not having to conform to
| | 02:02 | a perfect rectangle.
| | 02:03 | Let me click up here.
| | 02:05 | Now that I've surrounded my geometry,
I'm going to right-click and select
| | 02:10 | Enter, and then I will right-click again to
let AutoCAD know I'm done selecting objects.
| | 02:17 | Let's zoom in on the corner and I'm
going to turn my running object snaps back on.
| | 02:22 | Let's pick up the geometry from the
endpoint of the fence and I'm going to
| | 02:26 | place it to the Intersection of the
fence and the setback line, and now
| | 02:33 | my geometry is no longer
encroaching on the setback.
| | 02:36 | Let's try something else.
| | 02:37 | I'm going pan my drawing down and
let's zoom in on the playground area.
| | 02:42 | Let's say I would like to rotate this
concrete boundary around the playground.
| | 02:47 | I'd like to leave some of this equipment alone.
| | 02:49 | I just want to rotate the boundary.
| | 02:50 | I'm going to launch my Rotate command.
| | 02:52 | I'm going to make a crossing window to
select this geometry, and let's make a
| | 02:57 | window to select these two toys,
so they go along for the ride.
| | 03:01 | I'll right-click to finish my selection
and I'd like to rotate this around the
| | 03:05 | center of this circle.
| | 03:06 | Now be careful. I currently have
running object snaps set for Endpoint and
| | 03:10 | Center, so I need to make sure that my
cursor is closest to the center point,
| | 03:15 | and I'm going to rotate this 45 degree.
| | 03:16 | So I'm going to type 45 and hit Enter.
| | 03:20 | Now this is obviously a problem.
| | 03:21 | My concrete is now
encroaching on the swing set area.
| | 03:25 | Let's rotate this geometry back a little bit.
| | 03:28 | To do that, I'm going to hit my
Spacebar to go right back into the Rotate
| | 03:31 | command, and at the Select objects
prompt, I'm going to type p.
| | 03:35 | P stands for Previous and Previous allows us to
reselect our previous selection, and hit Enter.
| | 03:41 | I'm going to right-click
to finish selecting objects.
| | 03:46 | Once again I want to rotate this
around the center of this circle and
| | 03:49 | let's rotate him back about 20 degrees.
| | 03:51 | I'm going to type -20, and hit
Enter, and that looks much better.
| | 03:56 | As you can see the key-in options are
helpful alternative to the selection
| | 03:59 | window, and they allow us to work
outside the box when making our selections.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Refining GeometryCreating fillets| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to learn how
to clean up our intersecting line work.
| | 00:04 | We'll do that by using the Fillet command.
| | 00:06 | Fillet creates nice rounded corners.
| | 00:09 | On my screen, I've got some abstract geometry.
| | 00:11 | We're going to use these Xs to
learn how to Fillet command works.
| | 00:15 | Fillet is located in the Modify panel of
our ribbon, the icon is right here, and
| | 00:20 | when we launch the command,
Fillet essentially wants two objects.
| | 00:25 | I'm going to select my first object and my
second one, and AutoCAD creates a rounded corner.
| | 00:30 | Now I know what you're thinking.
| | 00:31 | That corner doesn't look very round.
| | 00:33 | That's because we neglected to do one thing.
| | 00:36 | We didn't set a radius.
| | 00:38 | Let's click Undo, and we'll do this again.
| | 00:40 | I'm going to launch the Fillet command,
and take a look at my command line.
| | 00:44 | Notice I've got a sub-
option right here of radius.
| | 00:46 | Also notice that I can see that
the current radius is set to 0.
| | 00:50 | That's why we created a sharp corner.
| | 00:52 | I'm going to right-click and select
radius from the menu and we'll set our
| | 00:56 | fillet radius to 25 and hit Enter.
| | 01:00 | Now I'll select my line segment
and my other one to create my fillet.
| | 01:04 | Let's create one more. I'm going hit
the Spacebar to go back into the Fillet
| | 01:08 | command, and notice that
AutoCAD remembers my previous radius.
| | 01:13 | In this case I'd like to show you that
it's important where you select your lines.
| | 01:17 | You want to click on the portion
of the line that you want to keep.
| | 01:20 | In this case I've got the exact same
geometry that I had over here and if I
| | 01:24 | select my line segment down here and
down here, I get a different outcome.
| | 01:28 | Now that we have a working
understanding of the Fillet command, let's try and
| | 01:33 | use it in a practical example.
| | 01:34 | I'm going to backup a little
bit and pan my drawing down.
| | 01:38 | On my screen I've got a mechanical
drawing, this happens to be metric.
| | 01:42 | It was created such that each unit equals 1
millimeter, and I'm obviously working on a
| | 01:46 | skateboard, and at this point I
am rounding corners on the wheels.
| | 01:51 | We can see that this side of the board
is finished let's finish this left side.
| | 01:55 | I'm going to zoom in on my wheel, and I
would like to round these corners with a
| | 01:59 | radius of 8 millimeters.
| | 02:02 | To do that, I'm going to
launch the Fillet command.
| | 02:04 | I'm going to right-click and select Radius,
and let's set this to 8 and hit Enter.
| | 02:09 | I will then select my line and
my other line to create my fillet.
| | 02:14 | Now one of the drawbacks to fillet is
AutoCAD assumes you only want to do one.
| | 02:19 | Let me show you how we can do multiple fillets.
| | 02:21 | I'm going to hit the Spacebar
to go back into the command.
| | 02:24 | AutoCAD remembers my radius.
| | 02:26 | Notice I've got sub option of Multiple.
| | 02:29 | I'm going to or right-click and select
Multiple from the menu, and then I'll
| | 02:33 | click my first object and my second
one and notice AutoCAD keeps me in the
| | 02:37 | command and I will stay in the
command until I hit my Escape key.
| | 02:42 | So I'll finish this up,
and then I'll hit Escape.
| | 02:44 | I'm going to backup a little bit, we'll pan
this down, and we'll take a look at this wheel.
| | 02:49 | Now this wheel was created
using the Rectangle tool.
| | 02:53 | So AutoCAD considers this object to be
a Polyline or a multi-segmented line.
| | 02:58 | Let me hit Escape to deselect this,
and let's fillet this geometry.
| | 03:03 | I'm going to launch the command.
| | 03:06 | Once again AutoCAD remembers my radius.
| | 03:08 | Notice there's a sub-option here of
Polyline I'm going to a right-click and
| | 03:13 | select Polyline from the menu, and
then if I select my Polyline AutoCAD will
| | 03:18 | apply the fillet to all of the corners.
| | 03:20 | Now, I have got one more thing I want to do.
| | 03:23 | Let me zoom in on the truck area here.
| | 03:26 | Notice my geometry needs to
be cleaned up on these corners.
| | 03:29 | Let's zoom in and we'll fix this one first.
| | 03:32 | I can fix this with the Fillet command.
| | 03:34 | Now I don't have to set my radius to 0.
| | 03:37 | Watch this. If I launch
Fillet and select my first object,
| | 03:42 | take a look at the command line.
| | 03:44 | I can select my second object or if I
hold my Shift key when I'm selecting the
| | 03:49 | second object, AutoCAD
will apply a sharp corner.
| | 03:52 | It doesn't matter what my radius is.
| | 03:54 | Knowing that, let me pan this up,
and we'll get this last one.
| | 03:58 | Fillet, I'll select my first object, and
then I'll hold my Shift key, and click
| | 04:03 | the second one to make a sharp corner.
| | 04:06 | Fillet is a tool that gives us more
control over our intersecting line work,
| | 04:11 | whether our design requires a rounded
corner, or even a sharp corner, we can
| | 04:14 | always use the Fillet command.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating chamfers| 00:00 | Sometimes our design may
require a beveled or angular corner.
| | 00:04 | In cases like this we can
use AutoCAD's Chamfer command.
| | 00:08 | Chamfer works the exact same way as Fillet,
except that it results in a beveled corner.
| | 00:13 | On my screen I've got an architectural example.
| | 00:15 | This is a drawing of an employee
lunchroom, and we're going to use the Chamfer
| | 00:19 | command to make some
modifications to this geometry.
| | 00:21 | I'm going to start out by
zooming in on these refrigerators.
| | 00:26 | Notice the way these guys are situated,
my countertop is restricting the amount
| | 00:31 | that I can open the refrigerator doors.
| | 00:33 | Worse yet, since this countertop has a
sharp corner I run the risk of denting
| | 00:37 | the door if I open it too far.
| | 00:40 | To fix this I'm going to chamfer this corner.
| | 00:43 | Now the Chamfer command is located
in the Modify panel of our ribbon.
| | 00:46 | I'm going to click the flyout right
next to Fillet and notice that Fillet and
| | 00:51 | Chamfer share the same menu.
| | 00:53 | In fact whichever command we use last
becomes the default icon right here.
| | 00:58 | Now, Chamfer works just like Fillet.
| | 01:00 | AutoCAD wants me to pick two lines.
| | 01:02 | Before I do that I need to enter some values.
| | 01:05 | There are two ways to
create a Chamfer in AutoCAD.
| | 01:08 | There is the Distance
method and the Angle method.
| | 01:10 | We're going to look at Angle first.
| | 01:12 | I'm going to right-click and select
Angle from the menu, and then for my first
| | 01:17 | chamfer length, I'm going to type 3
inches and hit Enter, and then for my
| | 01:22 | chamfer angle, I'm going to type
45 for 45 degrees and hit Enter.
| | 01:27 | Now I can select my two lines.
| | 01:29 | Here's how it works.
| | 01:31 | When I select my first line AutoCAD is
going to measure back those 3 inches from
| | 01:36 | the corner, and when I select my
second line AutoCAD is going to rotate 45
| | 01:41 | degrees from that point to create the chamfer.
| | 01:44 | Let's go ahead and chamfer the other
side. I'm going to hit the Spacebar to go
| | 01:48 | back into the chamfer command.
| | 01:50 | Notice AutoCAD remembers my previous
settings, so I can select this line and
| | 01:55 | this one to create the other chamfer.
| | 01:58 | Let's look at something else.
| | 01:59 | I'm going to pan my drawing over.
| | 02:02 | Notice I've got a very deep
countertop on either side of my sinks.
| | 02:07 | In fact, if we look at this dimension
we can see the difference is 8 inches.
| | 02:11 | I would like to create a chamfer or a
taper on this countertop such that my
| | 02:15 | transition isn't quite so abrupt.
| | 02:17 | Let's use the Chamfer command again
and this time we're going to look at
| | 02:20 | the Distance method.
| | 02:21 | I'm going to launch the command
and then we'll right-click and select
| | 02:26 | Distance from the menu.
| | 02:28 | For my first chamfer distance, I'm going
to type 8 inches and hit Enter and for
| | 02:33 | my second chamfer distance I'm
going to type 12 inches and hit Enter.
| | 02:38 | Once again now I can select my lines.
| | 02:40 | Here's how it works.
| | 02:42 | When I select my first line, AutoCAD is
going to measure back from the corner,
| | 02:46 | my first distance, which was 8 inches,
and then when I select my second line,
| | 02:50 | AutoCAD is going to measure back from
the corner of my second distance, which
| | 02:53 | was 12 inches, and then it's going to
use those measurements to create the
| | 02:57 | Chamfer, and that is a much nicer
transition than what we had before.
| | 03:02 | Let's take care of the other side.
| | 03:03 | Once again I'm going to hit the
Spacebar to go back into Chamfer.
| | 03:06 | AutoCAD remembers my distances.
| | 03:08 | So I will select this line and
this one to create my Chamfer.
| | 03:14 | The Chamfer command gives us yet
another choice when dealing with
| | 03:16 | intersecting geometry.
| | 03:18 | If a sharp or rounded corner isn't
acceptable for our design, we can also use
| | 03:22 | the Chamfer command to create beveled corners.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Array command to create copies in a rotated pattern| 00:00 | Creating manual copies of our
entities can be tedious, especially if the
| | 00:04 | copies also need to be rotated.
| | 00:06 | In this lesson, we're going to learn
how to use the Array command to copy our
| | 00:09 | geometry into a rotational pattern.
| | 00:12 | Now, on my screen I've got a simple
drawing consisting of a roundtable and a chair.
| | 00:17 | Let's say I would like to create some copies
of this chair around the outside of the table.
| | 00:21 | Well if I was to do this
manually, it would be very tedious.
| | 00:24 | I mean I could copy the chair to each
location, but then I would also have to
| | 00:28 | come back and rotate each one.
| | 00:30 | Instead I'm going to use the Array
command to create my copies in a single step.
| | 00:35 | Array is located right up here in
the Modify panel of our ribbon.
| | 00:38 | When I launched the command it brings up the
Array dialog box where I can build my Array.
| | 00:44 | Notice there are two Array types,
the Rectangular and the Polar Array.
| | 00:48 | We are going to be looking at the Polar Array.
| | 00:51 | This will create rotated copies.
| | 00:54 | Let's come over and click the Select
Objects button, and I can select the object
| | 00:57 | that I'd like to copy.
| | 00:58 | In this case I'll grab
the chair and right-click.
| | 01:01 | Now a center point.
| | 01:02 | At what point that I
like copy this chair around?
| | 01:05 | I'm going to click the Pick Center Point
button, and I'll grab the center of my table.
| | 01:11 | Now, Total number of items, how many
chairs do I want when I'm finished?
| | 01:15 | Right now this is set to 4.
| | 01:16 | I'm going to leave that as it is and
Angle to fill. Currently this is 360,
| | 01:22 | meaning I am making my copies
around a full 360 degree circle.
| | 01:26 | Take a look at the right side of the dialog box.
| | 01:28 | Over here I can see a rough preview
of what my Array is going to look like.
| | 01:33 | If I make a change, for instance
we'll change this to 90 degree, and
| | 01:37 | I'll click in the other field,
| | 01:40 | notice my preview shows four
objects copied around to 90-degree angle.
| | 01:44 | Let's set this back to 360,
and I'll click Preview.
| | 01:49 | Now this looks pretty good.
| | 01:51 | Take a look at my command line.
| | 01:52 | Notice I'm in Preview mode.
| | 01:54 | That means if I like the Array
I can right-click to accept it.
| | 01:58 | If I'd like to make a change I can hit
the Escape key on my keyboard to bring
| | 02:02 | back the dialog box.
| | 02:04 | Let's make a change.
| | 02:04 | I'm going to set this to 6
chairs and click Preview.
| | 02:09 | That's not too bad.
| | 02:10 | I think we can fit one more.
| | 02:11 | I'm going to hit Escape again and we'll
change this to 7 and I'll click Preview.
| | 02:17 | That looks pretty good.
| | 02:18 | When I'm happy with my Array I can right-click.
| | 02:21 | I am sure you'll agree that making
rotated copies of this way is much faster
| | 02:25 | than doing it manually.
| | 02:27 | Now that we understand the workflow
behind the Polar Array, let's try and use
| | 02:31 | this tool in another example.
| | 02:32 | I'm going to pan my drawing over,
and on my screen I've got a mechanical drawing.
| | 02:39 | On the right side I've got a
finished gear, and on the left side I have
| | 02:43 | got some unfinished line work.
| | 02:44 | I've drawn just enough to create the gear.
| | 02:47 | I can take this geometry and finish the
drawing using the Polar Array command.
| | 02:51 | Let's start with this circle.
| | 02:52 | I'm going to launch Array, I'm going
to click Select objects and we will grab
| | 02:58 | the circle and right-click.
| | 03:00 | Let's click the Pick Center point button,
and I would like to create my copies
| | 03:05 | around the center of this circle.
| | 03:08 | I'll move the dialog box over.
| | 03:10 | Looks like I want six items when I'm
done so I'll set this to 6.
| | 03:15 | 360 degree arc is fine. Let's click Preview.
| | 03:19 | That looks good. I will
right-click to accept the Array.
| | 03:22 | Now, let's do the teeth.
| | 03:24 | Notice I have created the
geometry for a single tooth and gap.
| | 03:28 | Let's copy this geometry
around to finish the gear.
| | 03:31 | Once again I'll launch the Array
command, we'll click Select objects, and I'm
| | 03:35 | going to make a window around
this geometry and right-click.
| | 03:38 | Center point, AutoCAD is remembering
the previous center point so that's fine.
| | 03:42 | Now Total number of items, let me slide
this over, I can see that I need 30 teeth.
| | 03:48 | So I'll set this to 30.
| | 03:51 | We'll click Preview.
| | 03:52 | That's exactly what I want.
| | 03:53 | I will right-click to accept my Polar Array.
| | 03:56 | Keep your eyes open for objects
that fall into a rotational pattern.
| | 04:00 | By creating a Polar Array, you can
easily avoid doing a bunch of manual copying.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Array command to create copies in a rectangular pattern| 00:00 | The Array command can also be used
to create copies that are organized
| | 00:04 | into columns and rows.
| | 00:05 | In this lesson we are going to
learn how to create a Rectangular array.
| | 00:10 | On my screen, I've got an architectural example.
| | 00:12 | This is a drawing of a hotel meeting room.
| | 00:14 | As you can see the room is essentially empty.
| | 00:17 | I do have a table over here with two
chairs for the presenters and over here
| | 00:22 | I've got a small table and
three chairs for the audience.
| | 00:25 | Now, I would like to fill this room
with tables and chairs and since my copies
| | 00:30 | are to be arranged into rows and
columns, this is a perfect opportunity to
| | 00:34 | create a rectangular array.
| | 00:36 | The Array command is located in
the Modify panel of our ribbon.
| | 00:41 | When I launched the tool it brings up
the Array dialog box. Notice there are two
| | 00:45 | different Array types, Rectangular and Polar.
| | 00:48 | We're going to create a Rectangular
Array, since our copies will fall into a
| | 00:53 | rectangular pattern.
| | 00:54 | I'm going to come down and click
Select objects button and I'll select the
| | 00:58 | objects I'd like to copy.
| | 00:59 | I'm going to create a crossing window
and grab this table and the three chairs
| | 01:05 | and I'll right-click.
| | 01:06 | Now how many rows do I want?
| | 01:09 | Take a look at the icon.
| | 01:10 | Rows run horizontally on our screen.
| | 01:12 | I'm going to move this dialog box over.
| | 01:15 | I believe I can fit three rows.
| | 01:17 | So we'll set this to 3 and
I'll click in the Column field.
| | 01:21 | Take a look at my preview over on
the right side of the dialog box.
| | 01:25 | This gives me a rough idea of
what my Array is going to look like.
| | 01:29 | For right now I'm going to stick with 4 Columns.
| | 01:31 | Let's come down and look
at Row and Column offset.
| | 01:34 | First of all, Row offset.
| | 01:37 | I would like my tables to meet edge to edge.
| | 01:40 | So you would think the Row offset
would be 0. Notice that's not the case.
| | 01:46 | What this value essentially means is
how far do you want to copy this object up
| | 01:51 | to create your next row?
| | 01:52 | Since my table is 6 feet 9 inches, I am
going to set my Row offset to 6 feet 9 inches,
| | 01:59 | and then my tables
will touch edge to edge.
| | 02:02 | Now, Column offset, how far do I want to copy
this geometry over to create my next column?
| | 02:07 | Well I can see the distance from the
front edge of the table to the back of
| | 02:11 | the chairs is 3 feet.
| | 02:13 | Maybe I'd like 3 feet of walking space
between the columns so I'm going to set
| | 02:18 | my Column Offset to 6 feet.
| | 02:21 | Let's come down to click Preview.
| | 02:23 | Now that doesn't look too bad.
Take a look at my command line.
| | 02:26 | Notice I'm in Preview mode right now.
| | 02:28 | If I like the Array the way it is,
I can right-click to accept it.
| | 02:32 | If I like to make some changes, I can
hit the Escape key on my keyboard to bring
| | 02:37 | back the dialog box.
| | 02:38 | I'm going to hit the Escape key,
because I would like to add one more column.
| | 02:43 | Let's change this to 5 and I'll
click Preview again. There we go.
| | 02:48 | That looks perfect.
| | 02:49 | I'm happy with the Array I'm
going to right-click to accept it.
| | 02:53 | As you can see the Array command is yet
another way to create copies of your geometry.
| | 02:57 | It's the perfect tool to use when your
copies are arranged in a predefined pattern.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating mirrored copies of geometry| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to learn
how to get twice as much work done in half
| | 00:03 | the time by using the Mirror command.
| | 00:06 | Mirror allows us to create
symmetrical copies of our geometry.
| | 00:10 | If you look at my screen, you can
see I've got some simple line work.
| | 00:12 | We're going to use more to use this
geometry to learn how the Mirror command works.
| | 00:17 | What I have is a polyline that
represents one half of a wine glass and since
| | 00:22 | this wine glass is symmetrical,
I don't have to draw the other side.
| | 00:26 | Instead, I can finish this
drawing by creating a mirrored copy.
| | 00:30 | Now, what does AutoCAD need
to create a mirrored copy?
| | 00:33 | Well, it needs an entity and it needs a
line segment that defines our mirror line.
| | 00:38 | Let's try it. I'm going to launch the Mirror
command right here in the Modify panel.
| | 00:43 | Then I will select the object I'd
like to copy and right-click and then
| | 00:47 | I'll click one endpoint of my mirror line and
I'll come down and click the other endpoint.
| | 00:52 | Finally, do I want to erase my source object?
| | 00:55 | I don't have to keep it if I don't want to.
| | 00:57 | In this case, I would like to keep it, so I'm
going to right-click and select No to the erase.
| | 01:04 | Now that we understand the workflow
behind the Mirror command, let's try and use
| | 01:08 | this tool in a practical example.
| | 01:09 | I'm going to pan my drawing over and
on my screen I've got some unfinished
| | 01:14 | geometry that represents a skateboard.
| | 01:17 | Let's see if we can finish this
drawing using the Mirror command.
| | 01:20 | I would like to start by
mirroring this wheel to the other side.
| | 01:24 | So I'm going to create a line segment down
the middle of my board to define my mirror line.
| | 01:30 | Let's launch the Line command and I'm
going to create my line from the Midpoint
| | 01:35 | of this end of the board
to the Midpoint of this end.
| | 01:39 | Then I'll launch the Mirror command and
I'm going to select my geometry using a
| | 01:45 | window and right-click and then I'll
grab this endpoint of my mirror line and
| | 01:51 | I'll grab this endpoint.
| | 01:53 | Finally, I'll right-click
and select No to the erase.
| | 01:56 | All right, I don't need my mirror line anymore.
| | 01:58 | Let's click the Erase icon and we'll
select this guy and get rid of him, and
| | 02:03 | you know what, we don't actually have to
have a physical line segment to create a
| | 02:07 | mirrored copy. Instead all
we need are the object snaps.
| | 02:11 | Let's try and mirror this hardware to
the other side of the board and this time
| | 02:15 | we'll do it without having a physical line.
| | 02:18 | Once again, I'm going to launch the
Mirror command and I'm going to create a
| | 02:21 | window around all of this
hardware and right-click.
| | 02:25 | Now the first point of my mirror
line is going to be the Midpoint on this
| | 02:30 | side of the board and my other mirror line
point is going to be the Midpoint of the side.
| | 02:36 | And then I'll right-click and select No.
| | 02:39 | Remember that every time you're working
with symmetrical geometry, you've got an
| | 02:42 | opportunity to use the Mirror command
and if you use it properly you'll be
| | 02:46 | making AutoCAD do half of your work.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Stretching elements| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're going to learn
how to quickly revise our geometry.
| | 00:04 | We'll do that by using the Stretch command.
| | 00:06 | Stretch allows us to press or
pull parts of our line work.
| | 00:10 | If you look at my screen, you can
see I've got a small part and this guy
| | 00:13 | measures 6 inches long.
| | 00:16 | Let's say I would like to extend or
stretch these arms another 6 inches to the right.
| | 00:22 | To do that, I'm going to
launch the Stretch command.
| | 00:24 | Stretch is located right
here in the Modify panel.
| | 00:28 | Now that I've launched the tool,
take a look at my command line.
| | 00:31 | Notice AutoCAD is requiring us to make
our selection using a crossing window.
| | 00:36 | So I'm going to click right
here and here is the trick.
| | 00:40 | You only want to include the endpoints
that you want to move in your selection.
| | 00:44 | So I'm going to click right here to
finish my window and then I'll right-click.
| | 00:49 | Let's pick the geometry up from this
endpoint and notice as I move my cursor
| | 00:53 | I am stretching the endpoints
that fell within my selection.
| | 00:56 | Now this isn't very accurate.
| | 00:59 | Let's come down and turn on the
Ortho and I'll pull this to the right and
| | 01:03 | types 6 inches, Enter.
| | 01:06 | Let's make one more change.
| | 01:07 | This time, I would like to stretch
this arm 4 inches back to the left.
| | 01:12 | Once again, I'll launch the Stretch command.
| | 01:14 | I will select the endpoints
I'd like to move and right-click.
| | 01:19 | I will pick the geometry up from here and I
will pull back to the left and types 4 inches.
| | 01:25 | Now be careful of your running
object snaps. Even though I've entered 4 inches,
| | 01:30 | because of the location of
my cursor AutoCAD is looking at the
| | 01:34 | endpoint of that line.
| | 01:36 | So if I hit Enter, absolutely nothing
happens. Instead as I pull to the left,
| | 01:41 | I'm going to move my cursor up high enough
so the object snap doesn't get in my way.
| | 01:46 | Now I'll type 4 inches and hit
Enter and it works just fine.
| | 01:51 | Always be mindful of your running object snaps.
| | 01:53 | Now that we understand the workflow
behind the Stretch command, let's try and
| | 01:57 | use this tool in a practical example.
| | 01:59 | I'm going to pan my drawing over and
let's assume I'm a furniture designer and
| | 02:06 | I'm working on a small coffee table.
| | 02:08 | I'd like to make some changes to this geometry.
| | 02:11 | First of all, I can see
this table is 19 inches tall.
| | 02:14 | Let's make the table a little bit shorter.
| | 02:16 | To do that, I'm going to launch the
Stretch command and I'm going to make a
| | 02:20 | crossing selection around
the bottom of the table.
| | 02:24 | I'll then right-click and I'll
grab the leg and I'll pull up.
| | 02:28 | I'm being mindful of my object snaps end
let's make this table 3 inches shorter.
| | 02:33 | I want to make another change.
| | 02:35 | Maybe I'd like to move this edge
beneath the drawer one inch down.
| | 02:39 | I'm going to hit my
Spacebar to go back into Stretch.
| | 02:42 | I'm going to make a crossing
window around these endpoints.
| | 02:45 | I'll then select this endpoint
and I'll pull down and type 1 inch.
| | 02:52 | Finally, I'd like to make this
table 6 inches shorter overall.
| | 02:56 | I wish we could do it all from one
side, but unfortunately we can't do a
| | 02:59 | symmetrical stretch.
| | 03:01 | So I'm going to have to take
3 inches off of either side.
| | 03:04 | Let's hit the Spacebar to
go back into the command.
| | 03:07 | I'm going to make my crossing
selection and when I have to pick up my
| | 03:11 | geometry, I don't have to use
a point right on the object.
| | 03:15 | I can pick a point in space if
I like and pull to the right.
| | 03:18 | In fact, this is actually
the method I prefer to use.
| | 03:21 | This way my running object
snaps can't get in the way.
| | 03:24 | Let's type 3 inches and
finally I'm going to hit my Spacebar.
| | 03:28 | I will select this side of
the part and right-click.
| | 03:31 | I'm going to pick it up from a point
right down here and pull to the left and
| | 03:35 | we'll type 3 inches.
| | 03:37 | As you can see, by using the Stretch
command you can make significant changes to
| | 03:41 | your geometry in absolutely no time.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Scaling elements| 00:00 | If you've ever used a copy machine to
make enlargements or reductions of images,
| | 00:04 | you are already familiar
with the concept of scale.
| | 00:07 | Just like we can make our images larger
or smaller using a copy machine, we can
| | 00:11 | make our geometry larger or
smaller by using the Scale command.
| | 00:14 | Now on my screen, I've got a
drawing of a handheld video game.
| | 00:18 | Let' say there has been a design
change that requires us to make our
| | 00:21 | thumb controls smaller.
| | 00:24 | To resize this geometry, I'm
going to use the Scale command.
| | 00:28 | Let's zoom in a little bit and Scale is
located right here in the Modify panel.
| | 00:34 | After I'll launch the tool, I will
select the objects I'd like to resize and
| | 00:39 | then I'll right-click.
| | 00:40 | Now Auto CAD wants a basic point. That
is the point about which my part is going
| | 00:45 | to get larger or smaller.
| | 00:48 | I'm going to select the center of the
circle and notice as I drag my cursor
| | 00:51 | I'm getting the rubber band effect.
| | 00:54 | I could free pick a point on screen to
change the size of my part, but instead
| | 00:58 | I'm going to use a value.
| | 01:00 | Notice the default value is 1.
| | 01:01 | 1 represents no change.
| | 01:03 | It's a one-to-one scale.
| | 01:06 | Let's say I'd like to make
this thumb control half as big.
| | 01:08 | I'm going to type .5 and hit Enter.
| | 01:12 | That's obviously too small.
| | 01:13 | Let's scale it up a little bit.
| | 01:15 | I'm going to launch the Scale command
and at the Select Objects prompt,
| | 01:19 | I'm going to type p and hit
Enter to reselect my geometry.
| | 01:23 | Let's right-click to finish our
selection and this time I would like to scale my
| | 01:27 | geometry from the Midpoint of this side.
| | 01:32 | This way as my part gets larger,
| | 01:34 | it will always maintain the
same distance to that left edge.
| | 01:37 | I'm going to make this guy two and a
half times larger than its current size.
| | 01:41 | So I'm going to type 2.5 and hit Enter.
| | 01:46 | This is an example of using the
Scale command for a design change.
| | 01:50 | Scale also comes in handy when we
have trouble with our drawing units.
| | 01:54 | Let's look at an example.
| | 01:55 | I'm going to close this
drawing and I'm not going to save.
| | 01:59 | Let's come up and click the Open
icon and we're going to look inside the
| | 02:03 | exercise files folder.
| | 02:05 | We'll go into the Chapter_09 directory and I
would like to open up both of these drawings.
| | 02:10 | I'm going to select the ball_field and
then I'm going to hold my Shift key and
| | 02:13 | select a baseball_bat and we'll click Open.
| | 02:17 | This opens both drawings in my interface.
| | 02:19 | Now I would like to see these
guys side by side of my screen.
| | 02:22 | So I'm going to go to the View tab on
my ribbon and then we'll come down to the
| | 02:26 | Windows panel and select Tile Vertically.
| | 02:28 | All right, let's clean up the view a little bit.
| | 02:31 | Currently, my left window is active so
I'm going to zoom out a little bit and
| | 02:35 | we'll center this guy.
| | 02:36 | And then I will click in this window to
put the focus on that one and I'll zoom
| | 02:40 | out a little bit and center.
| | 02:43 | The drawing of the left represents a
standard little league baseball field and
| | 02:47 | this geometry was created such
that each unit equals 1 foot.
| | 02:52 | I can see that by launching the
Units command. We can see it right here.
| | 02:59 | Now the drawing on the right was
created such that each unit equals 1 inch.
| | 03:05 | Once again, we'll verify that.
| | 03:11 | I'm going to select the baseball bat
and then I will click and hold on this
| | 03:15 | highlighted line and then we'll drag
this geometry into the other drawing.
| | 03:20 | Let's zoom in and notice my problem.
| | 03:23 | You see AutoCAD only sees units.
| | 03:26 | In this drawing, the bat was 32.
| | 03:28 | Well, that 32 means 32 inches.
| | 03:30 | When the bat came over, it's still 32
but in this drawing it's 32 feet, which is
| | 03:35 | 12 times larger than it needs to be.
| | 03:38 | To correct this, I'm going
to use the Scale command.
| | 03:41 | Let's go back to the Home tab. I'm
going to launch Scale and I'll select my
| | 03:45 | bat and right-click.
| | 03:46 | I'm going to scale it from the endpoint
down here, any point is fine and from my
| | 03:51 | scale factor I'm going to
type 1/12 and hit Enter.
| | 03:57 | Let's use the Move command
and we'll select the bat.
| | 04:00 | We'll pick it up from any object snap
and we'll place it right down here next to
| | 04:04 | home plate and we can see this guy is
now appropriately sized for this drawing.
| | 04:09 | Whether we need to resize our
entities as part of the design change or to
| | 04:13 | correct a difference in drawing units,
we can accurately make our entities
| | 04:16 | larger or smaller by using the Scale command.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Leveraging grips| 00:00 | Grips are probably the most
versatile tool in AutoCAD.
| | 00:03 | We can use them to make
quick revisions to our geometry.
| | 00:06 | In fact, we can use grips to accomplish
nearly every modification command we've
| | 00:10 | talked about so far.
| | 00:12 | Let's take a look at how they work.
| | 00:13 | On my screen, I've got a drawing of a
handheld video game and off to the side
| | 00:17 | I've got some scrap geometry.
| | 00:19 | We are to use this line work
to explore the concept of grips.
| | 00:23 | I am going to start by selecting this
line and notice these little blue squares.
| | 00:28 | These guys are called grips
and they act a lot like handles.
| | 00:31 | Now this feature should be on by default.
| | 00:34 | In the event you select your line and
you don't see these grips, let me show you
| | 00:37 | where you can go to turn the feature back on.
| | 00:40 | First of all I am going to hit Escape
to deselect this line and then I'm going
| | 00:44 | to right-click in the middle of the
screen and we'll come down to Options and if
| | 00:48 | we go to the Selection tab, the
Enable grips setting is right here.
| | 00:53 | You want to make sure
there's a check in that box.
| | 00:56 | Let's click OK and as long as we're
talking about settings, let's also make sure
| | 01:01 | that our Dynamic Input is turned on.
| | 01:04 | Dynamic Input will give us
additional functionality for the grips.
| | 01:07 | I am going to reselect this line and watch this.
| | 01:11 | If I place my cursor over this end, I
can use this grip to query my geometry.
| | 01:16 | Notice I can see my line length and
the angle at which the line was drawn.
| | 01:20 | Let's select this circle.
| | 01:22 | I will hover over this grip.
| | 01:24 | AutoCAD will tell me the radius.
| | 01:26 | I am going to select this arc and
I'll hover over this grip. I can see the
| | 01:31 | radius of my arc and the arc's concluded angle.
| | 01:34 | So we can use grips to find out
geometric information about our line work.
| | 01:39 | To clear these grips and deselect
the entities, I am going to hit the
| | 01:42 | Escape key on my keyboard.
| | 01:44 | Let's look at how we can use
grips to change our geometry.
| | 01:47 | Once again, I am going to select this
line and I am going to place my cursor
| | 01:51 | over this grip and click.
| | 01:53 | This makes the grip hot and
notice I have got some fields.
| | 01:57 | There are actually four fields here.
| | 01:59 | The first one represents the amount of
change I'd like to make to my line length.
| | 02:04 | If I hit my Tab key, this field will let
me change the total length of the line.
| | 02:10 | Let me hit Tab again.
| | 02:11 | This field is a little bit hidden but
it represents the total angle of the line.
| | 02:16 | Let me hit Tab again.
| | 02:18 | This guy represents the amount of
change I'd like to make to the angle.
| | 02:22 | Let's make this line segment two units long.
| | 02:24 | I am going to hit my Tab key until I get to the
total length field. I will type 2 and hit Enter.
| | 02:31 | If I hover over this grip, I
can see it's now two units long.
| | 02:34 | I want to change one more thing.
| | 02:36 | Let's set this guy to a zero degree angle.
| | 02:38 | I am going to select my grip, I am
going to hit Tab, Tab, until I get to the
| | 02:43 | total angle, I will set this to 0 and hit Enter.
| | 02:47 | Let's make a change to our circle.
| | 02:48 | I will select this guy, I will then click to
select this grip and notice I have two fields.
| | 02:55 | One represents the total length of the
radius and the other one represents the
| | 02:59 | amount I'd like to change my radius.
| | 03:02 | In this case, let's change the
Radius to 1.25 and I'll hit Enter.
| | 03:07 | Once again, I will select the grip, and
I am going to hit Tab and then I'm going
| | 03:11 | to pull in this direction and I would
like to change the radius to 0.25, Enter.
| | 03:18 | Notice this guy now has a radius of one.
| | 03:21 | Finally we'll make a change to the arc.
| | 03:23 | I will select it and if we want to
make numeric changes to an arc, we have to
| | 03:27 | use the triangular grips.
| | 03:30 | Let me click right here.
Notice I can change the radius.
| | 03:33 | I am going to change this to 1.25 and hit Enter.
| | 03:38 | If I click one of these end triangles,
I can change the start or end angle of
| | 03:43 | my arc, or I can free pick a point
on screen to adjust my arc length.
| | 03:48 | Once again I can deselect these by
hitting the Escape key on my keyboard.
| | 03:52 | Now there are even more changes we
can make to our geometry using grips.
| | 03:56 | Let's look at a couple more.
| | 03:57 | I am going to select line and then
I'll select this grip and make it hot.
| | 04:03 | Then I'll right-click and
take a look at the menu.
| | 04:06 | Notice that I can Move, Mirror,
Rotate, Scale, or Stretch this geometry.
| | 04:10 | I am going to select Move. Notice I am
moving this line and I am holding it from
| | 04:15 | the location of the grip.
| | 04:17 | If I right-click, I can select Rotate.
| | 04:19 | I am now rotating the line around that grip.
| | 04:21 | Let me right-click again and select Scale,
I am now scaling this line based on that grip.
| | 04:28 | Take some time and explore some of the other
modification settings available in this menu.
| | 04:33 | Before we leave, I am going to rotate this line.
| | 04:35 | I am going to select Rotate, and we will
rotate him 10 degrees and I'll hit Enter.
| | 04:40 | Now that we have a working knowledge
of grips, let's try and use them in
| | 04:43 | a practical example.
| | 04:45 | Let's take a look at this
handheld game over to the left.
| | 04:49 | Maybe I would like to change its screen size.
| | 04:52 | Let's select this geometry and I'll
hover over this grip and I can see the
| | 04:56 | screen currently measures 1.7
inches wide by 1.6 inches tall.
| | 05:02 | Let's make this screen 1.75 inches tall.
| | 05:06 | I can do that by selecting this grip
and then I will hit my Tab key until I get
| | 05:10 | the total length of the vertical
line and we'll type 1.75 and hit Enter.
| | 05:17 | That takes care of one side. I will
then select to this grip and I'll hit my
| | 05:21 | Tab key until I get the overall length
of the other vertical line, and I will
| | 05:26 | type 1.75 and hit Enter and I can
see that we've successfully changed the
| | 05:31 | geometry of our screen.
| | 05:33 | Let's make one more change.
| | 05:34 | I am going to hit Escape
to deselect this line work.
| | 05:37 | Maybe I'd like to move this button a
quarter of an inch closer to the screen.
| | 05:42 | To do that, I am going to zoom in little bit.
| | 05:44 | I am going to make a
window and select this geometry.
| | 05:47 | I will then select the grip and right-click.
| | 05:50 | We'll select Move from the menu, and
this won't be very accurate, so I am going
| | 05:56 | to lock my Ortho, and then I will pull
straight up and type 0.25 and hit Enter.
| | 06:02 | Using grips can be one of the fastest
ways to make changes to your geometry.
| | 06:06 | In fact, grips can do much
more than what we've seen here.
| | 06:10 | If you know how to use these little
blue handles, you are well on your way to
| | 06:13 | understanding future concepts,
like dynamic blocks, or 3-D modeling.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploding elements| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to
learn how to explode our geometry.
| | 00:03 | Now when you think of the word
explode, you might expect to see something
| | 00:06 | spectacular happening on the screen.
| | 00:08 | I am afraid that's not the case.
| | 00:10 | What exploding does is convert
our compound objects back into their
| | 00:14 | individual components.
| | 00:15 | Let's take a look at how it works.
| | 00:17 | On my screen, I've got some simple shapes.
| | 00:20 | I created this geometry
using the Rectangle command.
| | 00:23 | I created this pentagon using the
Polygon command and I've also created a
| | 00:28 | circle and some hatch.
| | 00:29 | Now if I select this geometry, notice
AutoCAD treats it as a single object and
| | 00:34 | even though I used the
Rectangle command to make it,
| | 00:37 | if I come over my Property Changer,
I can see AutoCAD is viewing this object as
| | 00:41 | a polyline or a multi-segmented line.
| | 00:44 | Let's hit Escape to deselect and
I am going to select to this polygon.
| | 00:48 | Notice it's also treated as a single shape
and once again AutoCAD views this as a polyline.
| | 00:54 | Finally let's take a look at this hatch pattern.
| | 00:56 | Even though it looks like we have a
lot of line work here, if I select this,
| | 01:00 | AutoCAD is treating all of
this hatch as a single object.
| | 01:03 | Let's try and explode this geometry.
| | 01:06 | To do that, I am going to
use the Explode command.
| | 01:08 | The icon is located right
here in the Modify panel.
| | 01:11 | I will then select to the objects I'd
like to explode and right-click and when I do,
| | 01:18 | if I select these objects, you can
see that they've been reduced to their
| | 01:22 | individual components.
| | 01:24 | These entities are now simple lines.
| | 01:26 | I am going to hit Escape again to deselect
this geometry and let's explode our hatch.
| | 01:32 | I will launch the Explode command.
| | 01:35 | We'll select the hatch and right-click.
| | 01:37 | Now let me say, you never want to
explode hatch. Because if you do, it reverts to
| | 01:42 | individual line segments and you will
always have more control over your hatch
| | 01:47 | if it's still considered a hatch object.
| | 01:49 | Now you may be wondering when you
would ever want to explode your geometry.
| | 01:52 | Well, let's pan our drawing over
and we'll try and use this command in
| | 01:58 | a practical example.
| | 01:59 | One my screen, I have got a
drawing of a standard light switch cover.
| | 02:03 | Let's see if we can reproduce this geometry.
| | 02:05 | I am going to start out by creating a
rectangle and then I'll pick right here
| | 02:09 | for my first corner, I'm going to right
-click and select dimensions and I can
| | 02:13 | see the length of my rectangle is going
to be 2.6 and I can see the width of my
| | 02:20 | rectangle is going to be 4.5.
| | 02:24 | Finally, I'll move my cursor over
here and click to set my opposite corner.
| | 02:29 | Now let's reproduce this centerline.
| | 02:30 | I am going to launch the Line command
and I am going to create a line from the
| | 02:36 | midpoint of the top, to the
midpoint of the bottom of bottom.
| | 02:42 | Let's take a look at this
rectangular shaped hole.
| | 02:45 | I can see that it has a width of 0.4.
| | 02:48 | Let's offset our centerline
half the distance either way.
| | 02:51 | I'm going to launch Offset and my
offset distance is going to be 0.2, Enter.
| | 02:59 | I will select this line
and offset in this direction.
| | 03:01 | I will select the line again and we'll
offset in this direction and when I'm
| | 03:05 | finished, I'll hit Escape.
| | 03:07 | Now to get the top edge of this hole, I'm
going to offset the top edge of my part down 1.75.
| | 03:14 | Here is the problem.
| | 03:15 | If I attempt to offset this edge, I'm going
to end up offsetting the entire rectangle.
| | 03:20 | Instead, let me deselect this.
| | 03:23 | I'm going to explode the
rectangle and now I can offset each of the
| | 03:29 | lines individually.
| | 03:30 | I am going to launch the Offset command again.
| | 03:32 | I am going to type 1.75.
| | 03:36 | I'll offset this line down.
| | 03:38 | I am going to select Offset again, and I am
going to type in a distance of one and hit Enter.
| | 03:44 | We'll offset this down to get the bottom
edge and when I am finished, I am going
| | 03:47 | to hit Escape, and we'll clean up
our geometry using the Trim command.
| | 03:52 | For cutting objects I'm going to click
right here and make a crossing window
| | 03:56 | around all of this geometry, and a
right-click and I'll use a crossing window
| | 04:00 | to remove these edges and these edges and
then I'll remove these four lines individually.
| | 04:08 | When I am finished, I'll hit Escape.
| | 04:10 | Finally let's find the centers of these circles.
| | 04:13 | Once again I am going to offset the top-
down and bottom-up to find those locations.
| | 04:18 | Let's launch Offset and my previous
distance is good so I am going to hit
| | 04:22 | Enter to except that.
| | 04:24 | I would like to offset the top-edge down.
| | 04:26 | Once again that would not be
possible if we didn't explode the rectangle.
| | 04:30 | Let's grab this bottom edge and
we'll offset it up and I'll hit Escape.
| | 04:34 | Finally we will create our circles.
| | 04:36 | I am going to create my circle from the
intersection here and it has a radius of 0.13.
| | 04:42 | I am going to hit my
Spacebar to back into circle.
| | 04:46 | I am going to create another one at the
intersection here, and then I will hit
| | 04:50 | Enter to except the previous radius.
| | 04:53 | Finally we will clean up after ourselves.
| | 04:54 | I am going to launch the Erase command.
| | 04:56 | I am going to create a crossing window
and select all of this geometry, and then
| | 05:01 | I am going to hold my Shift key and
make a window around the stuff I'd like to
| | 05:04 | deselect, and then I will right-click.
| | 05:07 | If the time comes when you want to
convert an object back to its individual parts,
| | 05:11 | use the Explode command.
| | 05:12 | While it may not be spectacular to watch,
it is the best tool to use for the job.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Joining elements together| 00:00 | Sometimes it can be easier to work with
your line work if you join it together.
| | 00:04 | In this lesson, we are going
to look at the Pedit command.
| | 00:07 | Pedit allows us to join
entities into a single polyline.
| | 00:10 | On my screen I have got some geometry
that represents a simple part and I'm just
| | 00:15 | about finished with this drawing.
| | 00:16 | In fact, the only thing I have
left to do is trim up some line work.
| | 00:20 | So I'm going to launch the Trim command
and for my cutting objects, I am going
| | 00:24 | to select all of this geometry and
right-click and then I'll trim off these
| | 00:29 | lines, these lines, these,
and these and I'll hit Escape.
| | 00:35 | Now that my part is finished,
let's take a look at it.
| | 00:38 | I am going to select some of these
entities and this is supposed to represent
| | 00:43 | a part but unfortunately the
computer is looking at it as a bunch of
| | 00:46 | individual segments.
| | 00:48 | Instead I'd like to join all of this
geometry together into a single polyline.
| | 00:53 | To do that, I am going to use the Pedit command.
| | 00:56 | Pedit is located in the Modify panel.
| | 00:58 | We will have to click this flyout to
access the icon and once I launch the tool,
| | 01:03 | I can select one of my segments
and AutoCAD says, hey that's not polyline.
| | 01:08 | Do you want to turn it into one?
| | 01:10 | I'm going to right-click to accept yes.
| | 01:12 | Now the Pedit command does a lot of things.
| | 01:15 | For right now we re going
to look at the Join option.
| | 01:17 | So I'm going to select Join from the menu.
| | 01:21 | I will then select the objects I'd
like to join to my segment and right-click
| | 01:25 | and then to exit the Pedit
command, I'll hit the Escape key.
| | 01:28 | Now, if I select this geometry, I can see
that AutoCAD is viewing it as a single polyline.
| | 01:34 | If we join our line work together, it's
easier to Move, Rotate, Offset, even Erase.
| | 01:40 | Let me mention this.
| | 01:41 | Your line work must meet end-
to-end in order for it to join.
| | 01:45 | If you're having trouble joining your segments
together, take a closer look at your geometry.
| | 01:50 | Now that we understand how to join
segments together using Pedit, let's try and
| | 01:54 | use this tool in a practical example.
| | 01:58 | On my screen, I've got an
architectural drawing. This happens to be a light
| | 02:02 | fixture detail that I've been working on.
| | 02:04 | I am going to zoom in a little bit
closer and you can see that my fixture is
| | 02:07 | finished and the wall plate is finished.
| | 02:10 | Right now I have a centerline that
represents the conduit that will connect the
| | 02:14 | light of the building.
| | 02:16 | Now this is supposed to be a one-inch conduit.
| | 02:19 | So I would like to offset this centerline.
| | 02:22 | Unfortunately that's going to be
difficult because right now these are a bunch
| | 02:25 | of individual segments.
| | 02:27 | To make my offset little bit easier,
I'm first going to join all these
| | 02:30 | segments into a polyline.
| | 02:33 | So I am going to launch Pedit.
| | 02:35 | I will then select a segment and right-
click, we will select Join and then I'll
| | 02:41 | select the objects I
would like to join together.
| | 02:43 | I've got a small one right over here
and when I'm finished, I will right-click.
| | 02:50 | And very important.
| | 02:51 | Take a look at the command line.
| | 02:52 | Notice AutoCAD says, three
segments added to polyline.
| | 02:56 | That's a good thing.
| | 02:57 | That means the command worked.
| | 02:58 | If you see zero segments added to
polyline, it means it didn't join and you have
| | 03:02 | got a problem with your geometry.
| | 03:04 | Let's hit the Escape key to get out of the
command and then we will offset the centerline.
| | 03:08 | I am going to launch the Offset command
and I'd like this to be one-inch conduit.
| | 03:14 | So I'm going to set
my distance to 1/2 inch inch.
| | 03:16 | I will then select my
polyline and click to the outside.
| | 03:22 | I'll select my polyline again and click
to the inside and then I don't need my
| | 03:26 | centerline anymore. I am going to
launch the Erase command and we will select
| | 03:30 | this geometry and erase.
| | 03:32 | Use the Pedit command to your advantage.
| | 03:34 | If you think you may need to move
or rotate or offset your geometry,
| | 03:38 | it might be best to join it
together into a single polyline.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing hatch patterns| 00:00 | You might think that since Hatch is treated
as a single object, it must be hard to edit.
| | 00:04 | That is not the case.
| | 00:06 | The Hatch patterns in AutoCAD are
very easy to modify, even if they've lost
| | 00:10 | their associativity.
| | 00:12 | In this lesson, we are going
to learn how to edit our Hatch.
| | 00:14 | On my screen, I have got a polyline
that I created using the Rectangle tool and
| | 00:20 | inside the shape I've created some Hatch.
| | 00:23 | First, I'd like to talk about how we can
change the appearance of our Hatch pattern.
| | 00:27 | One way to do that is by double-clicking
on the Hatch object. This brings up our
| | 00:31 | Hatch Edit dialog box and from here we
could change our Hatch Pattern, we could
| | 00:36 | change the Angle, Scale
as well as other settings.
| | 00:40 | Let's click Cancel because I want to
show you another way we can edit our Hatch.
| | 00:44 | If I select this Hatch Pattern and go to
my Property Changer, notice right here,
| | 00:49 | underneath the Pattern group, I can
change my Hatch Pattern, my Angle, my Scale,
| | 00:54 | as well as other settings.
| | 00:57 | As long as we are here,
let's change the Pattern.
| | 00:59 | I'm going to click in the Pattern name
field and then I will click the Ellipsis
| | 01:02 | button and we will change this to ANSI37
and click OK. And then I will hit Escape
| | 01:09 | to deselect the Hatch.
| | 01:11 | Now this Hatch is associative to this polyline.
| | 01:14 | Meaning if the polyline changes,
the Hatch will go along for the ride.
| | 01:17 | I am going to select the polyline and
click one of these grips and I am going to
| | 01:22 | pull the grip over here and
notice that the pattern changes.
| | 01:25 | Let's try something catastrophic.
| | 01:27 | I am going to launch my Erase command and I'm
going to select my polyline and right-click.
| | 01:35 | If you look at the command line, we can see
that our Hatch associativity has been removed.
| | 01:39 | Obviously, because the boundary is gone.
| | 01:41 | Now you might think that this hatch is
completely worthless at this point. Watch this.
| | 01:47 | If I select the hatch, notice that
AutoCAD remembers the previous boundary.
| | 01:53 | Take a look at these grips on the corners.
| | 01:56 | If I select a grip, I can pull it
someplace else on my screen and click.
| | 02:01 | If I'd like to remove this corner, I
can select it and then I can tap the Ctrl key
| | 02:06 | on my keyboard and
AutoCAD will toggle to Remove mode.
| | 02:10 | Notice I have got a
little minus sign by my cursor.
| | 02:13 | Also notice we can see the
effect of the remove over here.
| | 02:16 | If I want to get rid of the
corner, I can simply click on screen.
| | 02:20 | So using the Ctrl key, I can toggle
between move or remove my corners.
| | 02:25 | Take a look at the grips between the corners.
| | 02:27 | This is called an Edge Grip.
| | 02:30 | If I select this and pull out, I can click
again to create a new corner and two new edges.
| | 02:36 | Let me grab this edge and pullout.
| | 02:40 | If I tap my Ctrl key, I can toggle
between Corner mode and Arc mode.
| | 02:46 | The Ctrl key acts just like a toggle.
| | 02:48 | We can hit it once.
| | 02:49 | We can hit it again.
| | 02:50 | We can change back and forth.
| | 02:51 | I am going to place my arc right here.
Knowing what we know now, let's try and
| | 02:57 | use these Hatch Edit
tools in a practical example.
| | 03:00 | I am going to pan my drawing over
and on my screen I have got a mechanical
| | 03:05 | part that's obviously been modified.
| | 03:07 | We can see that the Hatch
obviously was not associative.
| | 03:11 | Instead of erasing this hatch and
starting over, let's see if we can modify
| | 03:14 | this existing pattern.
| | 03:15 | I am going to select it and then I am
going to grab this corner and place it here.
| | 03:21 | I will grab this corner and place it here.
| | 03:23 | We will grab the edge grip and I'm going
to place this to the quadrant right here.
| | 03:30 | I will grab this corner
and place it to the endpoint.
| | 03:33 | Replace this one to the endpoint here.
| | 03:36 | This one to the endpoint here.
| | 03:38 | We will get this one and then we will
finish the outside of the part by grabbing
| | 03:43 | this edge and I will
place it to the quadrant here.
| | 03:49 | Now it looks like the original part
had a slot. It looks like the slot has been
| | 03:53 | converted into a hole.
| | 03:54 | So I'm going to have to
remove some of these corners.
| | 03:58 | To do that I'm going to select the
corner and then I'm going to tap my Ctrl key
| | 04:02 | to toggle to Remove mode
and then I'll pick on screen.
| | 04:06 | I will select this one as well and
tap Ctrl and pick on screen and then
| | 04:12 | we'll select this edge.
| | 04:14 | I will tap control to get an arc and
I will place it to the quadrant right here,
| | 04:21 | and when I'm finished, I will hit Escape.
| | 04:24 | As you can see, even if your Hatch
loses its relationship to the geometry,
| | 04:28 | it's still very easy to edit and
can easily conform to a new shape.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. Organizing DrawingsUnderstanding layers| 00:00 | Layers are used in AutoCAD
to organize our drawings.
| | 00:04 | By placing our entities on different
layers, we have the ability to turn
| | 00:07 | linework on and off, as well as
control colors, line types and line weights.
| | 00:12 | On my screen, I have got a mechanical
example and I'm sure you'll agree that
| | 00:15 | there's a lot of linework in this drawing.
| | 00:18 | Let's pretend for a second that I created this
drawing using a traditional paper and pencil.
| | 00:22 | And let's say I gave the drawing to you
and you looked at it and said, you know what?
| | 00:26 | This drawing is kind of busy.
| | 00:28 | Can I get a copy of this without the dimensions?
| | 00:30 | Well, unless I get some white-out or an
eraser, there's really no way I can give
| | 00:35 | you that drawing because
everything exists on that paper.
| | 00:38 | Let's look it at a different way.
| | 00:40 | What if I drew my part geometry on the
paper and then what if I laid a clear sheet
| | 00:45 | of plastic over my drawing and then
I drew my dimensions on the plastic.
| | 00:49 | Now, if you wanted to see a copy of
that drawing without dimensions, we can
| | 00:53 | simply peel back the plastic
and the dimensions are gone.
| | 00:56 | That is exactly how layers work.
| | 00:59 | Each layer represents a clear sheet of
plastic and we use layers to organize our drawing.
| | 01:05 | We can put dimensions on their own layer.
| | 01:06 | We can put centerlines on a layer.
| | 01:09 | We can put notes or
drawing components on a layer.
| | 01:12 | Having logical layers also
gives more control when we plot.
| | 01:16 | As an example, the drawing that we
are looking at on screen was created
| | 01:20 | using several layers.
| | 01:21 | Let's say I would like to plot this except
I'd like to plot it without the dimensions.
| | 01:26 | I am going to come up to the Layers
panel in our Ribbon and I am going to
| | 01:29 | click this flyout.
| | 01:31 | This guy is my Layer control.
| | 01:33 | This shows me all of the layers in my drawing.
| | 01:35 | I am going to come down to the part-
dimensions layer and I am going to click
| | 01:39 | this light bulb to turn the layer off.
| | 01:41 | Then I can click on screen to close the menu.
| | 01:44 | Notice my dimensions are no longer visible.
| | 01:46 | Let me pan this over a
little bit and why stop there?
| | 01:50 | Let's go back to the Layer control and I
am going to turn off my centerlines and
| | 01:55 | let's also turn off these labels.
| | 01:57 | These guys are on a layer called part-
labels. We will turn that off and then
| | 02:01 | I will click on screen.
| | 02:04 | Not only do layers give us more
control when we plot, they also give us more
| | 02:07 | control when we are working.
| | 02:08 | I am sure you will agree that it's
much easier to work on a drawing when it's
| | 02:12 | uncluttered with excess information.
| | 02:15 | Let's turn our layers back on.
| | 02:16 | So again, we will come up to the
Layer control and I will turn all of these
| | 02:20 | light bulbs back on.
| | 02:23 | When it comes right down to it, layers
give us more control over our drawing.
| | 02:27 | If we use a system of logically named
layers to organize our line work, we give
| | 02:31 | ourselves more options when
plotting or viewing our geometry on screen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating and adjusting layers using the Layer Property Manager| 00:01 | Once we decide we need to create some
layers, the place we want to visit is the
| | 00:04 | Layer Properties Manager.
| | 00:06 | This is our one-stop shop for creating,
managing and manipulating the layers in our drawing.
| | 00:12 | Now, I have just launched my AutoCAD
2010 and if you look at the top of the screen
| | 00:15 | you can see I'm currently
sitting in the default AutoCAD drawing.
| | 00:19 | What I'd like to do in this session
is create some layers and adjust their
| | 00:24 | settings and give you an idea of how
the Layer Properties Manager works.
| | 00:28 | So to bring up the Manager, I am going
to go to the Layers panel of the Ribbon
| | 00:32 | and I'm in going to click this icon
and the first thing we notice,
| | 00:36 | the Layer Properties Manager is huge.
| | 00:38 | Now, fortunately this guy is also a palette.
| | 00:41 | So if I move my cursor out, it will collapse.
| | 00:44 | While it's open, I'd like you to come
up and click the Auto-hide icon such that
| | 00:48 | we see the double arrows.
| | 00:50 | That way the palette will stay open until
we come up and click this X to close it.
| | 00:55 | At the top of the palette, we can see the name
of the current layer. Right now it's layer 0.
| | 01:00 | Anything we draw at this point
will be created on the current layer.
| | 01:05 | If we look over here to the right, we
can see a listing of all of the layers
| | 01:08 | that are in this drawing
as well as their settings.
| | 01:11 | Now, since this is a default blank
drawing, I only have one layer, layer 0.
| | 01:17 | Layer 0 is kind of a special layer.
| | 01:20 | Every AutoCAD drawing starts with layer 0
and we cannot rename or delete this layer.
| | 01:25 | You will always have a layer 0 in your drawing.
| | 01:28 | To the right of my layer name are
my layer settings, and these guys are
| | 01:33 | organized into columns
just like Microsoft Excel.
| | 01:36 | Now unfortunately, we can't always
read the text at the top of the columns.
| | 01:41 | If you would like to make your columns
a little wider, you can click and hold
| | 01:44 | between the columns and drag them out.
| | 01:47 | Better yet, if you right-click on a
column header, you can come down and select
| | 01:51 | Maximize all columns and then you can
easily read the text for all of these.
| | 01:57 | Now they do take up more space this way,
so you may have to come down and click
| | 02:01 | and hold on this blue slider and drag
it back and forth, so you can see all of
| | 02:06 | your layer settings.
| | 02:07 | To adjust any of our layer settings,
all we have to do is click on it.
| | 02:12 | Let's take a look at
this one first. On and off.
| | 02:15 | I am going to click this
icon to turn my layer off.
| | 02:19 | When I do AutoCAD brings up a warning.
| | 02:20 | It's saying, hey, you're
turning off your current layer.
| | 02:23 | Are you sure you want to do that?
| | 02:25 | In this case, yes I do.
| | 02:26 | So I will select this option.
| | 02:29 | That turns off the light bulb and any
geometry on this layer would no longer
| | 02:32 | be visible on screen.
| | 02:34 | I am going to click the light bulb
again to turn the layer back on and let's
| | 02:38 | take a look at this setting.
| | 02:39 | This controls the color of my layer.
| | 02:42 | If I click this color swatch, it
brings up AutoCAD color picker where I can
| | 02:46 | select from any one of
255 standard AutoCAD colors.
| | 02:51 | For right now we're going to leave this
layer set to the default color of white.
| | 02:55 | So I am going to come down and click OK.
| | 02:57 | Let's take a look at this setting, Linetype.
| | 03:00 | This controls the appearance of my geometry.
| | 03:03 | Is it going to look like a solid
continuous line or is it going to be broken up
| | 03:06 | into various sized dashes?
| | 03:09 | To make an adjustment I will click and
AutoCAD brings up a dialog box showing me
| | 03:14 | all of the Linetypes that are
loaded into this current drawing.
| | 03:17 | Right now I just have the one.
| | 03:19 | To load additional Linetypes, I can
click the Load button and I can select from
| | 03:23 | several Linetypes that come
preinstalled with AutoCAD.
| | 03:27 | To bring one into my drawing,
I can select it and click OK.
| | 03:31 | Now that it's in my drawing, I could
select it to apply it to my layer.
| | 03:35 | Once again I am going to leave layer 0 set to
the default of Continuous and we will click OK.
| | 03:40 | Finally, let's take a look at Lineweight.
| | 03:43 | Let's click to make a change.
| | 03:45 | This brings up my Lineweight dialog
box and I can select my Lineweight that
| | 03:49 | I would like the geometry on this
layer to appear when it's plotted.
| | 03:52 | We will talk more about Lineweights
when we get into our chapter on plotting.
| | 03:58 | Once again I am going to leave this
set to the default and I will click OK.
| | 04:02 | Let's create a new layer.
| | 04:04 | To do that I am going to come up and
click the New Layer icon and then I will
| | 04:08 | give my layer a name.
| | 04:09 | I am going to type part and hit my Enter key.
| | 04:14 | Then we will assign this layer a color.
| | 04:15 | Let's click the color swatch and I'll come
down and select yellow and I will click OK.
| | 04:21 | Finally let's set this layer Current.
| | 04:23 | I am going to make sure the layer is
selected and then I will click this green check,
| | 04:27 | and notice we can see that the
Current layer is now reflected up here.
| | 04:31 | I am going to close the Manager.
| | 04:34 | And as a side note, notice the
Current layer is also reflected right here.
| | 04:38 | Let's create some geometry.
| | 04:39 | I am going to draw a circle and
notice my circle is taking on the settings
| | 04:45 | of the Current layer.
| | 04:46 | My circle is yellow because the layer is yellow.
| | 04:49 | In fact, anything I create is going to
take on the settings of the current layer.
| | 04:55 | Let's make a change.
| | 04:55 | I am going to bring back the Manager
and you know what, this wasn't supposed to
| | 05:00 | be called layer part.
| | 05:02 | Let's change the name.
| | 05:03 | I am going to click once to select the
layer and then I will click again on the
| | 05:07 | name and I am going to change this to
the object layer and I will hit Enter.
| | 05:14 | I'm also going to change the color.
| | 05:15 | Let me click the color swatch and you
know what, this was supposed to be magenta.
| | 05:19 | Let's click OK and we will close the Manager.
| | 05:23 | Notice my geometry has
taken on my new layer settings.
| | 05:26 | I'm going to create a new layer.
| | 05:29 | Let's bring the Layer Properties Manager.
| | 05:31 | We will click the New Layer icon and I'm
going to create a layer called hidden lines.
| | 05:37 | Unfortunately, we can't
see the entire layer name.
| | 05:39 | So I am going to click between
these columns and I will drag this over.
| | 05:44 | Let's change the color of this layer to
cyan and then let's click the Linetype setting.
| | 05:50 | Since these are going to be hidden lines,
I am going to come down and click Load
| | 05:54 | and as long as we're here, notice all
the Linetypes at the top of this list
| | 05:58 | start with ACAD_ISO.
| | 06:01 | Do not use these Linetypes if you
are creating a drawing with imperial
| | 06:04 | measurements, because these
Linetypes are pre-scaled for metric.
| | 06:08 | I am going to come down to the hidden line area.
| | 06:11 | Notice I have three types depending
on the size of the dashes I'd like.
| | 06:15 | I am going to select the standard one
and click OK to load it into my drawing.
| | 06:19 | I will then select it and
click OK to apply it to my layer.
| | 06:24 | Finally, I am going to set this layer
Current by clicking the green check and we
| | 06:28 | will close the Manager.
| | 06:30 | I am going to create some more geometry.
| | 06:31 | We will make a rectangle.
| | 06:33 | And since my rectangle was created on
the hidden lines layer, it is taking
| | 06:37 | on those properties.
| | 06:39 | Let's set the 0 layer Current.
| | 06:40 | That will bring back the Manager.
| | 06:42 | And here's a shortcut, another way
we can make a layer Current is by
| | 06:45 | double-clicking on the name.
| | 06:47 | Let me close the Manager and now
everything I create is being created on layer 0.
| | 06:52 | Let's do one more thing.
| | 06:53 | I am going to launch the Erase command
and I'm going to erase this geometry.
| | 06:59 | I've essentially erased
everything on the object layer.
| | 07:02 | Let's go back to the Manager and take a
look at the icons in the Status column.
| | 07:07 | Notice the icon next to the
object layer is grayed out.
| | 07:10 | That tells me there's nothing on that layer.
| | 07:13 | In this case, I can ask myself do
I really need this layer anymore?
| | 07:16 | If not, I can delete it.
| | 07:18 | To do that I can select the layer and I
can come up and click this X to delete
| | 07:23 | and when I am finished,
I will close the Manager.
| | 07:25 | Whenever you're adding geometry to your
drawing, ask yourself, is this something
| | 07:29 | that needs to be a
different Linetype or Lineweight?
| | 07:32 | Or, is this something I may want
to turn off when I print my drawing?
| | 07:35 | If your answer is yes, you will want
to visit your Layer Properties Manager
| | 07:39 | and create a new layer.
| | 07:41 | In our next lesson, we are going to
explore the Layer Properties Manager a
| | 07:44 | little bit deeper and we are going to
create our first drawing where we organize
| | 07:48 | our geometry on to logical layers.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using layers to organize a drawing| 00:01 | In this lesson, we're going to create a
simple drawing and we'll use the Layer
| | 00:04 | Properties Manager to organize
our geometry on to logical layers.
| | 00:09 | If you look at my screen, you can see
I've got a mechanical example. This is a
| | 00:12 | drawing of a restrictor plate and this
drawing was created using several layers.
| | 00:17 | What I'd like to do is starting new
drawing and use the Layer Properties Manager
| | 00:21 | to help us re-create this file.
| | 00:23 | Well we'll recreate
everything except for the dimensions.
| | 00:28 | So I am going to create a new drawing.
| | 00:29 | We'll click the New icon and we will
start using the blank acad template, and
| | 00:36 | now that I have two drawings open,
I am going to go to the View tab on my
| | 00:39 | ribbon, and then I'll come down
and select the Tile Vertically icon.
| | 00:44 | So I get a side-by-side view of my drawings.
| | 00:47 | Let's click in this window and we'll
adjust our zoom and we'll pan this over and
| | 00:52 | center it on screen, and then I will
click to put the focus on this window.
| | 00:57 | We'll go to the Home tab and we'll get started.
| | 01:01 | The first thing I'd like
to do is create some layers.
| | 01:03 | I am going to come up and click my
Layer Properties Manager icon, and
| | 01:08 | this guy is awfully big. You know what?
| | 01:09 | Since it's a palette,
let's right-click on this mast.
| | 01:14 | We'll make sure Allow Docking is
checked and I am going to select Anchor Left.
| | 01:18 | That will reduce the
palette down to a single icon.
| | 01:22 | Now if I want access to it, I can simply hover.
| | 01:25 | It opens up and I can use the tool.
I can then move away, and it will collapse.
| | 01:29 | I am going to open it back up.
| | 01:31 | I am going to create a new layer, and
I am going to call this part and then I'll
| | 01:37 | click the color swatch and I'll select yellow.
| | 01:41 | And unfortunately, one of the
byproducts of the collapsible palettes is it
| | 01:44 | collapses when you select your color.
| | 01:46 | So let me get back over the palette
open it up. I am going to create another layer.
| | 01:50 | I am going to call this hidden lines.
We'll set its Color to magenta and
| | 01:58 | we will set its Linetype to HIDDEN.
| | 02:02 | I'll do that by selecting Load and then
I'll choose the Linetype I want from the
| | 02:07 | list and click OK. This loads
the Linetype into my drawing.
| | 02:11 | I can now select it from this list
and click OK to apply it to my layer.
| | 02:16 | Let's hit the part layer current.
I will select it and click the check and
| | 02:20 | then I'll move outside the palette.
| | 02:21 | I am going to start by
creating the outer rectangle.
| | 02:24 | We'll launch the Rectangle command and
I will pick a point on screen and I can
| | 02:30 | see that my dimensions are 12x12.
| | 02:36 | Let's take a look at these circles.
| | 02:38 | Notice that each circle measures one
inch from each of the adjacent edges.
| | 02:42 | So I am going to use my
rectangle to my advantage.
| | 02:45 | I am going to launch the Offset command.
| | 02:47 | I am going to type in a
distance of 1 and hit Enter.
| | 02:50 | I will then offset my rectangle to the
inside, and then I can create a circle in
| | 02:56 | all four of these corners.
| | 02:59 | Looks like my radius is .5, so I'll
enter that and then we will copy this circle
| | 03:07 | from the endpoint to
here to here to here to here.
| | 03:11 | And then I will erase my extra rectangle.
| | 03:15 | Now, let's offset this lower edge up 3.75
and 6 to find the centers of these circles.
| | 03:23 | Well, before I can offset this, I
should probably explode t. That way I can
| | 03:26 | offset my edges individually.
| | 03:28 | I'll launch the Explode command and
click this and then I will launch Offset.
| | 03:34 | I will enter a distance of 3.75
and we'll offset this edge up.
| | 03:41 | I will then click the offset command
again and type 6 and we'll offset this edge
| | 03:47 | up 6, and then I will offset the left
edge over 6 units, and both of my circles
| | 03:54 | can be created at these intersections.
| | 03:58 | Once again I will launch the Circle
command and I will create my circle at the
| | 04:02 | intersection here, and this
circle has a radius of 1.75.
| | 04:08 | Now we have to create
something on the hidden line layer.
| | 04:10 | Let's set that current.
| | 04:11 | Let's go to the Layer Properties
Manager and I am going to double-click on the
| | 04:16 | hidden lines layer and then I will
move out and let the palette collapse.
| | 04:21 | Let's go back in the circle. I will
create this circle at the intersection right here,
| | 04:27 | and this one has a radius of 4.
| | 04:29 | Then we'll clean up after ourselves.
| | 04:33 | I'll launch the Erase command
and we'll get rid of these lines.
| | 04:37 | Finally, let's take care of the center lines.
| | 04:39 | I am going to zoom in on this circle.
| | 04:42 | Let's create a layer for these. I am
going to come up and click the New Layer icon.
| | 04:48 | We'll call this layer center lines.
| | 04:51 | We'll set its color to green and
we'll set its Linetype to CENTER.
| | 05:04 | Finally, we'll set that guy Current
and we'll let the palette collapse.
| | 05:10 | I'm going to draw a line from the
quadrant over the top of this circle to the
| | 05:16 | quadrant of the bottom.
| | 05:17 | And then we'll draw another line
from the quadrant of this side to the
| | 05:24 | quadrant of the other.
| | 05:25 | And notice we're not seeing the little dashes.
| | 05:28 | That's because the lines have to be
a particular length to be long enough
| | 05:32 | to support the dash.
| | 05:33 | So don't worry about that yet.
| | 05:35 | I am going to launch my Scale command
and I'm going to scale both of these from
| | 05:41 | the center of the circle, and we will
pull these out. I will zoom a little bit,
| | 05:47 | and we'll make them about the size we
see in the other drawing, and we'll free pick
| | 05:50 | a point on screen.
| | 05:53 | That looks pretty good.
| | 05:55 | I am going to copy. AutoCAD say selects
objects. I am going to hit the letter P
| | 05:59 | for previous and then I'll right-click
and I will copy these from the center here,
| | 06:04 | and I'll place one of the center
here and here and here and let's drop one
| | 06:10 | at the center of this big circle too.
| | 06:12 | I am going to launch my Scale
command again, and I'll select these.
| | 06:17 | Then we'll scale them from the center
of this circle and once again I will pull
| | 06:22 | these out until they look similar
to what I see in the other drawing.
| | 06:26 | Be careful of your running object snap.
I'm pulling out just far enough so
| | 06:31 | that snap goes away.
| | 06:32 | If you have to, you can
always turn those off momentarily.
| | 06:34 | Let's create one more.
| | 06:38 | I am going to copy this line from the
center of this circle to the center of this one.
| | 06:46 | And it would look nice if I
trimmed these sides off, such that all of
| | 06:49 | the lengths were equal. Tell you what.
| | 06:52 | Let's create a circle from the center of
this one, and I will pull my radius out
| | 06:57 | to the endpoint of this line.
| | 06:59 | Now, I can use my Trim command, grab
the circle as my cutting edge and
| | 07:04 | right-click and I can trim
off this side and this side.
| | 07:08 | Let's erase this circle since it's no
longer necessary, and we're essentially
| | 07:13 | done with one exception.
| | 07:15 | Let me click in this window and we'll
zoom in. These center lines always look
| | 07:20 | best when the breaks fall right
at the centers of your circle.
| | 07:24 | Unfortunately, if I click on my side and
zoom in, we can see that's not happening.
| | 07:29 | There is no relationship between
this centerline and our circle.
| | 07:32 | So AutoCAD doesn't know where to put the breaks.
| | 07:36 | Let me show you how we
can create these manually.
| | 07:38 | I am going to launch my Circle command,
and then I'm going to zoom in at this
| | 07:45 | intersection, and I'll create a circle
at the intersection right here, and
| | 07:50 | I will pull this out, and I will
visually pick a point on the screen where my
| | 07:54 | circle would meet that dashed line,
because there is no object snap right here.
| | 07:59 | Let's hit the Spacebar and
we'll go right back into circle.
| | 08:02 | We will create it from the center of
this one and then once again, visually
| | 08:07 | I will pick a point on the screen where my
circle meets the edge of the dash. There we go.
| | 08:12 | Let me back up a little bit and now
we will copy these two circles from the
| | 08:17 | center here to the center here, and I
can use these circles to trim my lines.
| | 08:23 | Let's launch a Trim command and I will
grab these two circles and right-click,
| | 08:26 | trim this and this and this and this
and unfortunately when I did my trim,
| | 08:32 | it shortened up the line,
which messed up the dashes here.
| | 08:35 | Let's go back into the Trim command and
we'll grab these two circles and we'll
| | 08:38 | trim this line and this one.
| | 08:40 | When I am finished I'll hit Escape, and
then we can launch the Erase command and
| | 08:45 | get rid of the sketch geometry.
| | 08:47 | If we use the Layer Properties
Manager and organize our geometry on the
| | 08:51 | layers, we open up a whole new world of
color and Linetype possibilities for our designs.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Changing layer settings using layer control| 00:01 | Now that we've seen the full-blown
Layer Properties Manager, you may be
| | 00:04 | wondering if there is a faster way to
adjust your layer settings. In fact there is.
| | 00:08 | In this lesson, we're going to
learn how to use the Layer control.
| | 00:12 | The Layer control is located right
here in the Layers panel, and first and
| | 00:16 | foremost, the Layer control tells
us the name of the current layer.
| | 00:20 | Anything I create at this point
will be drawn on layer dimensions.
| | 00:25 | If I click the flyout, I can see a
listing of all of the layers that are in my
| | 00:29 | drawing and if I'd like to make
another layer current, all I'll have to do is
| | 00:33 | click on the layer name and
that becomes the current layer.
| | 00:37 | Let's open up the Layer control again,
and take a look at these icons to the
| | 00:41 | left of the layer name.
| | 00:42 | These are the same icons that we see in
the Layer Properties Manager and these
| | 00:47 | guys represent the
current settings for each layer.
| | 00:50 | Let's make a change.
| | 00:51 | For instance, maybe I'd like to
change the color of the centerlines layer.
| | 00:55 | I am going to click the Color Swatch,
this brings up AutoCAD's Color Picker and
| | 01:00 | I'm going to change this
to green and I'll click OK.
| | 01:04 | Notice we can see the change happen on screen.
| | 01:07 | Let's make another change. Maybe I'd
like to turn my centerline's layer off.
| | 01:11 | If I open up the Layer control, I can
come down and click the light bulb to turn
| | 01:15 | off that layer and then I can
click on screen to close the menu.
| | 01:19 | Now I would like to keep that layer on.
| | 01:21 | So I am going to open this up and
we'll click the light bulb again and then
| | 01:25 | we'll close the menu.
| | 01:26 | It's important to note that the
Layer control is not a substitute for the
| | 01:30 | Layer Properties Manager.
| | 01:32 | The Layer control is primarily
for adjusting your layer settings.
| | 01:36 | If you want to create layers or delete
layers or rename your layers, you are
| | 01:40 | going to have to do that
through the Layer Properties Manager.
| | 01:43 | Now this drawing that I have on screen
is a mechanical example. In fact, I'm
| | 01:47 | almost done with this drawing.
| | 01:49 | Really, all I have to do is create one
more circle in this lower left-hand corner.
| | 01:53 | So I'm going to launch my Circle command
and I am going to create my circle from
| | 01:57 | the center of this arc and
unfortunately, I can't grab that object snap.
| | 02:02 | I'm going to Shift+Right-click and select
Center and the circle has a diameter of 1.
| | 02:12 | Now notice my problem. My circle
is obviously on the wrong layer.
| | 02:16 | Take a look at this.
| | 02:17 | I've created this circle on layer 0.
| | 02:20 | Now, I don't have to erase it and
start over. Instead, I am going to use the
| | 02:23 | Layer control to move this
circle onto the correct layer.
| | 02:28 | To do that, I will select this
circle and now I'll come up to the Layer
| | 02:31 | control and I'll select the
appropriate layer and my circle automatically
| | 02:36 | moves to that layer.
| | 02:37 | When I'm finished I can hit
Escape to deselect my geometry.
| | 02:41 | Now that my circle is in place, I'm
going to copy my center lines down, copy
| | 02:46 | these from the center here to
the center here, and you know what?
| | 02:50 | As I look at this, I can see I've got
a dimension that's on the wrong layer.
| | 02:54 | Take a look at this.
| | 02:55 | I can see in my Layer control
that the current layer is 0.
| | 02:59 | If I select this entity, notice AutoCAD will
tell me what layer this guy is sitting on.
| | 03:04 | He is sitting on the part layer,
which is obviously incorrect.
| | 03:08 | I'm going to click the flyout and I'm
going to put him on the dimensions layer
| | 03:12 | and then I'll hit Escape.
| | 03:13 | Using the Layer control is the
fastest way to change your layer settings
| | 03:17 | and it's a great tool to use if you want
to move an entity from one layer to another.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding the BYLAYER property| 00:01 | As we've seen, when we place our
geometry on a layer, it looks like that layer.
| | 00:06 | For instance, if I draw a circle on a
green layer, the circle looks green.
| | 00:10 | If I draw a rectangle on a layer that
has a hidden linetype, the rectangle will
| | 00:14 | have a hidden linetype.
| | 00:16 | This is because my geometry has
a ByLayer property applied to it.
| | 00:20 | The ByLayer property means that the
layer setting dictates how the entities look.
| | 00:24 | Now I've got a drawing open on my screen,
and this drawing contains no geometry
| | 00:29 | but it does have four layers.
| | 00:31 | To view my layers, I am going to
go to the Layer Properties Manager.
| | 00:35 | Now mine happens to be anchored to my
interface. If yours is not visible on screen,
| | 00:39 | you can always
open it by clicking this icon.
| | 00:42 | I am going to open up the manager and if we
look right here, we can see our four layers.
| | 00:47 | If I come down little bit further, we
can see they are each a different color
| | 00:51 | and some of them have a different linetype.
| | 00:54 | I am going to move my cursor in the
model space and we'll let this collapse.
| | 00:57 | Take a look at the Layer control.
| | 00:59 | Notice my current layer is layer part.
| | 01:01 | I am going to create a circle.
| | 01:03 | I am going to pick my center point right
in the middle of the screen and it will
| | 01:08 | give this guy Radius of 3.
| | 01:12 | Notice how my circle is taking on the
appearance of the part layer. Let's select this.
| | 01:17 | We'll click the Layer control and I am
going to put it on the layer hidden lines
| | 01:22 | and I'll hit Escape.
| | 01:23 | Notice it now looks like the hidden lines layer.
| | 01:25 | I am going to select that again,
click the flyout, and we'll put it on the
| | 01:29 | centerlines layer.
| | 01:31 | Once again, as you would expect, it is
now taking on the appearance of that layer.
| | 01:35 | This is because my
circle has a ByLayer property.
| | 01:39 | ByLayer means my layer settings
dictate how this entity is going to look.
| | 01:43 | Now it's important to note that we can
also force properties on our objects.
| | 01:47 | Right over here in my ribbon,
we have a Properties panel.
| | 01:50 | Notice that this guy contains three settings:
| | 01:53 | one for Color, one for Line
Thickness and one for Line Type.
| | 01:57 | Also notice that each of these
guys currently is set to ByLayer.
| | 02:01 | Let's make a change.
| | 02:02 | I am going to click the Color
flyout and I'm going to set this to Cyan.
| | 02:07 | This means that every entity that I
create from now on is going to be forced to
| | 02:11 | have a color of Cyan regardless
of the layer that it's sitting on.
| | 02:15 | Let's create another circle.
| | 02:16 | I am going to launch the command and
we'll create the circle from the center of
| | 02:20 | this one, and then I'll just
free pick a point on screen.
| | 02:24 | Notice, even though this circle was
created on the part layer, it is forced to
| | 02:29 | have a color of cyan.
| | 02:31 | This is actually a terrible way to work.
| | 02:34 | If you force properties on your objects,
you are greatly reducing your ability
| | 02:38 | to change those properties later.
| | 02:40 | Imagine if I copied this circle 700
times throughout my drawing, and then what
| | 02:46 | if I have to change the color of these circles?
| | 02:48 | If their Color property was set to
ByLayer, I could easily change the color of
| | 02:52 | all of them, just by
changing the color of my layer.
| | 02:55 | If their color is forced on them, I am
going to have to go through and manually
| | 02:59 | select each of these guys
and change their color property.
| | 03:03 | Let's set this circle's color back to ByLayer.
| | 03:06 | To do that, I'm going to select it, I am
going to come up to my Color flyout and
| | 03:10 | I'm going to select
ByLayer and then I'll hit Escape.
| | 03:14 | And then one more thing, notice my
current color is still set to Cyan.
| | 03:18 | Let me click the flyout again, and
I'll select the ByLayer such that each new
| | 03:22 | entity will have a color property of ByLayer.
| | 03:26 | The best advice I can give regarding
the ByLayer property is don't touch it.
| | 03:30 | You should never force
properties on your objects.
| | 03:33 | If all of your entities are set to ByLayer,
making Color, Linetype or Lineweight changes,
| | 03:37 | is as simple as
changing your layer settings.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Layer Previous command| 00:00 | Sometimes it can be easier to work on a
drawing if we change some of our layer settings.
| | 00:06 | For instance, turning off unnecessary
geometry can simplify what we see on
| | 00:10 | screen and make visually
complicated drawings easier to understand.
| | 00:15 | The nice thing is when we finish our
work we can use AutoCAD's Layer Previous
| | 00:19 | command to restore layers
to their original settings.
| | 00:23 | On my screen I have got
an architectural example.
| | 00:25 | Let's say I would like to make
some changes to this floor plan.
| | 00:29 | The first thing I'm going to do is turn off
all the layers that I won't be working with.
| | 00:34 | So I'm going to open up the layer
control and let's turn off the Text layer,
| | 00:39 | we'll turn off the Plumbing layer, and
the Furniture layer, and then I'll click
| | 00:43 | on screen to close the tool.
| | 00:46 | As you can see my geometry is now
simplified, and I don't have to worry about
| | 00:50 | that extra line work getting in
the way when I make my changes.
| | 00:54 | Let's start out by zooming in on the
Foyer area, and let's say I would like to
| | 00:59 | move this wall back 2 feet to give me
a little bit of extra room in front,
| | 01:04 | in the event I'd like to add a small porch.
| | 01:06 | I'm going to launch my Stretch command,
and we'll make a crossing window around
| | 01:11 | this geometry, and then I will pick this
up from the endpoint here, and my Ortho
| | 01:17 | happens to be locked.
| | 01:18 | So I will pull straight back
and we'll type 2 feet, Enter.
| | 01:23 | I'm going to make another change.
| | 01:26 | Let's pan over to the master bedroom area.
| | 01:29 | Let's make this room a little bit smaller.
| | 01:31 | We'll bring this wall in a foot-and-a-half.
| | 01:34 | Once again, we'll launch the Stretch
command and I will make a crossing window
| | 01:38 | around this geometry.
| | 01:39 | We'll pick it up from the endpoint
here and once again I will pull this down.
| | 01:45 | I am being mindful of my running object snap.
| | 01:48 | Let me move my cursor to the right just
enough so that goes away, and we will type 1'6".
| | 01:56 | At this point, let's assume
that we're done making changes.
| | 01:59 | I'm going to double-click the wheel on
my mouse to do a Zoom Extents, and let's
| | 02:05 | put our layers back the way they were.
| | 02:07 | Now remember we turned off three
layers. Essentially we made three changes
| | 02:11 | to our layer settings.
| | 02:13 | To put this back, I'm going to move up and
click the Layer Previous button. Let me click once.
| | 02:18 | Notice one of my layers comes back.
| | 02:20 | I'll click again, and I'll
click again to bring back my layers.
| | 02:24 | Essentially, Layer Previous allows
you to backup in time and restore your
| | 02:28 | previous layer settings.
| | 02:30 | Don't be afraid of changing layer settings,
| | 02:32 | if it'll make it easier for
you to work on your drawing.
| | 02:35 | Even if you make several adjustments,
you can always restore your layers to
| | 02:39 | their original state by using
AutoCAD's Layer Previous command.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Adding General AnnotationsCreating single-line text| 00:01 | No matter what you're drafting, at some
point you're going to need to add some text.
| | 00:05 | Fortunately, AutoCAD has several
Annotation tools to help you get the job done.
| | 00:09 | In this session we're going
to look at Single Line text.
| | 00:13 | On my screen, I've got a mechanical
example in the upper-right corner.
| | 00:16 | I've got an Isometric view of my part.
| | 00:19 | I also have the standard top,
front, and right side views.
| | 00:24 | Now, I would like to label each of
these views and the labels I'm going to be
| | 00:27 | creating don't require a
high degree of formatting.
| | 00:30 | There's no word wrap
involved or any paragraph concerns.
| | 00:35 | Basically, each label is
going to be a single line of text.
| | 00:39 | If you look at my layer control you can
see I've created a layer for my text and
| | 00:43 | to create my labels, I'm going to come
up to the Annotation panel in Ribbon, and
| | 00:48 | I'm going to click this fly-out
and I'll select Single Line text.
| | 00:53 | Now, AutoCAD would like
the start point of my text.
| | 00:55 | Where do I want to put my label?
| | 00:57 | I'm going to click right here.
| | 01:00 | Now, I can specify my height.
| | 01:02 | Your text height is very important
because you want to make sure that your text
| | 01:05 | is legible when this drawing is plotted.
| | 01:08 | We'll discuss how to set appropriate
text types a little bit later after we've
| | 01:12 | talked about plotting.
| | 01:13 | For right now, I'm going to go with the
text height of 0.4, and I'll hit Enter.
| | 01:19 | And then finally AutoCAD wants a Rotation angle.
| | 01:21 | How do you want this text to read on screen?
| | 01:25 | I could free pick a point to define my angle.
Instead I'm going to hit Enter and accept 0.
| | 01:31 | The 0 angle causes my text
to read horizontal on screen.
| | 01:37 | Now I can start typing.
| | 01:39 | We'll type Top View, and when I'm
finished, I will hit Enter and then Enter
| | 01:44 | again to get out of the command.
| | 01:46 | Let's label the Front View.
| | 01:47 | Once again, I'll click the flyout
and we'll select Single Line text.
| | 01:50 | I'm going to click right
here to place my text label.
| | 01:55 | I will then hit Enter to accept the
height and Enter again to accept the angle.
| | 02:01 | This is the Front View, Enter, Enter.
| | 02:03 | I'm going to hit my Spacebar to go
back into the Single Line text command and
| | 02:09 | I'm going to pick right here to set my text.
| | 02:13 | I'll hit Enter twice, and
we'll type Right Side View.
| | 02:18 | I'd like to create one more
label for my Isometric view.
| | 02:22 | Let's do it a little bit different.
| | 02:24 | To go back in the Single Line text,
I'm going to hit my Spacebar and then for
| | 02:28 | the start point of my text, I'm
going to grab the endpoint of this line.
| | 02:33 | And for my height, let's make
our text a little bit smaller.
| | 02:36 | I'm going to type 0.35 and hit Enter.
| | 02:40 | And now for my Rotation angle,
instead of having it read horizontal
| | 02:44 | on screen, I'm going to come down
and click the endpoint of this line to
| | 02:48 | define my Rotation angle. And notice
as I type this my text is a little bit
| | 02:53 | close to that line.
| | 02:54 | It's important to note that text
objects in AutoCAD are like anything else.
| | 02:58 | We can treat them just like standard geometry.
| | 03:00 | For instance I can launch my Move command.
| | 03:03 | We'll select this text, right-click.
| | 03:06 | I'm going to pick it up from the end-point here,
and let's place it a little bit farther away.
| | 03:11 | That looks better.
| | 03:12 | Knowing that, I'm going to back up
a little, and I'm going to launch my
| | 03:15 | Move command again.
| | 03:16 | I'm going to select my Top
View label, and right-click.
| | 03:20 | Now, where do I want to pick this up from?
| | 03:23 | I'm just going to pick it up from a
point in space. Since this is a text label,
| | 03:27 | I really don't need a high
degree of accuracy when I place this.
| | 03:31 | Let's move it right up here and click.
| | 03:34 | Single Line text is the perfect
choice for view labels, area labels, title
| | 03:39 | block info, street names or any
other annotation that doesn't require
| | 03:43 | paragraph style formatting.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Justifying text| 00:01 | With most software, your choices for
text justification are limited to left,
| | 00:05 | center, or right justified.
| | 00:07 | AutoCAD however gives us complete
control over our justification, allowing us to
| | 00:11 | position and justify our text at
nearly every conceivable location.
| | 00:16 | I'm currently working on a title block drawing.
| | 00:18 | We'll be using this title block later
when we get into our chapter on plotting.
| | 00:23 | If you look right over here, you can see I've
made a copy of a portion of this title block.
| | 00:28 | Let's zoom in on this geometry.
| | 00:30 | What I would like to do is use this
copy I've made to the right to show you how
| | 00:34 | I positioned my text in the title block.
| | 00:37 | And before we create any text, I'd like
to take a second and talk a little bit
| | 00:41 | about justification.
| | 00:42 | On my screen, I have some text.
| | 00:46 | Just for a second, let's make the
assumption this text is sitting on a baseline.
| | 00:51 | Now most programs that allow us to justify
our text give us a couple of basic options.
| | 00:55 | For instance, Left Justified. All of my
text will be justified to that leftmost point.
| | 01:03 | We also have Center as well
as Right Justified options.
| | 01:07 | So these are the big three.
| | 01:09 | AutoCAD gives us a lot more choices.
| | 01:11 | Notice I have additional baselines.
I've got a bottom, a middle and a top and
| | 01:16 | each of those baselines
contain three justification points:
| | 01:20 | left, center, and right.
| | 01:22 | So we have an insane amount of
control when it comes to placing or
| | 01:26 | justifying our text.
| | 01:28 | Let's return to our AutoCAD drawing.
| | 01:30 | If you look at my geometry on the right,
notice I've got these purple lines.
| | 01:34 | These are offsets that I created to
define the margins that I'd like to use
| | 01:38 | inside my title block.
| | 01:40 | Let's start out by creating these text objects.
| | 01:42 | These identify the initials of the
people that have worked on this drawing.
| | 01:46 | I am going to come up and click my Text
flyout and select Single Line and for
| | 01:52 | the start point of my text, I am going
to select the intersection of my offsets.
| | 01:57 | I'll then specify a height of 0.05
and I'll accept the rotation angle of 0.
| | 02:05 | And we'll type XXX and I'll hit
Enter twice to get out of the command.
| | 02:09 | I am going to zoom in a little bit
because I want to mention that all text that
| | 02:15 | we create in AutoCAD by
default is left justified.
| | 02:19 | As you can see this text is
justified to the intersections of my offsets.
| | 02:24 | It's also important to note that we can use
this justification point to move or copy our text.
| | 02:29 | For instance, I'd like to create some copies
of this text to fill in these other two squares.
| | 02:36 | So I'll launch my Copy command and I'll
select this text object and right-click.
| | 02:41 | Now where do I want to pick him up from?
| | 02:43 | Let's look at a new object snap.
| | 02:44 | I am going to Shift+Right-click and
I am going to come down and select Insert.
| | 02:49 | This stands for
insertion or justification point.
| | 02:53 | When I place my cursor over the text,
notice where AutoCAD's going to pick it up from.
| | 02:57 | I can then place my copy at the
intersection here and I'll place another
| | 03:02 | one at the intersection here.
| | 03:07 | Let's create this text object.
| | 03:10 | Once again, we'll launch the Single
Line text command and this time
| | 03:14 | left justified text isn't going to help me.
| | 03:17 | Take a look at the command line.
| | 03:19 | Notice I've got an option called Justify.
| | 03:21 | I'm going to right-click and select Justify.
| | 03:25 | This is why I showed you those slides.
| | 03:27 | TL, TR, what do these stand for?
| | 03:30 | Top Left, Top Right, Middle Left.
| | 03:32 | Basically, these are all of
our justification options.
| | 03:35 | Now in this case, I'd like my text to
be Right Justified and I would like it to
| | 03:40 | be justified to the intersection right here.
| | 03:44 | Let's hit Enter to accept the height
and the angle, and then I'm going to type
| | 03:47 | DSGN:. This represents 'designed by.'
| | 03:52 | I want to create one more.
| | 03:54 | Let's take care of this Date label right here.
| | 03:56 | I am going to hit my Spacebar
to go back into the Text command.
| | 04:00 | Let's right-click and select Justify
and this time I am going to used TL.
| | 04:04 | I'd like it top left justified.
| | 04:07 | Let's grab the Intersection of these offsets.
| | 04:10 | I'll accept the height and
the angle and I'll type Date:
| | 04:14 | and we'll exit out of the command.
| | 04:16 | Generally speaking, I used this same
workflow to create all of the text that we
| | 04:20 | see in this title block.
| | 04:22 | Before we go, I'd like to
give you one more example.
| | 04:24 | Frequently in our AutoCAD drawings,
we'll see text labels where the text is
| | 04:28 | placed within a circle.
| | 04:29 | I have created a small circle here.
| | 04:31 | Let's place some text at the center of
the circle and we'll properly justify it.
| | 04:35 | I am going to launch my Single Line text
command. I will right-click and select Justify.
| | 04:42 | This time I'll select MC for Middle
Center and I'd like my text justified to the
| | 04:48 | center of this circle.
| | 04:50 | For height, let's go a little bit
larger. I am going to type 0.075 and
| | 04:55 | I'll accept the rotation angle of 0,
and notice whatever I type in the circle,
| | 04:59 | it'll always be perfectly
centered inside that shape.
| | 05:03 | AutoCAD certainly gives us a lot of
choices when it comes to justifying our text.
| | 05:08 | Using these justification options
along with our Insertion object snap, we can
| | 05:12 | insert or reposition any text
object with complete control.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Controlling appearance using text styles| 00:01 | When we want to control the appearance of text,
normally we think about changing our font.
| | 00:05 | While AutoCAD will certainly allow us
to change fonts, we can actually go one
| | 00:08 | step further and create a text style.
| | 00:12 | A text style is a name that's
given to a collection of text settings.
| | 00:15 | On my screen, I've got a drawing that
represents a title block and when we think
| | 00:20 | about title blocks, we usually think about text.
| | 00:24 | I'm going to zoom in on the bottom of
this drawing so our text is a little
| | 00:27 | easier to see and I want to mention
that the appearance of all of these text
| | 00:31 | objects is being controlled by text styles.
| | 00:35 | Let's create a new text style
and we'll see how this works.
| | 00:39 | To do that, I am going to come up to
the Annotation panel and click the flyout
| | 00:43 | and at the very top of the menu, I can
see the name of my current style that
| | 00:46 | happens to be Standard.
| | 00:48 | All AutoCAD drawing start with a
Standard text style that's because you have to
| | 00:53 | have at least one style in your
drawing in order to create text.
| | 00:57 | To make a new style, I am going
to come down and click this icon.
| | 01:01 | This brings up a dialog box that
I can use to build my text style.
| | 01:06 | In the upper left corner, notice once again
we can see the name of the current style.
| | 01:10 | This list on the left side shows me the styles
that have already been created in this drawing.
| | 01:15 | If I select a style name from the list, I can
see a preview of that style right down here.
| | 01:21 | On the right side of the box, I've got
some buttons to help me manage my text styles.
| | 01:25 | Notice I can set a style current, I
can create a new one or I can delete a style.
| | 01:31 | In this case, I'd like to create a
new one so I'll click the New button and
| | 01:35 | we'll give our style a name.
| | 01:36 | I am going to call this General Notes.
| | 01:40 | It's important to make your style name
descriptive of what your text is going to be used for.
| | 01:46 | Let's click OK.
| | 01:47 | Now that my style has been created, I am
going to come over to the Font area and
| | 01:50 | click this flyout and we'll
assign a font to our style.
| | 01:55 | As I grab this little slider and move
up through the list, notice that some of
| | 01:58 | the fonts have a TT icon next to the
name and some of them have a Caliber.
| | 02:04 | The Caliber show us fonts that were
installed with AutoCAD and the TT stands for
| | 02:09 | TrueType. These are your Windows fonts.
| | 02:11 | Now everybody's system is a little bit
different, so the fonts that I see on my
| | 02:15 | screen may be a little bit
different than the fonts you see on yours.
| | 02:18 | I am going to select the Simplex font.
| | 02:21 | We can see a preview of that right over here.
| | 02:23 | Then we can come down and address the size.
| | 02:26 | For right now, it's probably
better to leave our text height at 0.
| | 02:30 | That way any time I create text using this
style, AutoCAD will ask me for a text height.
| | 02:36 | Let's take a look at Effects.
| | 02:37 | You know, maybe anytime I create text
using the style, I'd like it to be Upside
| | 02:41 | down or Backwards or Vertical.
| | 02:45 | My Width Factor controls the width of my
characters. If I set this to 2, you can
| | 02:50 | see that the characters are now twice as wide.
| | 02:52 | Let's set this back to 1.
| | 02:55 | The Oblique Angle controls the slant of my text.
| | 02:59 | If I set this to a 15-degree angle,
you can see that my text has somewhat of
| | 03:03 | an italicized look.
| | 03:05 | Once again, I am going to set
this back to the default of 0.
| | 03:09 | My General Notes style is Current.
| | 03:11 | Let's come down and click Apply and Close.
| | 03:14 | I am going to create a Single Line
text object, we'll place it right here and
| | 03:20 | for my text type, I am going to type in
0.15 and I'll accept the default angle.
| | 03:26 | This is what the General Notes style looks like.
| | 03:33 | Since my General Notes style is current,
all text I create from this point on
| | 03:38 | will look like this.
| | 03:39 | If I want to change the current style,
I am going to come back up and click the
| | 03:43 | Annotation flyout. I will then click
my Text Style flyout, where I can see a
| | 03:48 | listing of all of the styles in my drawing.
| | 03:51 | To make a different style current,
I'll select it from the menu.
| | 03:55 | Let's create another text object and I'm
going to accept the default height and angle.
| | 04:01 | This is what the Title style looks like.
| | 04:05 | Now this style was already defined in
the drawing and this guy is controlling
| | 04:10 | the appearance of these larger
text objects in my title block.
| | 04:13 | Now you may be wondering,
why are styles important?
| | 04:16 | Well, styles give us flexibility.
| | 04:20 | If we modify a text style, all of the
text that was created using that style
| | 04:24 | will automatically update. Let's try that.
| | 04:27 | I am going to go back to my Text Style Editor.
| | 04:32 | The Titles style is current.
| | 04:34 | Let's change the font
that's associated with the style.
| | 04:37 | In this case, I'm going to select a
Times font and rather than going up and down
| | 04:42 | through the list, I am going to hit the
letter T, which is the first letter of
| | 04:45 | that font name and notice AutoCAD
will take me to that point in the list.
| | 04:48 | Then I'll click my arrow a couple of
times. We'll change our font to Times New Roman.
| | 04:53 | Notice the difference.
| | 04:55 | Let's click Apply and Close.
| | 04:58 | And as you can see, all of the text that
was created using that style is updated.
| | 05:03 | Now if your text did not update
automatically on screen, you may have to do a regen.
| | 05:07 | Simply type re and hit Enter
to force your text to update.
| | 05:12 | Text styles control the
appearance of all the text in our drawing.
| | 05:16 | As you can see, by making a simple
modification to a style, we can automatically
| | 05:20 | update all text that was
created using that style.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Annotating with multi-line text| 00:01 | Sometimes we have to go beyond single
line notes and create paragraphs of text.
| | 00:05 | At times like these, it's nice to know that
AutoCAD has a fully featured word processor.
| | 00:10 | In this lesson, we are going to
learn how to create multiline text.
| | 00:14 | On my screen, I've got a detailed
drawing that I've been working on and at this
| | 00:18 | point in the process I would
like to create some general notes.
| | 00:21 | Now I am practicing good form.
As you can see I've already created a text style
| | 00:26 | and a layer for my notes, and since
these notes may exceed a couple of
| | 00:30 | paragraphs, we are going to use multiline text.
| | 00:34 | To launch the command, I am going to
come up to the Annotation panel and there
| | 00:37 | is actually two ways we can do this.
| | 00:39 | I can click the flyout right here and
select the tool from the menu or I can
| | 00:44 | come up and click this big letter A.
Now before I create my real paragraph,
| | 00:49 | let's pan the drawing over a little bit
and I'll zoom in and we'll get an idea
| | 00:53 | of how this tool works.
| | 00:55 | I am going to start out by picking a
point on screen and then I'm going to move
| | 00:59 | my cursor down and to the right, and
essentially what I'm doing is creating a
| | 01:03 | rectangle that establishes
the size of my column of text.
| | 01:07 | I am going to click to finish my
rectangle and then I can start typing.
| | 01:11 | This as an example of multi-line text.
| | 01:17 | Notice I now have word wrap.
| | 01:20 | Notice one more thing.
We have a new tab on our ribbon.
| | 01:24 | We'll see this tab whenever the
Multiline Text Editor is open on screen.
| | 01:29 | One thing you'll notice about the editor
is that it's very similar to Microsoft Word.
| | 01:33 | Notice I have a ruler above my text
and we can turn this ruler on and off
| | 01:38 | by clicking this icon.
| | 01:40 | The ruler shows me the location of
my tab stops, so if I click to put my
| | 01:45 | cursor in front of this word and hit my Tab
key a couple of times, we can see the tab stops.
| | 01:51 | I am going to hit my Backspace key
to put this back the way it was.
| | 01:55 | If I place my cursor over this diamond
and click and hold, I can drag and adjust
| | 02:00 | the width of my column.
| | 02:02 | Notice that I also have
several formatting options.
| | 02:04 | For instance, if I click, hold and drag
across one of these words, I can come up
| | 02:10 | and make this word bold or italics.
I can underline it or overline it.
| | 02:15 | Let me turn these off and let's take
a look at our paragraph formatting.
| | 02:20 | Currently my text is left justified.
| | 02:23 | I can also make the text center
justified or right or if I click this icon
| | 02:28 | I'll have full justification.
| | 02:30 | If I go down one more, I'll have full
justification with distributed text.
| | 02:34 | I am going to put this back to
Left Justify and we'll assume we are
| | 02:38 | finished with our paragraph.
| | 02:39 | So to close the editor, I am going to
come up and click the Close button, and
| | 02:43 | then I am going to come
down and click the Close icon.
| | 02:46 | Now that may seem unusual, why I
had to click that twice to get out.
| | 02:50 | The reason why that was is because the
panel was collapsed, similar to this one,
| | 02:54 | and I had to click it once to
open it up to get access to the tool.
| | 02:57 | Now that we've created some multi-line
text, I'm going to erase this one and
| | 03:03 | I'll back up, we'll pan over and
we'll create our real general notes.
| | 03:07 | Once again, I am going to launch the
tool, I'm going to pick a point on screen,
| | 03:11 | and take a look at the abc characters.
| | 03:14 | Those guys are a
representation of my current text height.
| | 03:18 | Now currently it's a little big.
I'd like to make my text a little smaller.
| | 03:22 | Take a look at my command line.
| | 03:23 | Notice I've got several options.
| | 03:25 | I'm going to right-click and select
Height and I am going to change my Height
| | 03:30 | to 0.2 and hit Enter.
| | 03:31 | I'll then pull over here and
click to define my column width.
| | 03:36 | Then I'll zoom in a little bit. Notice I
can pan and zoom while the editor is on
| | 03:41 | screen and I can enter my text.
| | 03:46 | Now that I am finished, I could make
some final tweaks if I like. I could grab
| | 03:50 | this diamond and adjust my column.
| | 03:53 | One thing I would like to do is
underline General Notes so I am going to click,
| | 03:57 | hold and drag across this text and we'll
come up and click the Underline button.
| | 04:02 | Now that I'm finished, let me show
you a shortcut to get out of the editor.
| | 04:05 | You know, we don't have to click the
Close button at all. If you simply click on
| | 04:09 | screen outside of the editor,
it'll close automatically.
| | 04:14 | Multiline text or MText, as it's also
called, will definitely be your first
| | 04:18 | choice for all the notes and call-
outs you create in your drawing.
| | 04:22 | Using multiline text is as close to a
professional quality word processor as you
| | 04:26 | can get while still being inside a CAD program.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing text| 00:00 | Computer drafting is all
about being able to make changes.
| | 00:04 | Fortunately, one of the easiest
things we can edit in AutoCAD is our text.
| | 00:08 | As an example, let's make some
changes to this detailed drawing.
| | 00:12 | I am going to start out by zooming
in on the title and let's say this was
| | 00:16 | incorrect. This should say
Detectable Warning Panel.
| | 00:19 | To edit my text, I don't have to know
any special commands. All I have to do is
| | 00:23 | double-click on it, and when I do,
AutoCAD selects all of this text.
| | 00:27 | I am going to click in between these
two words to place my cursor and then I'll
| | 00:31 | click, hold and drag to select
this word and I'll type Panel.
| | 00:37 | When I'm finished, I'll click off
to the side to deselect my text.
| | 00:41 | Notice AutoCAD is looking
for another text object.
| | 00:44 | It always assumes that
you'll want to edit more than one.
| | 00:47 | Let's zoom in on this N.T.S. text.
| | 00:50 | This stands for Not To Scale.
| | 00:52 | Since AutoCAD is already looking for
text, I only have to click this once and
| | 00:57 | let's type this out, Not To Scale.
And you know what, this is a single line text
| | 01:03 | object as is my title and you may be
wondering how I underlined my single line text
| | 01:08 | because when we create single
line text, we don't have all the options
| | 01:12 | available that we see when
we create multiline text.
| | 01:15 | Let me show you how to do that.
| | 01:17 | If we'd like to underline a single
line text object, we can click, hold and
| | 01:21 | drag across the text that we'd like to
underline and then we can hit Ctrl+U on our keyboard.
| | 01:28 | This is a standard Windows function.
| | 01:29 | Now that I am finished making my
changes, I'll click out here in space to
| | 01:33 | deselect my text. And to let AutoCAD
know that I am done making text changes
| | 01:38 | right now, I'll hit my Escape key.
| | 01:40 | I am going to back up.
| | 01:43 | Let's pan this drawing down a
little bit and we'll take a look at this
| | 01:46 | multiline text object.
| | 01:48 | If I'd like to make changes to this
text, it's the exact same procedure.
| | 01:52 | Simply double-click on it.
| | 01:54 | AutoCAD brings back my Text Editor
panel and I have access to all of my tools.
| | 01:59 | I'm going to change this to
Detectable Warning Panel and we'll add that
| | 02:04 | right down here as well.
| | 02:07 | You know what, I'm going to
change my paragraph formatting as well.
| | 02:10 | Let me click Center Justified and
notice it only did the bottom paragraph.
| | 02:15 | If you have text that's separated with
a hard carriage return and you'd like
| | 02:19 | to format all of it, you'll need to select all
of the text and then click the justification.
| | 02:25 | Once again, when I'm finished
making changes, I'll click on screen.
| | 02:29 | One important thing to note,
multiline text can also be edited with grips.
| | 02:33 | If I click on this once and select it,
notice I get a series of grips.
| | 02:38 | If I click this one in the upper left,
I can change the location of my multiline text.
| | 02:43 | I am going to move
this down just a little bit.
| | 02:46 | If I select the grip in the upper right, I can
drag back and forth and adjust my column width.
| | 02:53 | If I click the grip below,
I can adjust my column height.
| | 02:57 | Now if I pull this down, it doesn't
make any difference because I don't have
| | 02:59 | enough text to fill this column, but if I
push it up, AutoCAD will start a second column.
| | 03:05 | Imagine the possibilities.
| | 03:07 | I am going to pull this back down and
click and then we'll click our column
| | 03:10 | width and I'll drag this back over, and
when I am finished, I can hit my Escape key
| | 03:15 | to deselect the text.
| | 03:17 | I am going to back up a little bit more.
| | 03:19 | We'll pan this over just a little.
| | 03:22 | Another way we can edit our text
is by using the Property Changer.
| | 03:25 | If I select this text object and open
up my Property Changer, notice right here
| | 03:31 | under the Text group, I can see the text style.
| | 03:35 | If I click in this field and then click
the flyout, I can change the text style.
| | 03:41 | I can also change the text
justification or its height, rotation.
| | 03:46 | I can change my line space factor.
| | 03:48 | Right now it's set to 1.
| | 03:49 | Let me change it to 1.5 and I'll hit Enter.
| | 03:53 | Now 1.5 is a little large.
| | 03:55 | Let me click in this field again and I am
going to set this to 1.25 and I'll hit Enter.
| | 04:00 | Make sure and explore all the settings that
you have available in the Property Changer.
| | 04:04 | You'll be surprised by the amount of
things that you can change very easily.
| | 04:07 | Let me move outside the
palette and we'll let it collapse.
| | 04:12 | I am going to click my grip and move my
text up just a little bit more and then
| | 04:16 | I'll hit Escape to deselect.
| | 04:18 | As you can see, if you have to
edit any aspect of your text, height,
| | 04:22 | style, location or contents, AutoCAD allows
you to make your changes quickly and easily.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating bulleted and numbered lists| 00:01 | It's very common to find
numbered lists on construction drawings.
| | 00:05 | In the past, it was always a headache
to add or remove items from a numbered list,
| | 00:08 | because it meant a
lot of manual renumbering.
| | 00:12 | Well, that's not the case anymore, as all our
lists are fully automated and easy to change.
| | 00:17 | In this lesson, we are going to
learn how to create a numbered list.
| | 00:20 | On my screen, I have got
an architectural example.
| | 00:23 | This is a drawing of a landscape fence and
I would like to any list of notes to this drawing.
| | 00:28 | I am going to start out by panning this
over to the left to give myself some room and
| | 00:33 | then I'm going to create some multi-line text.
| | 00:35 | I'll click right here to specify
my first corner and then I'm going to
| | 00:40 | right-click and select Height from
the menu and make sure that my text type
| | 00:45 | is set to 2 inches.
| | 00:47 | I will then click again to set the size
of my column and let's zoom in a little
| | 00:51 | bit and we can start typing.
| | 00:54 | Type NOTES and we will hit Enter.
| | 00:56 | I will type my first number and then
here's the trick to creating a list.
| | 01:01 | Hit your Tab key after you create
the first number and that signifies to
| | 01:06 | AutoCAD that you're starting a numbered list.
| | 01:08 | I will then add my note and when I
hit Enter, notice AutoCAD adds the next
| | 01:13 | number for me and then formats my text
such that my word wrap looks appropriate.
| | 01:20 | All I have to do is keep typing notes and
AutoCAD takes care of all the work for me.
| | 01:27 | Now that I am finished with my
list, I am going to make a couple of
| | 01:29 | formatting changes of my own.
| | 01:31 | For one, I'm going to select
to this text and underline it.
| | 01:34 | Then I am going to come over and grab
this diamond and make my column width
| | 01:39 | a little bit wider.
| | 01:41 | Now that I'm finished, I'll click
on the screen to close the editor.
| | 01:45 | Let's take a look at how easy
it is to edit a numbered list.
| | 01:49 | If I'd like to change this, I'm going
to double click on the text and let's say
| | 01:54 | I'd like to add a note to my list.
| | 01:56 | I will click right after my fourth
note and hit Enter and AutoCAD picks up
| | 02:00 | right where we left off.
| | 02:04 | Now what if I'd like to remove a note,
maybe a note that's in the middle of the list?
| | 02:08 | To do that I'm going to click-hold-
drag across my text and they'll hit the
| | 02:13 | Delete key on my keyboard.
| | 02:16 | Notice AutoCAD removes the
note and renumbers the list.
| | 02:19 | Maybe I'd like to add some
space in between my notes.
| | 02:22 | These guys are awfully close together.
| | 02:24 | You'd think that you could add an empty
space by clicking after a note and hitting Enter.
| | 02:29 | Unfortunately AutoCAD adds another number.
| | 02:31 | I am going to hit my Backspace
key to take that number away.
| | 02:35 | Once again notice AutoCAD renumbers the list.
| | 02:38 | Now I did get what I wanted, but let
me show you a faster way we can do it.
| | 02:42 | I am going to click at the end of note
number 2, and I am going to hold down my
| | 02:45 | Shift key and hit Enter and AutoCAD
will give me a blank space between my notes
| | 02:51 | and when I am done making changes,
I will click on screen to close the editor.
| | 02:55 | Let's try something else.
| | 02:56 | I am going to double-click on this list and
maybe I don't want this to be a numbered list.
| | 03:01 | Maybe I'd like it to be a bulleted list.
| | 03:04 | To make that change, I will select all
of my notes and then I am going to come
| | 03:09 | up to the Paragraph panel
and click of this flyout.
| | 03:12 | This controls the type of list that we have.
| | 03:15 | Right now it's to Numbered.
| | 03:17 | If I click this option,
we'll have a bulleted list.
| | 03:20 | If I don't like that,
I can click the fly-out again.
| | 03:22 | Maybe I'd like a lettered list and
maybe I'd like it to be uppercase letters.
| | 03:27 | Once again when I am done,
I will click on screen.
| | 03:30 | As you can see, the list
creation is very flexible.
| | 03:33 | Making and editing your lists is
as intuitive as using your favorite
| | 03:37 | word processing program.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Incorporating symbols| 00:01 | Each discipline of drafting has its own
unique symbology and sometimes we need
| | 00:05 | to incorporate these
special symbols into our text.
| | 00:08 | In this lesson, we are going to learn
how to find these extra characters that we
| | 00:11 | don't typically see on our keyboard.
| | 00:14 | On my screen, I've got a
civil engineering example.
| | 00:17 | This is a cross-section of a
typical residential street.
| | 00:21 | This vertical line represents the
centerline of my street and I would like to
| | 00:26 | label this using a centerline symbol.
| | 00:29 | The centerline symbol is a typical
symbol used in civil engineering drafting.
| | 00:34 | To create my label I'm going to zoom
in and then I'm going to launch the
| | 00:38 | Multiline Text command.
| | 00:40 | I will specify my first corner and I'm
going to right-click and select Height
| | 00:48 | and make sure that my text height is set to 0.4.
| | 00:52 | I will then right-click again
and I'm going to select Justify.
| | 00:55 | I will use the middle center
justification and I will drag my box such that this
| | 01:02 | lower arrow is pointing
right at the end of the line.
| | 01:06 | All of our special symbols are located in
the Insert panel beneath this Symbol icon.
| | 01:11 | Let me show you how this works.
| | 01:13 | I am going to type the number 45 and
then I am going to click the Symbol icon
| | 01:19 | and I will select Degrees.
| | 01:21 | Notice I created a degrees symbol.
| | 01:23 | I am going to hit Backspace to take this away.
| | 01:26 | This time I'll choose plus/minus.
| | 01:28 | Once again I've added another symbol.
| | 01:30 | I am going to go back in and take a look
at the choices beneath this horizontal line.
| | 01:36 | In this list we see many of the
standard symbols that are used in civil,
| | 01:40 | mechanical, and architectural drafting.
| | 01:42 | For instance, here is the Delta symbol.
| | 01:46 | If you're a surveyor, never again do you
have to draw these little triangles by hand.
| | 01:50 | Now that we know how this works, I am
going to Backspace to take away my text
| | 01:55 | and we'll add our Center Line symbol.
| | 01:57 | The Center Line is located right here
and when I add to that my drawing, notice
| | 02:03 | it doesn't look as nice as you would think.
| | 02:06 | Let me mention that the text style that
I'm using has the Arial font assigned to it.
| | 02:12 | Let's zoom in a little bit and
we'll find out what happened.
| | 02:15 | I am going to click, hold and drag
across this text and notice AutoCAD changed
| | 02:20 | my font to Isocpeur.
| | 02:23 | That's because the centerline symbol is
not a native character in the Arial font.
| | 02:28 | Sometimes the symbol you choose
might not be available in your font.
| | 02:32 | Now I don't care for the way this looks.
| | 02:34 | I am going to click the flyout and I am
going to come down and select the Simplex style.
| | 02:40 | I know that this
character is native in that font.
| | 02:44 | That looks a little better.
| | 02:45 | Now that I am finished,
I am going to click on screen.
| | 02:47 | I am going to back up a little bit
and let's create another symbol.
| | 02:51 | Maybe I would like to add a
copyright symbol to this drawing.
| | 02:55 | Once again, we'll launch
the Multiline Text tool.
| | 02:57 | I am going to pick a point on screen and
then I will drag to set my column width.
| | 03:04 | Let's go back to the symbol list.
Unfortunately the copyright symbol doesn't
| | 03:08 | show up in this list.
| | 03:10 | If I want something extra, I am going
to come down and select the Other option.
| | 03:16 | This brings up the Character Map where
I can select from any character that's
| | 03:20 | native to the Arial font, or any
other font on my machine for that matter.
| | 03:27 | Now this list is quite extensive.
We do have a lot of choices.
| | 03:30 | Let me push this back up to the top.
| | 03:33 | Let me also mention that
these previews are kind of small.
| | 03:36 | If we click once on a symbol AutoCAD will
blow it up so it's little easier to see.
| | 03:42 | The copyright symbol is right here.
| | 03:43 | Let me select that.
| | 03:45 | I will then come down and click the
Select button, which moves my symbol into
| | 03:50 | the Characters to copy area.
| | 03:52 | Once my symbol is down here, I will click
Copy, which copies the symbol to my clipboard.
| | 03:57 | There is no magic to this at all.
| | 03:58 | It's just using the Windows Clipboard.
| | 04:01 | Let's close the Character Map and then
I'm going to paste this into the editor
| | 04:05 | by hitting Ctrl+V on my keyboard.
| | 04:08 | Now as a courtesy, AutoCAD
gave me an extra carriage return.
| | 04:12 | Let me click right after this
character, and I can finish my text.
| | 04:18 | While AutoCAD will probably never
have every symbol we could possibly need.
| | 04:21 | They have gone a long way to provide
us with many of the industry standard
| | 04:25 | symbols that we use on a regular basis.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Correcting spelling errors| 00:01 | In this lesson to learn how to
protect ourselves from ourselves.
| | 00:04 | I am speaking about spelling errors.
| | 00:07 | Let's face it, we have all done it.
Fortunately we don't have to worry about
| | 00:10 | that anymore, because AutoCAD is now
made it difficult to misspell words.
| | 00:15 | On my screen, I've got a
civil engineering example.
| | 00:17 | This is a drawing of a paving plan for
an existing restaurant and I'm at the
| | 00:22 | point in this drawing where I
would like to add some notes.
| | 00:25 | So I am going to zoom in right here
and let's create some multiline text.
| | 00:29 | I'll pick a point on the screen and
then I will right-click and make sure
| | 00:35 | that my text height is set to 4. We will
pick the other corner and I will start typing.
| | 00:43 | Notice I've misspelled the word.
| | 00:45 | More importantly AutoCAD noticed it
too and drew a line underneath that text.
| | 00:49 | Now if you are not seeing
the red line on your screen,
| | 00:52 | it's because this feature is turned off
and that's very easy to do on accident.
| | 00:57 | If we come up to the Spell Check panel
in our editor, the Spell Check button is
| | 01:01 | a toggle that turns the feature on and off.
| | 01:05 | To correct my word, I will right-click
over it and at the very top of the menu,
| | 01:09 | I can see AutoCAD's top three suggestions.
| | 01:12 | If these aren't going to work for me,
I can come down to More Suggestions to
| | 01:16 | see additional choices.
| | 01:18 | If this word happened to be spelled
correctly, I could add it to my dictionary,
| | 01:22 | or if I didn't want to go that far, I
could click Ignore All just to remove the
| | 01:26 | line from this word.
| | 01:28 | In this case I'm going to select the
correct spelling to fix my word and then
| | 01:32 | I will click screen to finish my label.
| | 01:35 | Now this is nice, the fact that
AutoCAD is monitoring everything we type for
| | 01:38 | spelling errors, but what if we got
this drawing from someone else and what it
| | 01:43 | already contains a lot of existing text?
| | 01:46 | How can we spell check this?
| | 01:49 | Let me show you where we can find the tool.
| | 01:51 | Now I don't know if you've noticed
this yet, but all of the text tools we've
| | 01:55 | been using so far have been
located in this Annotation panel.
| | 01:59 | This is actually a
miniature set of Annotation tools.
| | 02:02 | Notice there is also an Annotate tab on
our ribbon and this contains a full set
| | 02:07 | of all of the Annotation tools.
| | 02:09 | The spell checker is right here and
when this guy comes up on screen, you'll
| | 02:13 | find it works very similar to
a program like Microsoft Word.
| | 02:17 | First of all we need to identify
where we'd like to search for errors.
| | 02:21 | By default AutoCAD wants to
look at the entire drawing.
| | 02:24 | If I click at this button, I can
select a specific object to search.
| | 02:28 | I am going to click I Start and when I do,
AutoCAD pans and zooms around the
| | 02:32 | file looking for a word
that it doesn't recognize.
| | 02:36 | I say it doesn't recognize, because
if AutoCAD finds a word it doesn't
| | 02:40 | necessarily mean that it's misspelled.
| | 02:42 | It just means that AutoCAD doesn't
have that word in its dictionary.
| | 02:45 | In this case it's stopped on my road name.
| | 02:48 | We can see the word is not in the dictionary.
| | 02:50 | I can see AutoCAD's best suggestion for
this word and if this one isn't correct,
| | 02:55 | I have a list of additional
choices below that I can select from.
| | 02:59 | I can use these buttons on the right to tell
AutoCAD what I'd like to do with this word.
| | 03:04 | I can add it to my dictionary, I can
ignore this instance, I can ignore all
| | 03:09 | instances of this word, I can change the
word using AutoCAD's suggestion, or I can
| | 03:14 | change all instances of this word.
| | 03:17 | Now this word is spelled correctly, and I
don't necessarily want to add it to my dictionary.
| | 03:21 | So I am going to click Ignore.
| | 03:22 | Let me move this box up a little bit.
| | 03:26 | Now in this case, the word is
misspelled and if I look at the suggestion, I can
| | 03:30 | see this is correct.
| | 03:32 | So I'm going to click Change to fix my word.
| | 03:34 | AutoCAD has found another misspelled
word and once again the suggestion is good,
| | 03:39 | so we'll click Change.
| | 03:41 | In this case the word AutoCAD found is a
product name and this is a product name
| | 03:46 | that we see frequently in our drawings.
| | 03:48 | So I am going to add this to my dictionary.
| | 03:50 | That way this word will never
come up again as a spelling error.
| | 03:54 | Now that my spell check is
complete, we will click OK.
| | 03:57 | Now sometimes you may feel a little
hesitant about adding a word to your dictionary.
| | 04:01 | That seems awfully permanent.
| | 04:03 | Let me show you how we can make
some changes to our dictionary.
| | 04:06 | I am going to click the Dictionaries button.
| | 04:09 | Right up here at the top, we can
see that we're using the American
| | 04:11 | English dictionary.
| | 04:13 | We do have other choices and this list
below shows us all of the words that have
| | 04:17 | been added to our dictionary.
| | 04:19 | If I grab this slider and pull it
to the bottom, we can see SUPERPAVE.
| | 04:22 | If I'd like to remove this word, I can
select it from the list and click Delete
| | 04:29 | and then we'll click Close to
close up these dialog boxes.
| | 04:33 | As you can see, not only does AutoCAD
monitor everything we type, it also allows
| | 04:37 | us to spell check the stuff we didn't.
| | 04:39 | So spelling errors may
finally become a thing of the past.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
12. DimensioningCreating general dimensions| 00:01 | It's important to remember that
the drawings we create in AutoCAD are
| | 00:03 | construction drawings.
| | 00:05 | This means that someone somewhere will
be referring to our drawing in order to
| | 00:09 | construct their design.
| | 00:11 | Knowing this, we need to be sure
that our design is well dimensioned.
| | 00:15 | In this lesson we are going to learn
how to add dimensions to our drawing.
| | 00:18 | On my screen, I have got a mechanical example.
| | 00:21 | This is a drawing of a small gasket and
before I create my first dimension, take
| | 00:26 | a look at my layer control.
| | 00:28 | Notice I'm practicing good form.
| | 00:29 | I have already created a
layer for my dimensions.
| | 00:32 | As long as I'm here, I am going to
click the flyout so we can see a listing of
| | 00:36 | the layers in this drawing.
| | 00:38 | Our dimensioning tools are located
in the Annotation panel of the ribbon.
| | 00:42 | The flyout is right.
| | 00:45 | Let's start up by creating a linear dimension.
| | 00:48 | Maybe I'd like to dimension the
distance from the center of this circle to
| | 00:51 | the center of this one.
| | 00:53 | Now I have a running object snap set
for Center so I will click this circle and
| | 00:58 | this one and I will pull up
and click to place my dimension.
| | 01:02 | It is very important to use
object snaps when we create dimensions.
| | 01:06 | It's the only way your
dimensions are to be accurate.
| | 01:09 | Let's create another.
| | 01:10 | I am going to come up and click this
icon. Linear happens to be the default
| | 01:13 | now and we will dimension the distance
from the center of this circle to the
| | 01:18 | center of this one.
| | 01:20 | A linear dimension will give us the
horizontal or vertical distance between our two points.
| | 01:26 | It just depends on which way we pull our cursor.
| | 01:29 | I am going to pull this up and place
it at the endpoint of this arrowhead.
| | 01:34 | I am going to create one more.
| | 01:35 | This time I am going to hit the Spacebar
to go back into the command and we will
| | 01:39 | dimension from the center of the
circle to the center of this one.
| | 01:43 | And in this case, I'd
like the vertical distance.
| | 01:45 | So I am going to pull this
out and place it right here.
| | 01:49 | Now let's take a look at our layer control.
| | 01:52 | Notice we have a new layer, Defpoints.
| | 01:55 | Now, we didn't create this.
| | 01:57 | AutoCAD did as soon as it
placed the first dimension.
| | 02:00 | If I zoom in on one of these dimensions,
notice AutoCAD has placed the pixel at
| | 02:04 | the dimension location.
| | 02:05 | This is called a Defpoint and AutoCAD
is using these to maintain the accuracy
| | 02:10 | and location of our
dimensions. Now don't worry.
| | 02:12 | These little pixels won't plot;
| | 02:14 | nothing on layer Defpoints does.
| | 02:17 | I only mention it in the event you see
the layer and wonder where it came from.
| | 02:22 | Let's create another type of dimension.
| | 02:24 | I am going to click the flyout and
this time we'll select Aligned.
| | 02:28 | Aligned gives us the true distance
between two points. For instance, we will
| | 02:32 | dimension the distance from the endpoint here
to the endpoint here and I'll pull this out.
| | 02:37 | We will create one more. We will
dimension from the endpoint here to the
| | 02:42 | endpoint here. Unless your desire is to
have a horizontal or vertical dimension,
| | 02:48 | Aligned is probably the one
you are going to use most often.
| | 02:52 | Let's create an angular dimension.
| | 02:55 | Once again we will click the
flyout and I will select Angular.
| | 02:58 | To create an angular dimension all
I have to do is click on two lines.
| | 03:02 | I'll click this one and this one and
then I will click to place my dimension.
| | 03:08 | I am going to make one more.
| | 03:12 | Let's click this line and this one.
| | 03:14 | Let me zoom in a little bit and before
I place this, notice if I pull to the
| | 03:21 | outside I can dimension the opposite
angle and if I pull to the left or right,
| | 03:26 | I can dimension these supplementary angles.
| | 03:30 | Now knowing that, you may wonder if
it's possible to dimension an angle
| | 03:33 | greater than 180 degrees.
| | 03:36 | Let's create another angular
dimension and take a look at my cursor.
| | 03:39 | I can either specify my lines or if I
right-click, I can specify my vertex first.
| | 03:48 | Let's grab this vertex and then I will
grab the endpoint here and the endpoint
| | 03:53 | here to define my lines and notice AutoCAD
is giving me a dimension greater than 180.
| | 04:01 | Let's create a radial dimension.
| | 04:05 | To dimension a radius, all I have to do
is click on the arc or circle and I can
| | 04:09 | pull this out and place it.
| | 04:11 | I am going to hit the Spacebar to go
back into the command. I will select this
| | 04:15 | circle and we will pull out another
radial dimension and place it here.
| | 04:19 | We can also do diameter and we will
select this dimension, we will select the circle
| | 04:25 | and I will pull my leader out to here.
| | 04:28 | Notice AutoCAD adds the
diameter symbol automatically.
| | 04:31 | I am going to hit my Spacebar to go
back into the command and we will dimension
| | 04:37 | the diameter of this circle.
| | 04:41 | Using AutoCAD's dimensioning tools
along with our object snaps, we can
| | 04:45 | quickly and easily document our drawing and allow
a contractor to accurately reproduce our design.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating continuous and baseline dimensions| 00:01 | Creating dimensions one at a time is
okay, but what if we want to create a
| | 00:04 | string of dimensions?
| | 00:06 | In this lesson, we are going to
learn how to use the Continuous and
| | 00:08 | Baseline dimensioning tools.
| | 00:11 | On my screen, I have got a
mechanical part and I'd like to add some
| | 00:14 | dimensions to this drawing.
| | 00:16 | Now I have already created a layer
for these and I'd like to start out by
| | 00:20 | creating a linear dimension from
the center of this end to this end.
| | 00:25 | Now this is a nice overall dimension,
but what if I'd like to create a
| | 00:29 | dimensions string to label the
location of all of these other points?
| | 00:33 | Well, I could do that manually, but
instead I'm going to use a dimensioning tool
| | 00:37 | that will do most of the work for me.
| | 00:39 | Now, I am afraid the tool we are
looking for is not in this menu.
| | 00:43 | This is, in fact, a limited
amount of dimensioning tools.
| | 00:46 | Instead, we are going to go to the
Annotate Tab on our ribbon and this gives us
| | 00:50 | access to all the tools
associated with dimensioning.
| | 00:53 | The one we are looking for is right here.
| | 00:55 | This guy will let us create a
continuous dimension string. Here is the trick.
| | 01:00 | First, we have to create a dimension.
| | 01:02 | I'm going to create a linear dimension.
| | 01:04 | Notice we have the same menu here as we
had on the Home Tab. And I'll create it
| | 01:09 | from the center of this and to this
endpoint and I will place it here.
| | 01:14 | Now, I will come up and click my
Continue button and notice AutoCAD picks up
| | 01:18 | where I left off and I can click all
of these other endpoints and AutoCAD
| | 01:23 | creates a continuous dimension string.
| | 01:26 | When I am finished, I can hit my Escape key.
| | 01:29 | Now this is nice, but what if I'd like to
create a series of dimensions to a common baseline.
| | 01:34 | Well, we can do that also.
| | 01:37 | Once again, we are going
to create a dimension first.
| | 01:40 | Let's create a linear dimension from
the center here to the endpoint here and
| | 01:45 | we'll go down this time.
| | 01:46 | Then I am going to come up to the same
place and I am going to click the flyout
| | 01:50 | and we will select the Baseline tool.
| | 01:53 | As you can see, AutoCAD is picking up
where I left off except this time all
| | 01:57 | of my dimensions are from the original
baseline and when I am finished I'll hit Escape.
| | 02:02 | So in the event we need a series of
dimensions, it's nice to know we don't have
| | 02:06 | to create them one by one.
| | 02:08 | Whether they be a continuous string or
baseline dimensions, AutoCAD has a tool
| | 02:12 | to create them automatically.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Controlling appearance using dimension styles| 00:01 | All of the dimensions we create in our
drawing will conform to a dimension style.
| | 00:05 | A dimension style is very similar to
a text style and that it controls the
| | 00:09 | appearance of our dimensions.
| | 00:11 | In fact, text styles and
dimension styles work the same way.
| | 00:15 | Just like a change in your text style
will modify your existing text, a change
| | 00:19 | to your dimension style will
modify your existing dimensions.
| | 00:22 | On my screen, I've got a mechanical
example, this is a drawing of a small gasket
| | 00:28 | and I've already created
several dimensions in this drawing.
| | 00:30 | Let me mention that all of these
dimensions were created using the default
| | 00:35 | Standard dimension style.
| | 00:37 | To see my styles, I can click the
Annotation flyout and right here, I can see
| | 00:42 | the name of my current dimension
style. Right now it's Standard.
| | 00:45 | All drawings start with a
Standard dimension style.
| | 00:48 | You have to have at least one
style in order to create dimensions.
| | 00:52 | If I click the flyout, we can see that
that's the only style in this drawing.
| | 00:56 | To create a new style or make changes
to this style, I can click this icon.
| | 01:00 | This brings up my Dimension Style
Manager and right here, once again, I can see
| | 01:04 | the name of the current dimension style.
| | 01:07 | This area to the left will show me any
dimension styles that are defined in this drawing.
| | 01:12 | Over on the right, I've got some
buttons to help me manage my dimension styles.
| | 01:15 | For instance, I can set a different
style current, I can create a new style,
| | 01:20 | I can modify an existing style, I can
make overrides to a style, or I can compare
| | 01:25 | one style to another.
| | 01:28 | Now, since all of these dimensions
were created using an existing style,
| | 01:31 | we won't be creating a new
dimension style on this drawing.
| | 01:34 | If you did want to create a new
one you can click this button.
| | 01:37 | Here is where you would give your style
a name and notice that you will always
| | 01:41 | create a new style from an existing one.
| | 01:44 | So in this case, our new style
would start with the same settings as
| | 01:48 | the Standard style.
| | 01:49 | I'm going to hit Cancel and then
we'll click the Modify button to make some
| | 01:53 | changes to our existing style.
| | 01:56 | First of all, notice that there are 7 tabs of
settings that are used to create a dimension style.
| | 02:02 | Now, we're not going to be going through
what each of these settings does, but
| | 02:06 | I am going to tell you how you can
get information about each setting.
| | 02:09 | First of all, if you place your
cursor over a setting, AutoCAD will give
| | 02:12 | you more information.
| | 02:14 | Second of all, notice our settings are
organized into tabs, much like our ribbon.
| | 02:19 | Using the tab names will make it
easier to narrow down your search if you're
| | 02:23 | looking for a particular setting.
| | 02:25 | Let's go to the Lines tab.
| | 02:27 | Notice that our settings are
organized into major groups.
| | 02:31 | Also keep an eye on this preview.
| | 02:33 | If you're unsure what this setting
does, change it and watch the preview.
| | 02:37 | Notice this is suppressing my dimension line.
| | 02:39 | If I click this, it
suppresses one of my extension lines.
| | 02:43 | Using these techniques along with a
little experimentation will help you learn
| | 02:47 | what all of these settings do.
| | 02:49 | Let's make a change.
| | 02:50 | I'm going to go the Primary Units tab
and right now I can see the precision of
| | 02:54 | my dimensions is 4 decimal spaces.
| | 02:56 | I'm going to click the
flyout and we'll set that to 2.
| | 02:59 | Notice my Preview changes.
| | 03:01 | Let's click OK and then I'll move the
Manager over a little bit and we'll click Close.
| | 03:07 | Notice my dimensions now
conform to the new settings.
| | 03:11 | Let's make another change.
| | 03:12 | I am going to go back to the Dimension
Style Manager, and we'll click Modify.
| | 03:15 | Since we're on the Primary Units tab,
let me click the Unit format flyout and
| | 03:21 | I'll select Architectural.
| | 03:23 | This is how you can create
your architectural dimensions.
| | 03:27 | Now, this drawing set up for decimal, so
I'm going to put this back and I'd like
| | 03:31 | to make a change to my text height.
| | 03:33 | Well, that's probably on the Text tab
and if I look right down here, I can see
| | 03:37 | the setting that I'm looking for.
Right now this is set to 0.1800.
| | 03:42 | Let's change this to 0.125 and we'll
make another change. Under Text alignment,
| | 03:48 | I can see that my dimensions are
reading Horizontal on my screen.
| | 03:52 | Maybe I would like them to be aligned
with the dimension line. Let's click OK.
| | 03:55 | I'll move the Manager over a
little bit and we'll click Close.
| | 04:00 | Once again, all of my
dimensions are updating automatically.
| | 04:03 | I'm going to make one more change.
| | 04:04 | You know the arrowheads are a
little large. Let's fix those.
| | 04:07 | I'm going to back to the
Manager and click Modify.
| | 04:12 | Now that would probably be
on the Symbols and Arrows tab.
| | 04:16 | Right down here is the
setting that I am looking for.
| | 04:18 | Let's change our arrow size to 0.1200.
| | 04:22 | We'll click OK and Close.
| | 04:25 | Dimension styles give us the
same flexibility of the text style.
| | 04:29 | If we need to make global changes to
the appearance of our dimensions, we
| | 04:32 | can simply modify our dimension style and all
of our dimensions will update automatically.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Modifying dimensions| 00:01 | AutoCAD dimensions are very flexible.
| | 00:03 | We can position them wherever we want
and reposition them if necessary, if we
| | 00:07 | need to make room for new dimensions.
| | 00:09 | We can even break the rules a little bit,
when it comes to our dimension style.
| | 00:13 | Let's look at how we can modify
our dimensions to suit our needs.
| | 00:16 | On my screen, I've got a
mechanical example and this drawing contains
| | 00:20 | several dimensions.
| | 00:22 | Let's make some changes.
| | 00:24 | Let's say I'd like to move this dimension.
| | 00:27 | First I'll select it.
Notice I get several grips.
| | 00:30 | I'll then select the grip on top of my
number and then I'll pull out with my
| | 00:34 | cursor and click to finish my move.
| | 00:38 | But I also have full control
over the location of the text.
| | 00:41 | Notice if I pull the text
outside the extension lines, AutoCAD
| | 00:45 | automatically creates a leader.
| | 00:46 | I'm going to click right
here to place my dimension.
| | 00:50 | Let's try something else.
| | 00:51 | Maybe I'd like to line up these two dimensions.
| | 00:54 | Well, I'll select this one and this one,
and then I'll click the grip at the end
| | 00:59 | of this arrowhead, and I'll
place it to the end of this one.
| | 01:02 | We can use grips to modify the
location of any dimension in our drawing.
| | 01:06 | Let's select this Radial Dimension.
| | 01:09 | I'll grab the grip, and as I pull this
guy around, notice as I get to the top
| | 01:14 | of the drawing, the text
automatically flips to the other side.
| | 01:18 | Come back around again and it flips.
| | 01:19 | I can move this to any location in my drawing.
| | 01:23 | Now, take a look at this holes that
are on the four corners of my part.
| | 01:28 | Notice I don't have a dimension for these.
| | 01:30 | I'm going to create one now.
| | 01:32 | We'll create a Radial Dimension and I'll
select this circle and we'll pull it out to here.
| | 01:36 | Now, maybe I would like to
add some text to this dimension.
| | 01:40 | Let me zoom in a little bit.
| | 01:42 | Normally, if we want to edit
text, we double-click on it.
| | 01:45 | Here is the problem.
| | 01:46 | If I double-click on this text,
AutoCAD brings up my Property Changer.
| | 01:51 | So I'm going to hit Escape to
deselect this and we'll try something else.
| | 01:55 | If you want to edit text that's part
of the dimension, we're going to use a
| | 01:58 | command called ddedit.
| | 02:01 | This is the manual way for me
to launch AutoCAD's Text Editor.
| | 02:05 | I can then select this dimension.
| | 02:07 | I have access to my text.
| | 02:09 | Notice I have several of the same features
that we have with the Multiline Text tool.
| | 02:13 | I'm going to click my Right Arrow key to
jump pass to my dimension value and I'm
| | 02:18 | going to type typical.
| | 02:21 | I'll hit my Enter key and
then we'll type 4 Holes.
| | 02:25 | Notice my dimension value is a different color.
| | 02:27 | That's a visual cue to remind me that
value is being derived from my circle.
| | 02:33 | When I'm finished with my edits, I can
click on screen and then I'll hit Escape
| | 02:37 | to get out of the command.
| | 02:38 | Let's pan up and we'll make
a change to this dimension.
| | 02:41 | I'm going to select this one and
instead of selecting a grip, I'm going to
| | 02:47 | right-click and notice I have several
options at the top of my menu that will
| | 02:51 | allow me to modify my dimensions.
| | 02:53 | Let's take a look at Dim Text position.
| | 02:55 | I'm going to come down
and select Move text alone.
| | 03:00 | This allows me to position this
text any place I want independently of
| | 03:04 | the dimension lines.
| | 03:06 | I can drop it there. I can select this.
| | 03:08 | We can move it down here.
| | 03:10 | Select that again and we'll put it over here.
| | 03:12 | Let's reassociate this
text to our dimension lines.
| | 03:16 | To do that, I'll select it and right-click.
| | 03:18 | I'll go back to Dim Text position and
I'm going to come down and select Move
| | 03:22 | with dimension line and now this
dimension is acting the same as it did when I
| | 03:27 | put it in for the first time.
| | 03:29 | Now I'd like these lined up.
| | 03:30 | I'm going to click right here to place
it and then I'm going to select both of
| | 03:34 | these dimensions. I'll grab the
arrowhead of this one and I'll drop it at the
| | 03:38 | arrowhead of this one.
| | 03:42 | Let's back up and we'll make
a change to this dimension.
| | 03:44 | I'm going to select it.
| | 03:46 | Once again, we'll go to the right-click
menu. Notice I can modify my Precision.
| | 03:51 | Remember, I said that we can break the
rules when it comes to our dimension style.
| | 03:55 | Well, currently this
dimension is to two decimal spaces.
| | 03:59 | I'm going to change it to 5.
| | 04:01 | As far as this dimension is concerned,
it is taking all of my dimension style
| | 04:05 | settings with the exception of my precision.
| | 04:07 | I'm going to select this again and right-click.
| | 04:10 | Notice we can also use
this menu to flip arrowheads.
| | 04:14 | We can use it to create a new dimension
style from an existing dimension or we
| | 04:18 | can change a dimension
from one style to another.
| | 04:22 | Probably the most powerful tool
that we have to modify our dimensions is
| | 04:25 | our Property Changer.
| | 04:26 | I'm going to select this dimension again.
| | 04:30 | We'll open up the Property Changer and
there are several settings on my screen.
| | 04:34 | I'm going to click these little
triangles to collapse all of these.
| | 04:38 | Notice that the groupings that we
see are the same tabs that we have in
| | 04:41 | our dimension style.
| | 04:43 | This means that I can modify any
of my dimension style settings for
| | 04:47 | specific dimensions only.
| | 04:49 | Now, currently this guy is five
decimal spaces. I'm going to open up my Units group.
| | 04:53 | Right down here is my Precision.
| | 04:55 | We can also change it here.
| | 04:56 | I'm going to change this to the even integer.
| | 05:00 | We'll collapse this one and we'll open up text.
| | 05:03 | Maybe I'd like to change my rotation to
90 degrees and maybe I'd like to change
| | 05:08 | the height of this dimension to 0.2.
| | 05:13 | Now this is just an example. There is
one realistic change I would like to make.
| | 05:17 | Let me pan this up.
| | 05:19 | When I created my Radial Dimension here,
notice that AutoCAD added a big red
| | 05:23 | center mark at the center of my circle.
| | 05:26 | Now, none of my other
Radial Dimensions have this.
| | 05:28 | Let's remove this center mark.
| | 05:31 | I'll select my dimension.
| | 05:32 | We will go to the Property Changer and
in the Lines & Arrows group I can come
| | 05:38 | down and adjust my Center mark value to None.
| | 05:42 | As you can see, our
dimensions can be easily modified.
| | 05:46 | With a little effort we can position
or customize them to suit any situation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating multi-leaders| 00:00 | Multileaders can be just as important as
fimensions when annotating your drawing.
| | 00:05 | They can be used to specify building
materials, typical conditions, or give
| | 00:09 | special instructions to the contractor.
| | 00:11 | In this lesson, we're going to
learn how to create multileaders.
| | 00:13 | On my screen I've got a TREE PLANTING DETAIL.
| | 00:18 | Let's zoom in a little bit and I've got
an example of a multileader right here.
| | 00:22 | Sometimes these guys are
also referred to as callouts.
| | 00:26 | Now a multileader is nothing more than a
text object that's associated with the leader.
| | 00:31 | Let's create one. The Multileader tool is
located right here in the Annotation panel,
| | 00:36 | and the first thing we'll do is specify
the location of our arrowhead and then I'll
| | 00:41 | pull out to create my leader and
click and then I can enter my text.
| | 00:46 | Notice that the text associated with a
multileader is multiline text, so we have
| | 00:50 | access to all of the same formatting options.
| | 00:54 | As I type this, if I'd like word wrap,
I can click-and-hold on these arrows and
| | 00:59 | I can drag this over to
set the width of my column.
| | 01:03 | When I'm finished, I'll click on screen.
| | 01:06 | Now one of the nicest things about
multileaders is that AutoCAD lets me choose
| | 01:10 | how I'd like to create them.
| | 01:12 | Let's make another.
| | 01:14 | This time instead of placing my
arrowhead, I'm going to right-click and
| | 01:18 | I'm going to select Content first.
| | 01:21 | Now I can create my text column
and we can add the leader afterward.
| | 01:28 | As soon as I click on screen to finish
my text, I can then place my arrow and
| | 01:32 | I can place it to either side.
| | 01:35 | Now, it's important to note that the
method that you use last will become the
| | 01:39 | default the next time you launch the command.
| | 01:41 | I'm going to create one more and
I prefer to place the arrowhead first.
| | 01:46 | I am going to give myself a little
word wrap and we'll finish this up.
| | 01:56 | When it comes to adding callouts to your drawing,
nothing is as flexible and fast as multileaders.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Controlling appearance using multi-leader styles| 00:01 | You're probably wondering and you
were right, the appearance of your
| | 00:03 | multileaders is also controlled by a style.
| | 00:07 | In this lesson, we're going to
take a look at multileader styles.
| | 00:10 | On my screen, I've got a Tree
Planting Detail and this drawing contains
| | 00:14 | several multileaders.
| | 00:16 | Let me mention that all the
multileaders that you see were created using the
| | 00:19 | default Standard
multileader style. Let's take a look.
| | 00:23 | I'm going to come up to the
Annotation panel and click the flyout and
| | 00:27 | right here, I can see the name
of the current multileader style.
| | 00:30 | It happens to be Standard.
| | 00:32 | Just like with text and dimensions,
all AutoCAD drawings start with a
| | 00:35 | Standard multileader style because
you have to have at least one style to
| | 00:39 | create multileaders.
| | 00:41 | If I click this flyout, I can see that Standard
is the only multileader style on this drawing.
| | 00:46 | If I'd like to make a change to this style
or create a new one, I can click this icon.
| | 00:53 | This brings up my Multileader Style
Manager and you'll probably notice that this
| | 00:57 | looks a lot like the Dimension Style Manager.
| | 00:59 | In fact, it works the same way.
| | 01:02 | I can see the name of the current
style, I can see a listing of all of the
| | 01:05 | multileader styles in this drawing and
using these buttons on the right, I can
| | 01:10 | set a new style current, create a new
style or I can make changes to a style.
| | 01:15 | Notice I also have a Delete button here.
| | 01:17 | Now this is grayed out because I
only have one style in my drawing.
| | 01:20 | Let me drag this over a little bit.
| | 01:22 | Since I already have several existing
multileaders in my drawing, I'm not going
| | 01:27 | to create a new style right now.
| | 01:28 | Instead we'll make changes to the existing one.
| | 01:31 | If you did want to create a new style,
you could click the New button and you
| | 01:34 | could give your style a name and just
like with the dimension style, your new
| | 01:39 | multileader style will start using
the settings from an existing style.
| | 01:44 | I'm going to click Modify.
| | 01:46 | Notice that multileaders have far fewer
tabs and settings than dimension styles.
| | 01:51 | That's because there is
not as much to multileaders.
| | 01:54 | Essentially we have settings for the
Leader Format, Leader Structure, and Content.
| | 01:59 | Now we're not going to be going through
all of the settings in this dialog box.
| | 02:03 | One great place you can go to learn about
these settings is this hyperlink right here.
| | 02:07 | If you click this hyperlink, AutoCAD
will give you more information about the
| | 02:10 | concept of multileaders and their styles.
| | 02:14 | For information about specific settings,
simply hover over it with your cursor
| | 02:18 | and AutoCAD will give you more
information and then don't forget your preview.
| | 02:22 | This is a nice visual cue of what
your style is going to look like.
| | 02:26 | If you question what a setting does,
change it and take a look at your preview.
| | 02:29 | I am going to start out by making a
change to my text height. 0.18 is pretty big.
| | 02:34 | I'm going to knock this down to 0.12.
| | 02:37 | Let's click OK and then we'll click
Close and notice that all of my multileaders
| | 02:42 | conform to the new settings.
| | 02:43 | I'm going to make one more change.
| | 02:45 | Let's go right back to the
Multileader Style Manager and click Modify.
| | 02:50 | I'm going to go to the Leader
Structure and right here, the Landing Distance,
| | 02:55 | right now this is set to 0.36.
| | 02:58 | This controls the length of this landing.
| | 03:00 | Now, 0.36 is kind of long.
| | 03:02 | I'm going to move this down to
about 0.15 and I'll click OK and Close.
| | 03:08 | As you can see, multileaders hold the
same principle as text and dimensions.
| | 03:13 | Their appearance is controlled by a
style, which standardizes their look and
| | 03:17 | makes it easy to perform global changes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Modifying multi-leaders| 00:00 | Multileaders are one of the easiest
annotative objects to edit, which is nice
| | 00:05 | because in a busy drawing, they are one
of the first things you start moving to
| | 00:08 | give yourself more room.
| | 00:10 | In this lesson, we're going to
learn how to edit our multileaders.
| | 00:12 | On my screen I've got a drawing
that has several multileaders.
| | 00:16 | Let's make some changes to these.
| | 00:18 | I'm going to start out by zooming in,
and we'll center our screen on this one.
| | 00:23 | Let's talk about text first.
| | 00:25 | If you'd like to edit the text
associated with the multileader, simply
| | 00:29 | double-click on it. This takes you right into
the Text Editor and you can make your changes.
| | 00:36 | Since this is a multi-line Text Editor, we
have access to any of these features as well.
| | 00:41 | When I'm finished, I'll click on screen.
| | 00:44 | Now, what if I want to change
the position of my multileader?
| | 00:47 | I can do that with grips.
| | 00:48 | If I select this, notice
several grips pop up on my screen.
| | 00:53 | The grip in the upper left-hand corner
allows me to move my callout wherever I like.
| | 00:57 | In fact, if I move this far enough to the left,
it'll snap to the other side of my text.
| | 01:03 | Let's zoom in a little bit more.
| | 01:05 | Notice I have a grip on the arrowhead.
| | 01:07 | Using this grip, I can change the
location where this leader is pointing to.
| | 01:11 | I'm going to zoom in a little bit more.
| | 01:14 | We also have grips on our landing line.
| | 01:17 | Using these triangles, I can stretch out
the line to the left or right, and if I
| | 01:22 | use the middle grip, I can move the
entire callout using the landing line.
| | 01:27 | Using the grip on the right, I
can adjust the width of my column.
| | 01:30 | I'm going to back up a little bit, and
we'll take a look at this leader on top.
| | 01:38 | Maybe in this case
I would like to add a leader.
| | 01:41 | To do that, I'm going to come up to the
Annotation panel and click the flyout
| | 01:45 | right next to the Multileader
tool and I'll select Add Leader.
| | 01:50 | I'll then select my multileader and I can
pull out a new leader and place it here.
| | 01:56 | Now, AutoCAD always assumes
you want to put in more than one.
| | 02:00 | So I'll drag another one down and put it here.
| | 02:02 | If I was to move far enough to the right, I
could add my new leaders to the other side.
| | 02:06 | In this case, I'm finished.
So I'll hit my Escape key.
| | 02:10 | Now even though I have three leaders
on this guy, if I select them and move,
| | 02:13 | notice all of those
leaders go along for the ride.
| | 02:17 | Now, we can addleaders,
we can also take them away.
| | 02:20 | Once again, I'll click the fly-
out and I'll select Remove Leader.
| | 02:24 | I will then select my multileader and
then I'll select the leader that I would
| | 02:27 | like to remove, and I'll
right-click and select Enter.
| | 02:32 | Let's back up a little bit more.
| | 02:34 | Now, in this drawing, I have
several leaders on this side.
| | 02:36 | Maybe I would like to align them all.
| | 02:39 | To do that, I'll click the
flyout and we'll select Align.
| | 02:43 | I will then select all of my multileaders that
I would like to line up and I'll right-click.
| | 02:49 | Then I will select the multileader that
defines where I would like to align them to.
| | 02:54 | This looks a little bit weird.
| | 02:55 | Let me turn my Ortho on, and then I
will pull straight up and click and AutoCAD
| | 03:02 | has aligned these vertically.
| | 03:06 | Let's zoom in on this note to the left.
| | 03:08 | I'm going to take and
pan this over a little bit.
| | 03:10 | We can also make changes to our
multileaders using the Property Changer.
| | 03:14 | I'm going to select this.
| | 03:16 | It will open up the Property Changer.
| | 03:18 | I'll collapse some of these groups.
| | 03:20 | Notice that I have a Leaders and a Text group.
| | 03:23 | This is where I can make changes
independently of my multileader style.
| | 03:27 | For instance, my Arrowhead Size is 0.18.
| | 03:30 | Let's make this a little smaller.
| | 03:31 | I'm going to make it 0.10, and I'll hit Enter.
| | 03:35 | Let's change my Text Height.
| | 03:36 | Right now it's 0.12.
I am going to make it a little smaller.
| | 03:39 | Let's make it 0.10.
| | 03:42 | I can change my justification.
| | 03:43 | Maybe we can make this Left Justify.
| | 03:47 | Do some experimentation with your
Property Changer and you'll find that you can
| | 03:50 | make specific multileaders
look just about any way you like.
| | 03:54 | I'm sure you will agree that
multileaders are one of the most flexible
| | 03:57 | annotation tools, and they're as
easy to edit as your dimensions or text.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
13. Generating and Managing Reusable ContentInserting blocks| 00:00 | In this lesson, we're
going to talk about blocks.
| | 00:03 | Blocks are something that we use
whenever we have geometry that's repeated
| | 00:06 | throughout our drawing.
| | 00:07 | They are a lot like symbols.
| | 00:09 | I'm going to start out by inserting a
block into this drawing to give you an
| | 00:12 | idea of how they work.
| | 00:13 | On my screen I've got a
civil engineering example.
| | 00:16 | This is a site plan for a proposed restaurant.
| | 00:20 | Let's start out by zooming in on the
parking lot area and I'm going to center
| | 00:24 | one of these stalls on the screen.
| | 00:26 | I'm going to insert a
block that represents a car.
| | 00:29 | To do that I'm going to come up to the
Block panel and click the Insert button.
| | 00:34 | And when this dialog box comes up,
I'm going to make sure that the only check
| | 00:37 | that I see is this one on the left hand side
and then I'm going to come down and click OK.
| | 00:43 | We'll come back and talk about
this box in just a little bit.
| | 00:47 | Notice I'm holding a car
at the end of my cursor.
| | 00:50 | I can then position this in between
some parking stripes and I can click
| | 00:54 | to place it on screen.
| | 00:55 | This car is a block.
| | 00:58 | If I select this, notice
AutoCAD treats it as a single entity.
| | 01:01 | Let's hit Escape to deselect and we'll
insert another one and this time we'll
| | 01:05 | talk a little bit more about the dialog box.
| | 01:08 | Once again I'll click Insert.
| | 01:10 | In the name area I can click this
flyout and I can insert any block that's been
| | 01:15 | defined in this drawing.
| | 01:17 | Currently, I only have the one.
| | 01:19 | If we select our block name, we can see
a preview of the block right over here.
| | 01:23 | If we come down a little bit
further we can see three checkboxes.
| | 01:27 | Each one of these checks represents a question.
| | 01:29 | For instance, where do
you want to put your block?
| | 01:33 | How big do you want your block to be?
| | 01:35 | Do you want to rotate your block?
| | 01:37 | If there is a check in any of these
boxes, AutoCAD will ask me that question
| | 01:41 | when I insert my block.
| | 01:43 | So currently when I insert this sports
car again, AutoCAD is only going to ask
| | 01:46 | me for the Insertion point.
| | 01:49 | Click OK and I'm going to pan the
drawing down little bit and we'll place
| | 01:55 | the car right here.
| | 01:57 | Now I obviously didn't center
that too well inside that stall.
| | 02:01 | Take a look at this.
| | 02:02 | If I select my block,
notice I have a grip right here.
| | 02:05 | This grip represents the
Insertion point of my block.
| | 02:09 | That's the point at which I'm
holding it when I place it in the drawing.
| | 02:12 | We can use this Insertion point to help us
accurately position our blocks in our drawing.
| | 02:17 | I'm going to deselect this and
let's center it correctly in this stall.
| | 02:21 | I'm going to launch the Move command.
| | 02:23 | I'm going to select my block and right-
click and then I would like to pick this
| | 02:27 | up from the Insertion point, so
we'll use the Insert object snap.
| | 02:33 | Notice when I place my cursor on the
car, AutoCAD finds that point and when I click,
| | 02:39 | notice I'm now
holding it from that location.
| | 02:42 | Now where am I going to put it down?
| | 02:43 | Well, if I would like it to be
perfectly centered in the stall, I'm going to
| | 02:47 | Shift+Right-click and I'm going to use
the Midpoint Between 2 Points object snap
| | 02:52 | and I would like to place it to the
midpoint between this endpoint and this one.
| | 02:57 | Let's back up a little bit.
| | 02:58 | We will pan this up and
let's insert another block.
| | 03:03 | This time we'll see if we can position
it correctly in the stall as its inserted.
| | 03:08 | Once again I will click the Insert
button and as far as my questions are
| | 03:11 | concerned I do want AutoCAD to
ask me for the Insertion point.
| | 03:15 | In this case I would also
like it to ask me for a Rotation.
| | 03:19 | As long as we're here notice
there is one more check down on this
| | 03:21 | corner called Explode.
| | 03:23 | This will explode our block when it's inserted.
| | 03:25 | So, technically it's not a block any more.
| | 03:28 | It will be inserting the individual entities.
| | 03:31 | So, it's important if we want this to be
a block that there's no check in this box.
| | 03:36 | Let's click OK and then I'm going to
place this to the Midpoint Between 2 Points.
| | 03:42 | I'll grab this endpoint and this one.
| | 03:44 | Notice AutoCAD is now asking me for a rotation.
| | 03:47 | I can free pick a point on screen or
I can type in a rotation if I like.
| | 03:51 | I'm going to make this easy on myself.
| | 03:53 | I'm going to hit F8 key and turn on
my Ortho and then I can snap this to
| | 03:58 | whatever angle I like.
| | 04:00 | Then I can click to place my block.
| | 04:02 | By having this current geometry as
block, I'm sure you'll agree that it's
| | 04:06 | much easier work with.
| | 04:07 | It's certainly much easier to insert.
| | 04:10 | Now that we understand what a block is
and how to insert them in our drawing, in
| | 04:14 | our next lesson we'll learn
how to create our own blocks.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating blocks| 00:00 | Whenever we have duplicated geometry in
our drawing, it's a good idea to convert
| | 00:04 | that geometry into a block.
| | 00:06 | Generally speaking, a block is a group
of geometry that's been given a name.
| | 00:11 | In this lesson, we're going
to learn how to create a block.
| | 00:14 | On my screen, I have got
an architectural example.
| | 00:16 | This is a drawing of a proposed community park.
| | 00:20 | Just for a second, let's assume we're
a landscape architect and we'd like to
| | 00:23 | insert some trees into this drawing.
| | 00:26 | Now I've already created my first tree over to
the side. This guy has got a 25 foot diameter.
| | 00:32 | It represents a shade tree, and
currently, it's a bunch of individual entities.
| | 00:37 | Now I'm sure you'll agree it would be
very time consuming to redraw one of these
| | 00:41 | at each new location in the file.
| | 00:44 | Likewise, I don't want to copy this
geometry to each location, because we'll end
| | 00:48 | up with literally thousands
of entities in this drawing.
| | 00:51 | Instead, I'm going to
convert this geometry into a block.
| | 00:54 | To do that, I am going to come up to
the Block panel and click the Create
| | 00:58 | button, and then we'll click right
here in the Name area and we'll give our
| | 01:02 | block a name. I am going
to call this Shade Tree.
| | 01:06 | In the Base point area I will click the
Pick point button and then I'll select a
| | 01:11 | Base point for this block. This is
the insertion point or the point I'll be
| | 01:16 | holding the block when I
insert it into my drawing.
| | 01:18 | I am going to use the center of this
circle and then in the Objects area,
| | 01:25 | we'll click the Select objects button
and I'll select the objects that I'd
| | 01:29 | like to be part of my block.
| | 01:30 | I don't need this dimension.
That was more for you.
| | 01:32 | When I am finished selecting
geometry, I'll right-click.
| | 01:37 | Let's move this over just a little
bit and finally, what do I want to do
| | 01:41 | with this geometry?
| | 01:42 | Do I want to keep it as it is?
| | 01:44 | Would I like to convert this
into my first inserted block?
| | 01:48 | Or do I want to delete it?
| | 01:50 | In this case, I'm going to select
Delete. I really don't need this geometry
| | 01:54 | anymore. If I want it again,
I could just insert my block.
| | 01:56 | When I am finished, I'll click OK.
| | 01:59 | My block has been created, my geometry
has been erased, and we can erase this
| | 02:03 | dimension as well. We don't need this anymore.
| | 02:05 | I am going to back up a little bit,
and we'll pan over and let's insert a
| | 02:09 | tree into this drawing.
| | 02:10 | I am going to click the Insert button.
| | 02:13 | I can see my block name right
here and I would like to specify the
| | 02:16 | Insertion point on screen.
| | 02:19 | I will leave this Scale and the
Rotation unchecked, and I'll click OK, and
| | 02:24 | I'll place it right here.
| | 02:27 | Having this geometry as a block makes it
easier to move, copy or manipulate in my drawing.
| | 02:32 | For instance, if I needed another tree
I could insert another, or I can copy
| | 02:37 | this geometry. I am going to copy it
from the insertion point of the block and
| | 02:43 | I'll place another one right here.
| | 02:45 | We'll drop one over here.
| | 02:48 | I'll place one more over here.
| | 02:50 | Blocks can be used for trees, manholes,
fire hydrants, labels, plumbing fixtures.
| | 02:56 | Pretty much anytime you have multiple
instances of the same geometry, it's a good
| | 03:00 | idea to create a block.
| | 03:02 | Let's create another block and this time
we'll take the concept to another level.
| | 03:05 | I am going to turn on a layer I've
been hiding from you, layer alt-tree, and
| | 03:11 | then we'll zoom in on this geometry right here.
| | 03:13 | This line work represents another tree
symbol that you might see in a landscape
| | 03:17 | architect's drawing.
| | 03:19 | This one was created with a diameter of
one foot, and we'll use this diameter to
| | 03:23 | our advantage in just a second.
| | 03:25 | Let's convert this geometry into a block.
| | 03:27 | I am going to click my Create button.
We'll give this block a name.
| | 03:32 | I'm going to call this Ornamental Tree. We'll click
Pick point and we'll grab the Insertion point.
| | 03:42 | I am going to use the center of this circle.
| | 03:44 | I'll click Select objects and we'll
select the objects that will be part of our block,
| | 03:49 | and right-click and then I'm
going to delete this geometry, because I
| | 03:54 | really don't need it anymore.
| | 03:56 | Another important setting in
this dialog box is Scale uniformly.
| | 04:00 | I am going to make sure this is checked.
| | 04:01 | We'll talk about this
setting in just a little bit.
| | 04:04 | Finally, now that I am done, I'll
click OK. My block has been created.
| | 04:08 | Let's erase this dimension and I'll back
up and we'll insert some ornamental trees.
| | 04:15 | I'll click Insert.
| | 04:17 | This time I will select
my Ornamental Tree block.
| | 04:20 | I want AutoCAD to ask me for the
Insertion point. This time I would also like
| | 04:24 | AutoCAD to ask me for a
scale, and I'll click OK.
| | 04:30 | Let's say this tree
should have a 15-foot diameter.
| | 04:33 | Well, let me take my location on screen,
and then from my scale factor, I am
| | 04:37 | going to type 15 and hit Enter.
| | 04:39 | Remember the original
block had a diameter of one.
| | 04:42 | 15 times one is 15.
| | 04:45 | Let's insert another.
| | 04:47 | Maybe this block should have 10-foot diameter.
| | 04:52 | If I wanted to, I could click Insert and
I could say don't ask me the question.
| | 04:56 | I'm just going to hard
code the scale right here.
| | 04:58 | Maybe this one should have a 7-foot diameter.
| | 05:01 | Now remember when we check that box
that says Scale uniformly, that's what
| | 05:05 | controls these boxes right here.
| | 05:07 | By saying Scale uniformly, I'm only using
one number to adjust the scale of my block.
| | 05:12 | If Scale uniformly was not checked when
this block was created, I would have to
| | 05:16 | specify my length, width and
height scales independently.
| | 05:21 | I'll click OK and I'm inserting a 7-foot tree.
| | 05:25 | You know what, as long as we're here,
what if we'd like to change these?
| | 05:29 | If I select this tree and come over to
my Property Changer, notice right here,
| | 05:33 | I can see its scale is set to 15,
which means it has got 15 foot diameter.
| | 05:37 | Maybe it should have 20-foot diameter.
| | 05:40 | Maybe I wanted to do all
three trees at the same time.
| | 05:44 | I can select all of these, go to the
Property Changer, AutoCAD found 3 blocks.
| | 05:50 | I can see their scale varies. All of these
were supposed to be 10 foot diameter trees.
| | 05:56 | So as you could see, having this
geometry as a block makes it very flexible.
| | 06:00 | Anytime you have geometry that's
repeated throughout your drawing, it's wise to
| | 06:04 | consider converting that geometry into a block.
| | 06:07 | Blocks are faster to insert, easier to manage,
and they will keep your file sizes much smaller.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Leveraging blocks| 00:00 | Now that we know how to create a block,
let's expand on the concept and talk a
| | 00:04 | little bit about how to
use blocks to our advantage.
| | 00:07 | On my screen, I have got
an architectural example.
| | 00:09 | This is a drawing of a floor
plan for a proposed office building.
| | 00:13 | I am going to zoom in a little bit and
let me select some of these, because I
| | 00:16 | want to show you that virtually all of the objects
that you see were created using blocks and better yet,
| | 00:22 | each of these blocks was
created using real dimensions.
| | 00:25 | Let me show you what I mean.
| | 00:27 | I am going to hit Escape,
and let's zoom in on this room.
| | 00:30 | I'm going to select this desk. This
desk is obviously a block. We'll go to the
| | 00:35 | Property Changer and right here in the
Miscellaneous group, I can see the name
| | 00:39 | of this block is Mayline.
| | 00:41 | I created this block using
dimensions from a real Mayline desk.
| | 00:45 | That means that any time I want to
insert a Mayline desk into this floor plan,
| | 00:49 | all I have to do is insert my block
and if the block fits in the room, I know
| | 00:53 | the furniture will fit because the
block was created using real dimensions.
| | 00:57 | The fact that all of my objects were
created using blocks, means my furniture is
| | 01:01 | also easy to arrange and
rearrange inside the rooms.
| | 01:04 | For instance, I am going to launch my
Copy command and let's copy this desk from
| | 01:10 | the endpoint here, and
we'll copy it into this office.
| | 01:14 | Now, I don't like that my return is so
close to my doorway, so let's mirror this desk.
| | 01:19 | I am going to launch the Mirror command,
we'll select our block and right-click.
| | 01:24 | I would like to mirror it from the
endpoint here to the endpoint here and then
| | 01:28 | I'll right-click and yes, I
would like to erase the original.
| | 01:32 | Then I'll launch the Move command and
we'll pick this up from the endpoint here,
| | 01:37 | and we'll place it to the endpoint here.
| | 01:39 | In addition to rearranging and copying
my blocks, I can also insert new ones.
| | 01:43 | Let's place a chair into this office.
| | 01:45 | I am going to click Insert. I'll click
my flyout. Notice I have several blocks
| | 01:50 | in this drawing. I am going to select
chair, and I would like to specify my
| | 01:55 | Insertion point as well as
my Rotation and I'll click OK.
| | 02:00 | I am going to drop it right here, and
then I am going to lock my Ortho.
| | 02:05 | I'll pull to the left and I'll
click to finish placing my chair.
| | 02:09 | Notice I've already placed several
chairs in this drawing, and for some reason
| | 02:13 | this chair looks different than the others.
| | 02:15 | Remember this, because in a little bit
I am going to give you a quiz and you're
| | 02:18 | going to tell me why this chair looks different.
| | 02:20 | Let's pan over in this direction a
little bit and we'll talk about some
| | 02:24 | block best practices.
| | 02:27 | First of all, blocks should be
placed on the layer of their own.
| | 02:31 | In a drawing like this, maybe you
might create a layer and call it furniture,
| | 02:34 | and place all of your
furniture blocks on that layer.
| | 02:37 | Maybe you create a layer called plumbing and
put all of your plumbing blocks on that layer.
| | 02:41 | Now I took it to an extreme.
| | 02:43 | If I open up the Layer control, you can see I
have layers for specific types of furniture.
| | 02:48 | Let me hit Escape to close this.
| | 02:50 | And notice if I select to this
block, we can see it's on the
| | 02:53 | desks-executive layer.
| | 02:56 | I can see this block is on the
drafting-tables layer. This block is on the
| | 03:00 | leather furniture layer.
| | 03:02 | So it's personal preference.
| | 03:03 | You can be as general or specific as
you want, just make sure that you put
| | 03:07 | blocks on a layer of their own.
| | 03:09 | Also it's very helpful, if you create your
blocks from geometry that was drawn on layer 0.
| | 03:15 | Let's take a look.
| | 03:16 | First of all, I am going to set layer 0 current.
| | 03:19 | Then we'll zoom in on this
office and we'll create a new block.
| | 03:22 | I am going to draw a simple waste can.
| | 03:24 | Let's create a circle, we'll put it
right here and I'm going to give this
| | 03:29 | a radius of 8 inches.
| | 03:31 | I'll go ahead and create a new circle
at the center of this one and will give
| | 03:35 | this a radius of 7-1/2".
| | 03:39 | Okay, this geometry represents a
standard waste can, and it was drawn on layer 0.
| | 03:45 | Let's turn this into a block.
| | 03:46 | I am going to click create, we'll call
this waste can, I'll click my Pick point button,
| | 03:53 | and we'll use the center of
this block as its Insertion point.
| | 03:57 | I'll click Select objects and I would
like my block created from these two
| | 04:01 | circles and I'll right-click.
| | 04:04 | Finally, we'll delete
the originals and click OK.
| | 04:06 | Now, let's follow good form.
| | 04:09 | We'll create a new layer
for our waste can blocks.
| | 04:12 | Let me just call this waste cans,
and I will set the color to cyan.
| | 04:19 | Finally, let's set that layer current,
I can do it from the Layer control and
| | 04:24 | let's insert one of our new blocks.
| | 04:28 | I'll select it from the list, I'm
going to specify its location on screen and
| | 04:33 | I'm not going to worry about Scale or Rotation.
| | 04:36 | I'll place it right here and notice
that this block is taking on the properties
| | 04:45 | of the current layer.
| | 04:47 | If you create your block from entities
that were drawn on layer 0, that block
| | 04:51 | will assume the properties
of the layer it's inserted on.
| | 04:55 | That is actually a very powerful concept.
| | 04:58 | If I set my folding-tables layer current,
and we insert one of our waste cans,
| | 05:05 | notice once again it
looks like the current layer.
| | 05:08 | This means that we can have one symbol
and it can show up using different colors
| | 05:11 | and linetypes depending on what
layer we put it on. And as a bonus,
| | 05:17 | this is also a visual cue that we are
putting the block on the wrong layer.
| | 05:20 | Let me select this.
| | 05:22 | We'll click the Layer control and
we'll put this on the correct layer.
| | 05:27 | Finally, I am going to click my grip.
| | 05:29 | Let's turn off the Ortho and then I am
going to put the waste can over here.
| | 05:32 | Now, let me pan back over to this chair
and here's the quiz. Why is this chair red?
| | 05:40 | If I selected this, we can see the answer.
| | 05:42 | It was inserted on the doors layer.
| | 05:46 | This block was also created from
geometry that was drawn on layer 0, so it's
| | 05:51 | assuming the properties of the doors layer.
| | 05:54 | Let's put it on the correct layer,
and now it looks just like the others.
| | 06:00 | As you can see this file is
almost completely created from blocks.
| | 06:04 | Since we use blocks for this geometry,
as opposed to copying individual lines
| | 06:08 | and arcs, we have much more control
over our furniture and we can make fast
| | 06:12 | revisions with the assurance that our
geometry is consistent across the entire drawing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Redefining blocks| 00:00 | Probably the most compelling
reason to use blocks is that they can be
| | 00:03 | redefined if necessary.
| | 00:05 | By simply changing the geometry of one
of the blocks, every other instance of
| | 00:09 | that block will automatically update.
| | 00:11 | In this lesson, we're going to
learn how to redefine a block.
| | 00:14 | On my screen I have got a floor
plan for a proposed office building.
| | 00:18 | Let's zoom in a little bit and
notice that I've already inserted several
| | 00:22 | chairs into this drawing.
| | 00:23 | Now, let's assume my chair block is
based on the dimensions of a real chair, and
| | 00:29 | maybe after inserting all these,
we decided to go with a different model.
| | 00:33 | Now, I don't want to draw a new chair
and then reinsert one at each of these
| | 00:37 | locations. Instead I'm going to
redefine my existing chair block.
| | 00:42 | To do that, I will zoom in on any of
the existing chairs and to redefine this,
| | 00:47 | it's just like editing text.
| | 00:49 | All I have to do is double-click on it.
| | 00:53 | AutoCAD will then show me a preview of
the block I am going to edit.
| | 00:56 | At this point I can also choose
a different block, if I like.
| | 00:59 | Let's click OK, and this
brings up the Block Editor.
| | 01:04 | Notice that my model space background
has changed color, as a visual cue that
| | 01:08 | I'm in the Block Editor.
| | 01:09 | Also notice that we have a new Block
Editor tab on our ribbon. We will see this tab
| | 01:14 | and these tools
anytime we're editing blocks.
| | 01:18 | Now as you can see the Block
Editor does a lot of things.
| | 01:20 | For right now, we're just going
to make a simple geometric change.
| | 01:23 | Let me select some of this geometry,
just so that I can show you that the editor
| | 01:28 | is giving us access to our individual entities.
| | 01:30 | It's essentially the same as it was when I
was creating this block for the first time.
| | 01:34 | I am going to deselect my geometry.
| | 01:36 | Let's go down to the Home tab and
I'm going to launch the Erase command.
| | 01:41 | We'll erase the seat portion of this
chair, because we'll say the new chair
| | 01:45 | has got a round seat.
| | 01:47 | Let's launch the Circle command and I'll
create a circle from the center of this
| | 01:51 | arc to the endpoint of this line.
| | 01:54 | We could make other changes or
additions if we wished. For right now this
| | 01:57 | will be good enough.
| | 01:58 | This will represent the
geometry of our new chair.
| | 02:02 | Let's go back to the Block Editor. I am
going to come down and click Save Block,
| | 02:06 | and then I'll click Close.
| | 02:08 | Notice that all instances of
that chair block have been updated.
| | 02:12 | Redefining a block is probably one
of the biggest timesavers in AutoCAD.
| | 02:16 | If you have the foresight to use blocks
in your drawing, making global changes
| | 02:20 | later can be done in seconds instead of hours.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Building a block library| 00:00 | Once you start using blocks, it won't
be long before you'll want to create a
| | 00:04 | library of your common symbols, such
that you can use them in other drawings.
| | 00:08 | In this lesson we are going to learn
how to use the Design Center to build a
| | 00:11 | custom block library.
| | 00:12 | On my screen I have got an
architectural example and this drawing
| | 00:16 | contains several blocks.
| | 00:18 | I am going to click my Insert button
and if I click the Name flyout, we can see
| | 00:22 | a listing of all of the blocks that
have been defined in this drawing.
| | 00:25 | Now, one of the drawbacks to a block
is that it only exists in the file in
| | 00:29 | which it was created.
| | 00:31 | That means if I was to start a new
drawing right now and try and insert a block,
| | 00:35 | this list would be empty.
| | 00:36 | What we are going to do is learn how
to take the blocks that are in this file
| | 00:40 | and use them in any drawing that we want.
| | 00:43 | So let's close this and I am
going to close this drawing also.
| | 00:47 | Don't forget the name. 05_office_bldg.
| | 00:52 | Let's create a new AutoCAD drawing.
| | 00:54 | We will use the default acad template.
| | 00:57 | Let's do one more thing.
| | 00:58 | Let's set this drawing to architectural units.
| | 01:01 | To do that, I will click to open the
Application menu, I will come down to
| | 01:05 | Drawing Utilities and then
I'll come over and select Units.
| | 01:09 | In the dialog box under Length, I will
click the flyout and set this to Architectural.
| | 01:14 | Since the drawing that contains my
blocks is set to Architectural, I want to
| | 01:18 | make sure that this drawing is set to
the same units. That way AutoCAD doesn't
| | 01:21 | try and resize my blocks when I
insert them into this drawing.
| | 01:25 | Now that our units matched,
let's open up the Design Center.
| | 01:29 | The Design Center is used to move
content from one drawing to another.
| | 01:33 | Now there are two ways we can open it.
| | 01:35 | One way is by going to the View tab and
then come down to the Palettes panel and
| | 01:40 | click the icon right here.
| | 01:42 | Another way to open the Design Center
is by hitting Ctrl+2 on your keyboard.
| | 01:47 | And the first thing that we notice when
the Design Center opens up is that it's
| | 01:50 | a palette, meaning that I can
anchor this or dock it to my interface.
| | 01:55 | Generally speaking, the tool itself
functions a lot like Windows Explorer.
| | 02:00 | I can grab this slider,
and I can move up and down.
| | 02:02 | I can navigate through the
hard drive on my machine.
| | 02:05 | I can click these plus icons
to jump in and out of folders.
| | 02:09 | When we first open the Design
Center, AutoCAD defaults to the
| | 02:12 | DesignCenter folder, which is
located inside the Sample folder inside
| | 02:17 | your AutoCAD 2010 directory.
| | 02:20 | Since I've already opened this folder,
notice it contains several drawings.
| | 02:24 | Feel free to explore the content in
these files as many of them are based on
| | 02:28 | real-world production work.
| | 02:30 | Right now, I'd like to
navigate to a different folder.
| | 02:33 | But before I leave, let's make
it easy to return to this one.
| | 02:37 | If I right-click on this folder,
I can come down and select Set as Home.
| | 02:42 | That means no matter where I navigate
on my hard drive, I can always return to
| | 02:45 | this folder by coming up
and clicking the Home icon.
| | 02:48 | I am going to grab this slider, we will
push it to the top and I will grab this
| | 02:52 | slider and we will pan over a little bit.
| | 02:54 | Let's close up my directories and I
am going to look inside the Exercise
| | 02:58 | Files folder and then we will
navigate into the chapter_13 folder,
| | 03:04 | scroll this down just a little bit and
where the Design Center surpasses Windows
| | 03:08 | Explorer is right here.
| | 03:10 | Take a look at this icon.
| | 03:12 | If I click this plus, I can navigate
into this drawing and AutoCAD shows me a
| | 03:17 | list of all those things
that I can steal from this file.
| | 03:21 | Let's select Blocks and notice in the
pane on the right I can see a preview of
| | 03:26 | all the blocks that exist in this drawing.
| | 03:29 | To bring one of these blocks into my
current drawing, I will click, hold and
| | 03:34 | drag it in and then release.
| | 03:36 | I am going to zoom out a little bit
and it looks like I have to do a regen.
| | 03:43 | Let's type re and hit Enter.
| | 03:48 | Let's bring in another block.
| | 03:49 | I am going to bring in the leather chair.
| | 03:51 | Once again click, hold and drag it in.
| | 03:54 | Now the only thing we're really
missing when we insert blocks this way is we
| | 03:58 | don't have a whole lot of precision.
| | 04:00 | We are not holding the block from our
insertion point when we place it in the drawing.
| | 04:04 | If you'd like to insert one of these
blocks using the standard dialog box,
| | 04:08 | simply double-click on it.
| | 04:09 | Then we can decide if we want
AutoCAD to ask us the three questions.
| | 04:15 | And when I place this, I'll be
holding it from a logical insertion point.
| | 04:21 | Imagine if we navigate it to another drawing
and brought an additional furniture blocks.
| | 04:25 | Maybe I could name this
current drawing furniture.dwg.
| | 04:30 | I could then save this on my hard drive
and the next time I needed a furniture block,
| | 04:34 | I could use Design Center to
navigate to this drawing and I could select
| | 04:38 | from any of my standard symbols.
| | 04:39 | Imagine creating a drawing that
contained all of your landscape symbols.
| | 04:44 | You could create a drawing that
contains all of your fixtures and appliances.
| | 04:48 | Essentially a block library is
nothing more than a drawing that contains
| | 04:52 | your common symbols.
| | 04:53 | I am going to save this drawing. I will
come down and click Save As and I'd like
| | 04:59 | to save this in the chapter_13 folder
inside the Exercise Files directory and
| | 05:04 | I am going to call this call furniture symbols.
| | 05:10 | Now at any point in the future, if I
create another furniture block, I can use
| | 05:14 | Design Center to add it to
my furniture symbols drawing.
| | 05:18 | Using the Design Center, we can
easily organize a custom block library that
| | 05:22 | holds all the symbols we use most.
| | 05:25 | And later on, as we create more
symbols we can return to the Design Center to
| | 05:28 | add them to our library.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
14. Accessing Specialized ToolsQuerying drawing using rollover tool tips| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to talk
about a tool that you've probably already
| | 00:03 | discovered on your own.
| | 00:05 | It doesn't take long before you notice
that if you hover over an entity, AutoCAD
| | 00:09 | will display a pop-up that tells
you a little bit about the object.
| | 00:13 | This is called a rollover tooltip and
we can use these to get information about
| | 00:18 | the entities in our drawing.
| | 00:20 | For instance, let's hover over this wall.
| | 00:22 | Notice AutoCAD tells me what this
object is, as well as some general
| | 00:26 | property information.
| | 00:28 | Now, if you're not seeing rollover
tooltips, it's because the feature is
| | 00:31 | turned off on your system.
| | 00:32 | Let me show you where you
can go to turn it back on.
| | 00:34 | We are going to visit our Options, so I
will right-click, we will come down and
| | 00:40 | select Options and if we go to be
Display tab, there is a check box right here
| | 00:46 | that allows us to turn our
rollover tooltips on and off.
| | 00:49 | I am going to leave mine
on, and we will click OK.
| | 00:52 | Using this tool is a lot
like interrogating your drawing.
| | 00:56 | What layer is this on?
| | 00:57 | It's on the countertop layer.
| | 00:59 | Is this stool a block? Yes, it is.
| | 01:01 | How about my stove? Is this a block?
| | 01:04 | No, it's not.
| | 01:05 | It's obviously a Polyline and
these guys are individual circles.
| | 01:10 | Since I'm not actually selecting my
geometry, this is a fast way to get information.
| | 01:14 | Now rollover tooltips do have a flaw,
and it has to do with text, specifically
| | 01:20 | text that was created using
a TrueType font. Watch this.
| | 01:24 | Let me place my cursor on this
text and notice there's no tooltip.
| | 01:29 | In fact, I can hover in here all
day long and they will never show up.
| | 01:33 | If you're dealing with a TrueType font
and you want to see your tooltips, you
| | 01:36 | have to hover slightly outside the text.
| | 01:39 | I know it seems odd but once you
understand the tool's weakness, it's pretty
| | 01:44 | easy to work around.
| | 01:46 | The beauty of the rollover tooltip is
that you can get information without
| | 01:49 | having to select your geometry.
| | 01:51 | Because of this, rollover tooltips can be
the fastest way to review your drawings.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Taking measurements using the Distance command| 00:00 | Finding the distance between two points
doesn't always require us to create a dimension.
| | 00:05 | Sometimes just knowing the
numeric value is all we want.
| | 00:08 | At times like these we can
use AutoCAD's Distance command.
| | 00:11 | On my screen, I have got an example of
a site plan and this drawing was created
| | 00:15 | such that each unit equals 1 foot.
| | 00:18 | Now I would like to verify some of
the measurements in this drawing.
| | 00:22 | So, let's zoom in a little bit and we
will start up by finding the width of
| | 00:26 | this parking stall.
| | 00:28 | To do that, I'm going to
use the Distance command.
| | 00:30 | Distance is located in the Utilities panel.
| | 00:33 | If I click this flyout, we can find
it right here at the top of the menu.
| | 00:37 | Note that Distance happens
to be the default command.
| | 00:40 | So if I wanted to, I could also
launch it by clicking this big icon.
| | 00:44 | Now to find a distance, essentially
we are just going to pick two points on
| | 00:47 | screen and AutoCAD is going to
tell us how far apart they are.
| | 00:51 | I am going to select the endpoint
here and the endpoint here and I've got a
| | 00:55 | distance of nine units, so
the stall must be 9 feet wide.
| | 00:59 | If I would like to take another
measurement, I can repeat the command by
| | 01:02 | hitting the Enter key.
| | 01:03 | Let's find the width of this ramp.
| | 01:07 | Once again, I will select the
endpoint here and the endpoint here.
| | 01:11 | And this ramp is obviously 5 feet wide.
| | 01:13 | It's very important to make sure
that you're using object snaps when
| | 01:16 | you're finding distances.
| | 01:17 | It's the only way to ensure that
your measurements are accurate.
| | 01:20 | I am going to do one more.
| | 01:22 | Let's hit Enter, we will back up a little
bit and we will find the width of this aisle.
| | 01:27 | So I'd like to distance from the
endpoint here to perpendicular to here and I
| | 01:35 | can see that's 28 feet.
| | 01:37 | When I am finished using the command,
I can come down and select Exit or I
| | 01:40 | can hit the Escape key.
| | 01:43 | Now finding distances one of time is
okay, but what if I'd like the cumulative
| | 01:47 | total of multiple distances.
| | 01:49 | For instance, maybe I'd like to find
the perimeter of my property boundary.
| | 01:54 | Once again, I will launch the
Distance command, I will select my first
| | 01:58 | Endpoint and then I will right-click
and select Multiple Points and then I'll
| | 02:04 | click the Endpoint here.
| | 02:09 | At each point I click, AutoCAD is
adding the distance to the previous
| | 02:12 | measurements, until I come around and
finish and then I will right-click and
| | 02:17 | select Total and I can see the total
length is slightly more than 1293.7 feet.
| | 02:26 | So if your desire is to simply
verify some measurements in your drawing,
| | 02:29 | whether it be one of the time or a
cumulative total of several measurements,
| | 02:34 | you can use AutoCAD's Distance
command and avoid the hassle of producing
| | 02:37 | unnecessary dimensions.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Modifying properties using the Quick Properties tool| 00:00 | In this lesson, we are going to
learn the fastest way to change the
| | 00:02 | properties of our objects.
| | 00:04 | I am speaking of the Quick Properties tool.
| | 00:07 | This tool is like having a miniature
property changer, right at your cursor.
| | 00:11 | And I'd like to make some changes to
some of the entities in this drawing.
| | 00:15 | Let's turn on the Quick Properties tool.
| | 00:18 | Quick Properties is actually a mode
setting, we can find the icon right down here.
| | 00:22 | Let me click to turn it on and we don't
notice anything different on our screen,
| | 00:27 | until we select something.
| | 00:30 | I am going to select this circle and
when the tool comes up, notice it looks
| | 00:33 | exactly like our property changer.
| | 00:36 | Essentially, it is the exact same thing.
| | 00:38 | It's just a smaller set of settings.
| | 00:40 | It's the settings that you would
probably use most often, based on the object
| | 00:44 | that you have selected.
| | 00:45 | Now it is coming up in a collapsed state.
| | 00:48 | If I place my cursor over the tool,
it will expand and give me access to
| | 00:51 | additional settings.
| | 00:53 | In this case, let's change the radius.
| | 00:55 | I will click in this field and we will
set this to 0.25 and I will hit Enter.
| | 01:00 | When I am finished, I'll hit my Escape
key to deselect the circle and notice
| | 01:04 | the tool closes on its own.
| | 01:06 | Let's make another change.
| | 01:08 | Currently, these two lines are on
the wrong layer. I'd like to fix that
| | 01:12 | so I will select this line and this one.
| | 01:14 | I will come up the Layer field and click,
we'll select the flyout and I'll put
| | 01:19 | these guys on the centerlines
layer and I will hit Escape.
| | 01:23 | As you can see by having our properties close
to our cursor, it's very fast to make changes.
| | 01:27 | I am going to select this circle again.
| | 01:30 | We'll bring the tool up one more time
and this time we'll talk a little bit
| | 01:33 | about the tool itself.
| | 01:35 | In the upper-left, I have got this
bumpy-looking area. This is a handle.
| | 01:39 | If I click and hold on this, I can
place the tool wherever I like on my screen,
| | 01:44 | in the event it gets in my way.
| | 01:46 | If I move over and click the Options
icon, I can adjust the Settings that are
| | 01:51 | associated with this tool.
| | 01:52 | For instance, Palette behavior, this is
what controls the collapsing of the palette.
| | 01:58 | Right now, I can see that it will collapse and
when it's in a collapsed state, I will see 3 rows.
| | 02:04 | Also Palette Location, where is
it going to come up on my screen?
| | 02:08 | Is it going to come up at a Static
location, or the at same place each time, or
| | 02:12 | is it going to come up in relation to my cursor?
| | 02:15 | If it does, I have control over where
it comes up around my cursor, as well as
| | 02:21 | how far away from my cursor it's
going to be, measured in pixels.
| | 02:25 | Let's click OK and I am going to
set this circle back the way it was.
| | 02:29 | I will change this back to 0.5 and
hit Enter and then we'll it Escape.
| | 02:36 | Let me show you one more thing.
| | 02:38 | You are going to notice that some of the
objects that you select aren't going to
| | 02:41 | have all the properties that you'd like.
| | 02:43 | For instance, if I select this dimension,
notice I have no control over the layer.
| | 02:48 | That's what this button is for.
| | 02:50 | If I click Customize, I can see,
right here, that I've selected a Rotated
| | 02:56 | Dimension and over on the right, I can
see checks showing all the properties
| | 03:00 | that are showing up in my Quick Properties tool.
| | 03:02 | Well, I would like to be
able to change my layer as well.
| | 03:06 | So I will select this, I
will click Apply and OK.
| | 03:12 | And from now on, when I select the dimension,
I'll have the ability to change its layer.
| | 03:20 | It is important to note that all
dimensions are not the same. If I select this
| | 03:23 | Radial Dimension, notice it's a different type.
| | 03:27 | So, I have to go through the same process to
add that setting to this type of dimension.
| | 03:33 | Using the Quick Properties tool, we can
make many of our property changes much
| | 03:36 | faster because the settings
are just inches from our cursor.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Automating calculations using the Quick Calculator feature| 00:00 | Another helpful tool AutoCAD
gives us is the Quick Calculator.
| | 00:04 | But makes a Quick Calculator nice is
that it can be used transparently within
| | 00:07 | our AutoCAD commands.
| | 00:09 | Let me show you what I mean.
| | 00:11 | On my screen, I have got some sketch geometry.
| | 00:13 | Let's take a look at this circle first.
| | 00:16 | Maybe I'd like to create a new circle
and I'd like its radius to be one-half the
| | 00:20 | radius of this existing one.
| | 00:22 | Well, I am going to launch my Circle
command and I will create my circle from
| | 00:27 | the center of this one.
| | 00:28 | Now, what's my radius is going to be?
| | 00:30 | This is where we typically get our
handheld calculator, but you know what?
| | 00:34 | We don't have to do that.
| | 00:35 | AutoCAD has a built-in calculator.
| | 00:38 | I am going to hit Ctrl+8
to bring it up onscreen.
| | 00:42 | Notice, right here, it says
Active Command: Circle.
| | 00:45 | That means whatever value I come up
with AutoCAD is going to apply it to
| | 00:48 | the Circle command.
| | 00:50 | Now since this is the first time we've
launched the calculator, it's in a collapsed state.
| | 00:54 | I am going to click this more than
button, so we can see the numeric keypad.
| | 00:58 | And I'm going to click 2.143/2 =. There's my value.
| | 01:08 | Let's come down and click Apply and
notice AutoCAD dumps that value to my
| | 01:12 | command line and at this point I can
hit Enter on my keyboard to accept it.
| | 01:17 | Let's take it one step further.
| | 01:18 | Maybe I'd like to create a circle
whose radius is half of this one.
| | 01:23 | Once again, we will launch the Circle
command and we will create our circle from
| | 01:27 | the center of this one and for my
radius, I am going to let the computer
| | 01:31 | figure it out. I am going to hit
Ctrl+8 to bring up the calculator.
| | 01:35 | Take a look at this area above.
| | 01:37 | This is our history.
| | 01:39 | AutoCAD keeps track of
our previous computations.
| | 01:42 | The nice thing is I can steal from the
history. If I double-click this value,
| | 01:47 | AutoCAD moves it into the expression
area and I can use it in my new equation.
| | 01:51 | I am going to click divided by 2.
| | 01:54 | We can also use the buttons on our keyboard.
| | 01:56 | I will click = then Apply and then I
will hit Enter to accept the value.
| | 02:01 | I'd like to do one more.
| | 02:03 | Let's create a circle whose
radius is twice this original one.
| | 02:06 | I am going to right back into the command.
| | 02:08 | I will select the center of this circle.
| | 02:11 | I will hit Ctrl+8 and notice that I
can steal from both sides of my history.
| | 02:17 | This is my previous equation.
| | 02:19 | I am going to double-click on this to
move it into my expression area, and I
| | 02:23 | will change this to an asterisk.
| | 02:26 | The asterisk represents multiplication.
| | 02:28 | I will click Apply and Enter.
| | 02:31 | Let's try something else.
| | 02:33 | This geometry on the right
represents a simple square.
| | 02:37 | Maybe I'd like to offset this line and
divide its width into five equal parts.
| | 02:43 | Let's launch the Offset command and
what's my offset distance? I'm not sure.
| | 02:47 | I am going to hit Ctrl+8 to bring up
the calculator. And you know what?
| | 02:51 | At this point, I don't even
know how long this line is.
| | 02:54 | Let's come up and click this button,
this stands for distance between two points.
| | 02:59 | I will then click this point and this one.
| | 03:03 | Notice AutoCAD places that
distance in my expression area.
| | 03:06 | From here, I can type divided by five.
| | 03:09 | Let me mention that we have only scratched
the surface of what this calculator can do.
| | 03:14 | If you'd like to explore this tool
further, click the Help icon and AutoCAD will
| | 03:19 | give you more information.
| | 03:21 | Let's click Apply and then I'll hit Enter to
accept that value and I can offset my line.
| | 03:27 | I will offset one here, and here and here.
| | 03:31 | While the Quick Calculator may not
completely replace the handheld calculator
| | 03:36 | we keep at our desk,
| | 03:37 | it certainly makes
computations, within AutoCAD, much easier.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
15. PlottingCreating quick plots| 00:00 | At some point in our design process,
we'll need to produce a hard copy of our work.
| | 00:05 | Let's look at how we can create a quick
print of our drawing for review purposes.
| | 00:09 | On my screen, I have a mechanical example.
| | 00:11 | Let me mention that the units for
this drawing were set to Decimal Inches.
| | 00:15 | So, if I zoom in a little bit, I can see that
my part is 12 inches wide by 12 inches tall.
| | 00:23 | So, we're dealing with a
relatively small drawing.
| | 00:26 | I would like to produce a hard copy
of this guy and I don't require the
| | 00:30 | formality of a title block.
| | 00:32 | I pretty much want to print this
drawing on paper, so I can put it in someone's
| | 00:35 | hands for the review.
| | 00:37 | To do that, I am going to come up to the
Quick Access toolbar and launch the Plot command.
| | 00:42 | This brings up my Plot dialog box
and before we move on, if you have any
| | 00:47 | questions about plotting, one great place
you can go is this hyperlink right here.
| | 00:52 | If you click this, AutoCAD will give
you additional information for putting
| | 00:55 | your designs on paper.
| | 00:57 | Likewise, if you have any questions
about the settings in this box, simply hover
| | 01:01 | over the setting and AutoCAD will
tell you a little bit more about it.
| | 01:06 | All right, let's start out by selecting
our printer. I am going to click my Name
| | 01:10 | flyout and right here, at the top of
the list, take a look at these icons.
| | 01:14 | These icons represent system
printers that are connected to my machine or
| | 01:18 | visible on my network.
| | 01:20 | Now, each person's system is different
so you may see different printers on my
| | 01:24 | machine than you see on yours.
| | 01:26 | If we look at the bottom of the
list, notice the icons are different.
| | 01:29 | These plotter icons represent plot
configuration settings and these come
| | 01:34 | pre-installed with AutoCAD.
| | 01:35 | We'll look at some of these in a little bit.
| | 01:38 | For right now, I am going to select a printer.
| | 01:40 | I happen to have Adobe Acrobat
installed on my machine, so I'll select
| | 01:44 | the Adobe PDF printer.
| | 01:46 | You can select any printer on your machine
that will handle a letter size sheet of paper.
| | 01:51 | Now, we'll come down to Paper size,
Letter happens to be what I want.
| | 01:56 | If I click the flyout, I just want to
mention that this list is dynamic, so
| | 02:01 | whatever printer that you select, these
paper sizes that you see in this list will
| | 02:05 | be the ones that are available for that printer.
| | 02:10 | Let's come down to Plot area. This is
where we tell AutoCAD what we want to print.
| | 02:14 | There's a few ways we can do this.
| | 02:16 | I am going to click the flyout
and we'll use the Window method.
| | 02:19 | Let me back up just a little bit and I
am going to pick a point right here and
| | 02:25 | I'll pick a point right here.
| | 02:27 | Essentially, what I'm doing is creating
a rectangle and this rectangle defines
| | 02:30 | the boundary of what I want to print.
| | 02:32 | Let's come down to Plot offset and
I'll check Center the plot, now when I do
| | 02:38 | this watch my preview right over here.
| | 02:42 | Each time I adjust a setting, my
preview will update automatically.
| | 02:46 | Notice the preview is showing me
an 8.50 x 11 sheet of paper.
| | 02:50 | The hatched area in the middle
represents the geometry that I'm printing.
| | 02:54 | Let's come down to plot scale.
| | 02:55 | Right now, this is set to fit to paper.
| | 02:58 | That's probably the worst setting.
Usually, you'll want you print your drawings
| | 03:01 | to a measurable scale.
| | 03:02 | Let me uncheck this.
| | 03:05 | We'll go to the Scale flyout and click.
| | 03:08 | Notice I have several of the standard
engineering and mechanical scales on top
| | 03:12 | and I've got standard
architectural scales on the bottom.
| | 03:16 | If this drawing was set for
architectural units, I'd be using these scales.
| | 03:20 | Let's try and plot this at a scale of 1:1.
| | 03:24 | Take a look at my preview. Notice the
red line. That shows me that my plot is
| | 03:28 | larger than my paper, which stands to
reason because this drawing is 12" x 12".
| | 03:34 | I am going to click the Scale again.
| | 03:36 | We'll make it half scale, 1:2.
| | 03:39 | That looks like it will fit nicely.
| | 03:41 | Now, if you want, you can use this
area below to create your own scales.
| | 03:45 | If I'd like to plot this at 1:3,
I could change my units to 3.
| | 03:49 | Let me click in the other box to update
my preview, we can see that on our screen.
| | 03:54 | Essentially, what I'm seeing is 1 printed
inch is equal to 3 units in model space.
| | 04:00 | Since my model space units
are inches, this drawing is 1:3.
| | 04:04 | Let's put it back to 1:2 and we'll
come down and click our Preview button.
| | 04:12 | As you can see, here's a
representation of my paper.
| | 04:15 | I can see my drawing on the sheet and this
plot preview works just like model space.
| | 04:19 | If I roll my wheel forward,
I can zoom in and out.
| | 04:22 | If I hold my wheel down, I can pan.
| | 04:24 | If I zoom in a little bit closer, you
can see the pen weights on my lines.
| | 04:28 | There is only one problem. Everything
is wanting to plot using my layer color.
| | 04:33 | Let's close this Preview
and we'll address that issue.
| | 04:37 | I am going to come down and click
this More Than button so we can see the
| | 04:40 | additional settings in our Plot dialog box.
| | 04:44 | And then we'll come right up
here to the Plot Style table.
| | 04:48 | We'll click this flyout and
we're going to select some pens.
| | 04:51 | I am going to grab the
Monochrome pen table. I'll select Yes.
| | 04:57 | We'll talk about pen settings
in detail in just a little bit.
| | 05:01 | Let's click Preview again.
| | 05:02 | Let me zoom in a little bit.
| | 05:05 | Now, notice my Plot
Preview looks as you'd expect.
| | 05:08 | I'm ready to create my print.
| | 05:10 | Let me close the preview, and
we'll come down and click OK.
| | 05:15 | Now, if you just plot it directly to your
printer, your paper is already coming out.
| | 05:19 | Since I'm plotting to a PDF,
I'm going to give my file a name.
| | 05:25 | I am going to call this 'restrictor'
and I am going to save it to my Desktop.
| | 05:32 | The image that you see on screen
is an example of my final plot.
| | 05:36 | If your plot doesn't require the
formality of a title block, plotting a window
| | 05:40 | for model space is a great way to
produce hard copies of your design.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Selecting a pen table| 00:00 | You may be wondering why it's
necessary to select a plot style table when
| | 00:03 | printing your AutoCAD drawings.
| | 00:06 | We certainly don't need a plot style
table when we print from Microsoft Word
| | 00:09 | or Adobe Photoshop.
| | 00:11 | Remember that AutoCAD is a vector-based
program, which means the information we
| | 00:15 | see on screen is mathematically-based
lines and curves, and not pixels.
| | 00:21 | Each color choice we have available on
AutoCAD represents a virtual pen that
| | 00:25 | could be configured to plot however we like.
| | 00:27 | Let's talk about plot style tables.
| | 00:30 | I am going to start out by going
to my Layer Properties Manager.
| | 00:33 | Let's come over to the Color column
and I'll click one of these swatches.
| | 00:38 | This brings up AutoCAD's color picker
and, in reality, we are not really picking a
| | 00:43 | color in this box, we're
selecting a pen. Watch this.
| | 00:47 | If I place my cursor over this color,
notice just above it, it says index color 1.
| | 00:52 | That's essentially my pen number.
| | 00:54 | Let me come over and click this one,
this is pen number 2, move over again and
| | 01:00 | click, this is pen number 3.
Notice pen number 3 happens to be green.
| | 01:05 | You know, only these first
seven pens have real color names.
| | 01:09 | If I come up above and click a pen, we can
see the pen name is the same as the color name.
| | 01:14 | Now, there are 255 pen
choices available in AutoCAD.
| | 01:18 | It's kind of like a large box of crayons.
| | 01:21 | Each of these pens can be
configured to plot a specific way.
| | 01:24 | I am going to Close this box
and let's launch the Plot command.
| | 01:30 | Now, we assign Plot style tables right here.
| | 01:33 | Let's click the flyout and I am going
to select Monochrome and we'll click Yes.
| | 01:39 | This Plot style table is configured
such that all pens will plot as black.
| | 01:43 | I am going to come over and click the
Edit button and we'll take a look at
| | 01:46 | this Plot style table.
| | 01:47 | Now, there is two ways to view our
data, the Form View and the Table View.
| | 01:53 | The Table View is very
similar to Microsoft Excel.
| | 01:56 | I am going to go back to Form View and
on the left side I can see a listing of
| | 02:02 | all of the pens that are in this style.
| | 02:05 | If I grab the slider and come all way to
the bottom we can see there is 255 pens.
| | 02:10 | Let me drag this back to the top.
| | 02:13 | If I select a pen, I can then configure
how this pen is going to print by using
| | 02:18 | these settings on the right.
| | 02:20 | For right now, notice this
pen is going to plot as black.
| | 02:23 | Let me select Pen Number 2.
| | 02:24 | It will also plot as black.
| | 02:27 | Pen Number 4 will plot as black.
| | 02:29 | They will all plot as black
because this is the Monochrome pen table.
| | 02:33 | Let's make a change.
| | 02:34 | I am going to select the Pen Number 2
and then I am going to click the Color
| | 02:37 | flyout and I would like
Pen Number 2 to plot as red.
| | 02:42 | That's the only change I am going to make.
| | 02:43 | I am going to save this plot style
table. We'll do that by clicking Save As
| | 02:48 | because I don't want to overwrite my
original and then I am going to call this
| | 02:54 | my custom pens, and I'll click Save
and then we'll Close this dialog box.
| | 02:59 | We will then select our new custom
pen table and we'll finish our plot.
| | 03:06 | I am going to click my printer flyout and
I am going to go with the Adobe PDF printer.
| | 03:13 | You can select any printer on your
machine that will support a letter size
| | 03:16 | sheet. Looks like my paper size is good.
| | 03:19 | I am going to come down and click the
flyout and I'd like to define my Plot
| | 03:23 | area using a Window.
| | 03:25 | I am going to click right here and
I'll come down and click right here.
| | 03:30 | Let's Center the plot on the sheet and
I would like to plot this to a scale, so
| | 03:34 | I'm going to uncheck Fit to Paper.
| | 03:37 | Let's click the Scale flyout and
we'll try a scale of 1:1 and that's
| | 03:41 | obviously not going to work.
| | 03:44 | Let's click the flyout again
and we'll try half scale 1:2.
| | 03:48 | That looks like it'd work out just fine.
| | 03:50 | Now, I am going to come down and click
Preview but before I do, let me pull this
| | 03:54 | box down a little bit.
| | 03:57 | Notice the part of this drawing
that's using Pen Number 2, or yellow.
| | 04:01 | Remember, we made a change to that pen.
| | 04:07 | Let's click Preview and notice
we can see that change on screen.
| | 04:12 | We will also see that
change in the finished plot.
| | 04:16 | Now, if I would like to
plot this, there is short cut.
| | 04:18 | If I right-click, I can select
plot from here to send my drawing.
| | 04:24 | If you send your drawing to your
printer, it's probably already coming out.
| | 04:28 | Since I am plotting mine to PDF, I
am going to place it on my Desktop.
| | 04:35 | Now, if you send your drawing to your
printer, it's probably already coming out.
| | 04:38 | Since I am plotting mine into PDF
I have got to give it a file name.
| | 04:42 | I'm saving this to my Desktop. I am going
to call this 'gasket' and I'll click Save.
| | 04:55 | On my screen is an example of my finished plot.
| | 04:58 | One of the benefits of having a pen
table is that you can customize AutoCAD to
| | 05:02 | your own office standards.
| | 05:04 | Most offices will configure a pen table
to be used for all of their plotting needs.
| | 05:09 | For now, as a beginning student, it's
probably best to stick with the Monochrome
| | 05:13 | pen table such that all of your line
work will plot using the color black.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Choosing line weights| 00:00 | Since we are getting into the topic of
plotting, it's important for us to take a
| | 00:03 | minute and talk about lineweights.
| | 00:06 | Our lineweight setting controls the thickness
of our line work when it's printed on paper.
| | 00:11 | In this lesson, we are going
to learn how to set lineweights.
| | 00:13 | On my screen, I have got a mechanical
example. This drawing is essentially
| | 00:17 | finished, but before I print it, I'd
like to visit the Layer Properties Manager,
| | 00:22 | and notice that, currently, all of the
layers in my drawing are set to have a
| | 00:26 | Lineweight of Default.
| | 00:28 | That means when I print this drawing, all of
my lines are going to have the same thickness.
| | 00:33 | Typically, we'll use lineweights to
emphasize more important parts of our drawing.
| | 00:37 | For instance, I would like the
geometry of my part to be a heavier lineweight
| | 00:43 | than maybe my dimensions, and I'd like
my dimensions to be a heavier lineweight
| | 00:48 | than maybe my hidden lines or my centerlines.
| | 00:51 | Let's make a change.
| | 00:52 | I am going to click this setting.
| | 00:54 | This brings up my lineweight control
where I can select from any printable
| | 00:58 | lineweight in this list.
| | 00:59 | Here is my problem.
| | 01:02 | I don't know what the default
lineweight thickness is, so how do I know I'm
| | 01:06 | picking something that's heavier
or thinner than what I already have?
| | 01:10 | Second of all, this drawing
was set up for imperial units.
| | 01:13 | This is a decimal inches drawing, yet
AutoCAD is defaulting to millimeters
| | 01:18 | for my lineweights.
| | 01:20 | Let's hit Cancel and we'll see if we
can answer some of these questions.
| | 01:23 | I am going to visit the Options dialog box.
| | 01:26 | Let's right-click and we'll select
Options and if we go to the User Preferences
| | 01:31 | tab, we can come down and click the
Lineweight Settings button and this is where
| | 01:36 | we can get our answers.
| | 01:37 | Notice, right here, AutoCAD is
defaulting to millimeters for our lineweights.
| | 01:41 | If I want, I can set this to
inches to see the inches equivalent.
| | 01:47 | Now millimeters has always been
the standard, so I am going to leave
| | 01:50 | that setting as it is.
| | 01:52 | Notice, right here, my default lineweight
has a width of 0.25 millimeters and if I
| | 01:58 | wanted to, I could set the default
width to something else, but for right now
| | 02:03 | at least we know what that width is.
| | 02:06 | Since I haven't made any changes, I am
going to exit this dialog box and we'll
| | 02:10 | close our Options and we'll go
back to the Layer Properties Manager.
| | 02:14 | I am going to click the lineweight for
my restrictor plate, and I'm going to set
| | 02:20 | this to have a plottable line
thickness of 0.6 millimeters.
| | 02:24 | Then I'll change the lineweight for my
dimensions layer to be a little bit thinner.
| | 02:29 | Maybe we'll go with 0.3 and I'll click
OK and I'd like my Hidden lines to be a
| | 02:34 | little bit thinner than that.
| | 02:35 | Now I know default is 0.25, I'd
like to go a little bit thinner.
| | 02:39 | I am going to change this to 0.13 and
I'll click OK and I'm going to give my
| | 02:45 | centerlines the same line thickness.
| | 02:50 | Finally, I don't have to worry about Defpoints
because nothing on Defpoints will plot anyway.
| | 02:55 | Likewise, layer 0 has no geometry on
it so I won't worry about changing its
| | 03:00 | Lightweight Setting either.
| | 03:01 | Now that my lineweights are set,
this drawing is ready to plot.
| | 03:06 | In our next lesson, we'll learn
how to put this drawing on paper.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a layout pt. 1: Choosing a paper size| 00:00 | Most production drafting will
require us to create formal plots.
| | 00:04 | These plots will typically include a
title block that contains our company logo,
| | 00:08 | client information, scale
information, drawing, title and other things.
| | 00:13 | To create our formal plots, we're
going to use what's known as a layout.
| | 00:17 | In the session, we'll set up our
first layout and choose a paper size.
| | 00:20 | On my screen, I've got a mechanical example.
| | 00:24 | Let's say I'd like to plot this
drawing using our company title block.
| | 00:29 | To do that, I am going to set up a layout.
| | 00:31 | If we look in the lower left-hand
corner, we can see that this drawing
| | 00:34 | contains two layouts.
| | 00:36 | A layout is a virtual piece of paper
that we can use to plot our drawing.
| | 00:40 | I am going to select
Layout1 and we'll take a look.
| | 00:43 | Notice, we can see a sheet of paper.
| | 00:45 | Note that this paper also contains a
rectangle, inside of which we can see our part.
| | 00:51 | Now, this rectangle is called a viewport and
we are going to talk about viewports later.
| | 00:55 | So since I've selected this, I am going to
hit the Delete key on my keyboard to erase it.
| | 01:00 | Now, the paper that we see on screen
is a representation of what our plot is
| | 01:04 | going to look like when it
comes out of the printer.
| | 01:06 | Notice I have a dashed line around the
outside. This represents my printable
| | 01:10 | margin. Anything that falls
outside this boundary won't print.
| | 01:15 | It's important to note that the
shape of this paper and the shape of the
| | 01:18 | boundary will change depending on the
printer and the paper size that I select.
| | 01:23 | Let's select a piece of paper for our plot.
| | 01:25 | To do that, I'm going to right-click on
the Layout tab and select Page Setup Manager.
| | 01:31 | Then I'll come over and click Modify and
notice that the Page Setup Manager looks
| | 01:36 | strangely similar to the Plot dialog box.
| | 01:39 | That's because we're, essentially,
setting up our plot ahead of time.
| | 01:43 | You see a layout is merely a visual
representation of our plot settings.
| | 01:47 | I am going to start out by choosing a printer.
| | 01:49 | Let's click the Name flyout and since
I've got Adobe Acrobat installed on my
| | 01:54 | machine, I am going to
select the Adobe PDF printer.
| | 01:58 | You can select any printer that's
installed on your machine that will support
| | 02:01 | a letter size sheet.
| | 02:03 | Now, if you don't have a printer that
you can use to print your drawings,
| | 02:07 | select the DWF6 ePlot.
| | 02:10 | This is a virtual printer that
you can use to finish the tutorials.
| | 02:15 | Let's come down and look at Paper size,
this is to set to Letter, so this is fine.
| | 02:19 | For Plot area, what do I want to plot? I
want to plot the Layout. This is also good.
| | 02:24 | Finally, let's take a look at Scale.
| | 02:26 | Notice this is set to 1:1.
| | 02:29 | You know, if we plot using layouts, our
scale will always be set at 1:1, because
| | 02:34 | the layout is a true size environment.
| | 02:36 | Our paper is measured in inches and we
want to plot that paper at a 1:1 scale.
| | 02:41 | Since I'm finished with my settings,
I'll click OK and then we'll click Close.
| | 02:46 | Layouts are essentially a visual
display of saved plot settings.
| | 02:50 | The piece of paper we see on screen is
a real-life representation of our paper
| | 02:54 | as it'll come out of the printer.
| | 02:56 | In our next session, we'll add
a title block to our new layout.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a layout pt. 2: Inserting a title block| 00:00 | Now that we have set up our layout and
established our paper size, our next goal
| | 00:04 | is to add the title block.
| | 00:06 | Generally speaking, a layout
acts just like model space.
| | 00:10 | So if I wanted to, I could draft my
title block right here on my Layout tab.
| | 00:14 | You know, I could come up and launch
the Rectangle command and I could create a
| | 00:18 | rectangle from here to here, and then
I'll hit Spacebar to go back into the
| | 00:21 | command and create one from the end
point here to here, and I could slowly build
| | 00:27 | my title block on this layout.
| | 00:29 | Instead, to save time, I've already
created a drawing that contains my
| | 00:33 | title block geometry.
| | 00:35 | Let's drag that geometry onto my layout.
| | 00:39 | So, I am going to erase these
rectangles and let's open a drawing.
| | 00:42 | We are going to look in the chapter_
15 folder, inside our Exercise Files
| | 00:48 | directory and let's open
this one, 05_titleblock.
| | 00:54 | Now that I have two drawings open in
my interface, I am going to go the View
| | 00:57 | tab on my ribbon and select Tile Vertically so
I can see a side-by-side view of these drawings.
| | 01:04 | Now let's clean up the view a little bit.
I am going to click in this window on
| | 01:08 | the right to put the focus over here
and I'll back up just a little bit.
| | 01:12 | Then we'll click in the window on the
left and I'll pan this drawing over.
| | 01:18 | Now to move my geometry from one
drawing to another, I'm going to select it and
| | 01:23 | then I'll click and hold on a
highlighted portion of the line and I'll drag it
| | 01:28 | into the other file and I'll try and
center this as well as I can on my layout.
| | 01:34 | Now I don't need my title block
drawing anymore. I can close this and I can
| | 01:39 | maximize this drawing.
| | 01:40 | Let's zoom in a little bit.
| | 01:42 | We'll see how well I did.
| | 01:43 | You know, this is centered
pretty good on this sheet.
| | 01:46 | I can always come back and adjust the location
of my title block after I make my first plot.
| | 01:51 | From this point, I can zoom in and I
can edit this text to suit my needs.
| | 01:58 |
| | 01:59 | In addition to title blocks, layouts
are a great place to put notes, legends,
| | 02:04 | north arrows and scale bars.
| | 02:06 | In our next session, we'll complete our
layout by adding a viewport and setting
| | 02:10 | our geometry to a measurable scale.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a layout pt. 3: Cutting viewports| 00:00 | Now, that we've added a title block
to our layout, we're ready to create a
| | 00:03 | viewport, such that we can see our
part and set it to a measurable scale.
| | 00:08 | Now, you may be asking yourself, "Where is our
part drawing in relation to this Layout tab?"
| | 00:13 | Let's take a look.
| | 00:13 | I am going to come down to the
lower-left and click on the Model tab.
| | 00:18 | This will return us to model space,
where our part geometry is located.
| | 00:22 | Model space is where we do all of our drafting.
| | 00:25 | Conversely, let me select Layout1.
| | 00:29 | Layouts represent our sheet of paper and
layouts are where we insert our title block.
| | 00:35 | The layouts sit on top of model space.
| | 00:38 | So if I want to see my part, I need
to cut a hole in this piece of paper.
| | 00:42 | Now, AutoCAD calls this hole a viewport,
and if we want to create a viewport in
| | 00:48 | our drawing, we need to
place it on a layer of its own.
| | 00:51 | Take a look at my Layer control.
| | 00:53 | Notice I am practicing good form.
| | 00:54 | I've already created a viewport
layer and that layer is current.
| | 00:58 | To create my viewport, I am going to
go to the View tab on my ribbon and the
| | 01:02 | tool we want is located in the Viewports panel.
| | 01:06 | Now, launching this command
is essentially three clicks.
| | 01:09 | I am going to click New,
then Single and then OK.
| | 01:15 | Now, I will pick two points to define
the rectangular shape of my viewport.
| | 01:19 | I am going to select the endpoint
here and then I'll come down and select
| | 01:24 | the endpoint over here.
| | 01:26 | Notice I can now see my
part through this viewport.
| | 01:29 | A viewport is a lot like a window
in the model space. Watch this.
| | 01:34 | If my cursor is inside the viewport
and I double-click, AutoCAD gives me
| | 01:38 | access to model space.
| | 01:40 | From here, I can pan and zoom and
I can work through this viewport.
| | 01:45 | It's kind of like reaching
your hand through a window.
| | 01:48 | In fact, we'll set the scale of this
geometry by adjusting our zoom factor.
| | 01:53 | Now, we're not going to be doing that manually.
| | 01:55 | Instead, once we are in the viewport,
we're going to come down to the Viewport
| | 01:59 | Scale menu and click and
I can set my scale here.
| | 02:04 | Notice, at the top of the menu, I have
several standard engineering and mechanical
| | 02:08 | scales, and at the bottom, I have
my standard architectural scales.
| | 02:12 | Let's see if this drawing will fit
in my viewport at a scale of 1:1.
| | 02:17 | That's actually very close.
| | 02:19 | Let me click-and-hold my wheel and I'll pan
this down and center it a little bit better.
| | 02:24 | Once you set the scale of your viewport,
it's a good idea to come down and click
| | 02:28 | this icon to lock it.
| | 02:30 | Otherwise, notice mine is not locked yet.
| | 02:32 | If you're working in the viewport and you
pan and zoom, you just trashed your scale.
| | 02:37 | Now, you might think you could adjust
your wheel and straighten this out,
| | 02:39 | but that won't work.
| | 02:41 | The only way to correct your scale is
to go back to the Viewport Scale menu and
| | 02:46 | reselect it from the list.
| | 02:48 | Once again, I am going to center
this a little bit better and when I'm
| | 02:53 | finished, I will lock this.
| | 02:55 | Now, even if I'm working in this
viewport, if I pan or zoom, AutoCAD will pan
| | 03:00 | and zoom the entire layout.
| | 03:02 | To get out of my viewport, I will
place my cursor outside the viewport
| | 03:05 | boundary and double-click.
| | 03:08 | Now, my cursor is back on the Layout tab
and I have access to all of my layout objects.
| | 03:12 | Now, you may be wondering, "Why do we put
these viewports on a layer of their own?"
| | 03:18 | That's a good question.
| | 03:19 | Let me deselect this.
| | 03:20 | I am going to go to the Home tab. We
put them on their own layer because if we
| | 03:25 | turn this layer off, the rectangle goes
away and now I don't have to worry about
| | 03:32 | it showing up on my plots.
| | 03:34 | Let's look at something else.
| | 03:35 | I am going to right-click on my
Layout tab and select Page Setup Manager.
| | 03:40 | We'll click Modify and we've already
taken care of these settings earlier.
| | 03:45 | Let's take a look at our pens.
| | 03:47 | I am going to click my Pen
flyout and select monochrome pens.
| | 03:52 | Notice, since I'm using a layout, I also
have a check box that will allow me to
| | 03:56 | display my Plot Styles.
| | 03:58 | Let's click OK and I'll click Close.
| | 04:01 | Notice that my geometry is
now displaying as monochrome.
| | 04:05 | We can take it one step further.
| | 04:08 | Let's come down to the Status bar
and we'll look at another mode setting.
| | 04:11 | This icon toggles the display of my Lineweights.
| | 04:15 | If I click this to turn it on, I can
now see my Lineweights on screen as well.
| | 04:20 | Now, when I work on my layout, it's just
like I'm working in a plot preview mode.
| | 04:24 | One thing I do want to mention about
this toggle. If we go back to model space,
| | 04:29 | notice the pen weights also show up
here, and they always stay the same width on
| | 04:34 | screen, so as I back up they tend
to look fatter and fatter and fatter.
| | 04:39 | If you find this to be annoying, you
can always come down and turn it off.
| | 04:42 | The pen weights will plot just fine,
whether this toggle is turned on or not.
| | 04:46 | I am going to leave mine on.
| | 04:48 | We'll go back to our Layout tab.
| | 04:51 | Let's do one more thing before we plot this.
| | 04:53 | Let's rename this layout.
| | 04:55 | Layout1 is kind of generic.
| | 04:57 | I'm going to double-click on the Layout tab,
and I am going to call this final design.
| | 05:06 | When the time comes to plot this layout,
remember I've already set all of my
| | 05:10 | plot settings ahead of time.
| | 05:13 | All I have to do to send this to the
printer is click Plot and OK and since
| | 05:19 | my layout is set to Plot to the Adobe
PDF Plotter, I will give my PDF a name
| | 05:25 | and I'll click Save.
| | 05:26 | Now, my screen is an example of my finished plot.
| | 05:35 | Layouts are the most powerful
way of creating plots in AutoCAD.
| | 05:39 | Their benefits even go beyond the
viewports, plot preview and naming features
| | 05:43 | that we've seen here.
| | 05:44 | If we can incorporate layouts into
our workflow, we've taken the first step
| | 05:48 | towards using even more powerful features,
like sheet sets, page setups, and publishing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Reusing layouts| 00:00 | The best part about layouts
is that you can reuse them.
| | 00:04 | This means that you only have to set up
your 8.5" X 11" layout one time, and then
| | 00:08 | you can use it for any other drawing
you wish to print to 8.5" X 11" paper.
| | 00:13 | By the way, in the drafting world, an 8.5"
X 11" sheet is also called an A-size sheet.
| | 00:19 | In this lesson, we're going to learn how
to plot a drawing using an existing layout.
| | 00:23 | On my screen, I've got an architectural example.
| | 00:25 | Let's say I'd like to plot this on an A-
size sheet using our company title block.
| | 00:31 | Now, we've seen this takes a little bit
of time, but you know what? I don't have
| | 00:34 | to setup a new layout, I already have
an A-size layout in another drawing.
| | 00:39 | I am going to extract the layout from
my previous drawing and use it in this
| | 00:43 | one, and I'll do that with the Design Center.
| | 00:45 | I am going to hit Ctrl+2 on my keyboard
to open up the Design Center onscreen,
| | 00:51 | and then I will navigate to the
drawing that contains my layout.
| | 00:55 | Let's close up chapter_13 and I am going
to come down and open up chapter_15 and
| | 01:00 | the drawing I am interested
in is 06_layout_pt3_finished.
| | 01:05 | Let's click the plus to navigate into
this drawing and I'll select Layouts and
| | 01:10 | if we look over to the right, we can
see the layouts that are in this file.
| | 01:14 | I'd like to use the final design layout.
| | 01:17 | So I will click-hold-and-drag
this into my drawing and release.
| | 01:22 | And if we look right down here, we can
see that layout was copied into my file.
| | 01:25 | I am going to close Design
Center and we'll take a look.
| | 01:31 | It's important to note that if you
copy a layout from one drawing to another,
| | 01:35 | the only geometry that comes along is
the geometry that exists on the layout.
| | 01:39 | So, none of that part
geometry came along with this sheet.
| | 01:43 | I seem to recall this layout had a
viewport and I believe we turned that
| | 01:47 | viewport layer off.
| | 01:49 | Let's go the Layer control, we'll turn
the viewport layer back on, there we go,
| | 01:56 | there is my viewport.
| | 01:57 | Now, that I've verified that we have a
viewport on this sheet, I am going to
| | 02:00 | double-click inside it and then I'll do
a zoom extends to see our geometry. Hey!
| | 02:06 | Notice that didn't work. You know why?
| | 02:08 | The viewport is still locked.
| | 02:10 | Let me click the icon to unlock it
and then I'll do another zoom extends.
| | 02:15 | There we go, there is my geometry.
| | 02:16 | Now that we can see it, let's
set it to a measurable scale.
| | 02:19 | I am going to come down to the
Viewport Scale menu and, since this is an
| | 02:24 | architectural example, we'll be using
one of these scales towards the bottom.
| | 02:28 | I am going to try 1/2" = 1'- 0"
and that's not going to work.
| | 02:34 | Let's open up the menu again and we
will try 1/4" = 1'- 0" that looks like it's
| | 02:39 | going to work perfectly.
| | 02:40 | I am going to pan this up just a
little bit and then I'm immediately going to
| | 02:45 | lock this viewport, so I
don't accidentally mess it up.
| | 02:49 | Now that I am finished setting my scale,
I am going to move my cursor outside
| | 02:52 | the viewport and double-click.
| | 02:55 | Now, I have access to the objects on my layout.
| | 02:57 | I am going to zoom in and let's
make some changes to this text.
| | 03:02 | I am going to call this ARCHITECTURAL
EXAMPLE and most important, let's make
| | 03:11 | sure our scale is accurate, 1/4" = 1'.
| | 03:19 | Finally, before I create my plot, I'm
going to turn the viewport layer off.
| | 03:26 | And then I'll plot the drawing by
clicking the Plot icon, then clicking OK.
| | 03:33 | Since I'm plotting this drawing to PDF, I am
going to give it a name and I'll click Save.
| | 03:38 | On my screen, you can see an
example of my finished plot.
| | 03:45 | Imagine if you created a master
drawing on your network that contained all of
| | 03:50 | your typical title block, saved as layouts.
| | 03:53 | Anytime you needed to add a title
block to a drawing, you could simply
| | 03:56 | drag-and-drop a layout from your master file.
| | 03:59 | Layouts give you the power of
automating your title block insertions and reduce
| | 04:03 | the effort of plotting to a
couple clicks of the mouse.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Organizing layouts| 00:00 | AutoCAD drawings can contain several layouts.
| | 00:03 | This means we have complete
control over how, or how much of our model
| | 00:06 | space geometry we plot.
| | 00:09 | Since we can have multiple layouts,
let's look at how we can organize the
| | 00:12 | layouts in our drawing.
| | 00:13 | On my screen, I have a mechanical example.
| | 00:16 | I actually have two parts, drawn in model space.
| | 00:19 | They're both related.
| | 00:20 | Each of these is an electrical cover plate.
| | 00:23 | On the left, I've got a switch cover, and
on the right, I've got a receptacle cover.
| | 00:27 | Now, even though these drawings are
together, I would like to plot them
| | 00:30 | individually, on separate layouts.
| | 00:33 | If we look right down here, you can see
that I've already used the Design Center
| | 00:37 | to insert an A-size sheet, and this
layout contains a viewport and the layer
| | 00:42 | happens to be turned off.
| | 00:44 | Let's go to the Layer control and
we'll turn that layer back on. There we go.
| | 00:49 | Now, I'll double-click inside the
viewport and then we'll do a zoom extends
| | 00:52 | to see our geometry.
| | 00:53 | Then I'll pan this over because I'd like
to use this layout to plot my switch cover.
| | 01:00 | We'll center this guy in the view
and then we'll set our viewport to
| | 01:04 | a measurable scale.
| | 01:05 | I am going to try 1:1 and
that looks like it will work.
| | 01:09 | The only problem I have is I can
still see some of the other geometry.
| | 01:12 | Let me show you how we can fix this.
| | 01:15 | I am going to move my cursor
outside the viewport and double-click.
| | 01:18 | I now have access to the geometry on my layout.
| | 01:21 | I am going to select the viewport edge.
Notice I have grips on the corners.
| | 01:27 | I am going to select this grip and I
am going to make sure my running object
| | 01:31 | snaps are turned off.
| | 01:32 | These tend to get in the way, if
we are editing a viewport boundary.
| | 01:35 | Let me move this edge over to here, and
then I will click this grip and I will
| | 01:42 | pull this edge to here.
| | 01:45 | Since our viewport is a window in the
model space, I can use these grips to
| | 01:49 | change the size of my window.
| | 01:51 | Now that I'm finished, I'll deselect
this and I'll turn the layer back off.
| | 01:57 | Now, this layout is just about finished.
| | 01:58 | I want to do one more thing though.
| | 02:00 | I'd like to rename it.
| | 02:02 | To rename a layout, we'll double-click
on it and then we can enter a new name.
| | 02:07 | I am going to type 'CP1' and hit Enter.
| | 02:11 | If we have multiple layouts in our
drawing, we can click-hold-and-drag these to
| | 02:15 | a new location and release, if
we want to change their order.
| | 02:18 | Now that my layout's finished, I'd
like to create a copy of this layout to
| | 02:23 | use to plot the other half of my drawing.
| | 02:26 | To copy a layout, I will click-hold-and-
drag and while doing that, I am going to
| | 02:30 | hold down the Ctrl key and then I'll
release my mouse button to create my copy.
| | 02:35 | Let's select this layout.
Notice, it's the exact same thing.
| | 02:39 | I am going to change the name.
| | 02:40 | We'll make this CP2 and let's
adjust the contents of our viewport.
| | 02:46 | I am going to try and do this
without turning the layer on.
| | 02:49 | Let's double-click to jump into the
viewport and then I will pan this over and
| | 02:55 | it looks like the geometry will fit nicely.
| | 02:58 | Now, that I'm finished, I'll double-
click outside the viewport and we can change
| | 03:03 | some of our title block information.
| | 03:07 | This is a DUAL RECEPTICLE
COVER and I misspelled that.
| | 03:14 | Let me right-click on it and I'll
select the appropriate spelling, there we go.
| | 03:20 | I'd like this to be sheet CP2 and
before we wrap this up, you may wonder, "Hey,
| | 03:28 | "I've got a couple layouts in this
drawing that I am not going to be using.
| | 03:31 | "Is there any way I can
remove a layout?" Yes, there is.
| | 03:34 | If you want to delete a layout, right-click
on the tab and select Delete from the menu.
| | 03:40 | Now, you will get a warning, saying, "Hey,
you're actually deleting this layout.
| | 03:43 | "Do you want to do that?" That's fine.
| | 03:45 | I am going to click OK.
| | 03:46 | Let's get rid of Layout2 as well.
| | 03:52 | Using these layouts, I was able to
take my model space geometry and create
| | 03:55 | two separate plots.
| | 03:57 | AutoCAD drawings can support
an unlimited number of layouts.
| | 04:00 | With a little organization, we can take the same
model space geometry and plot it any number of ways.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
16. Creating Properly Sized Annotations on Plotted DrawingsUsing the Annotative property to automatically size text| 00:00 | Let me start by saying that we should
never place text in a drawing, until we
| | 00:04 | know our intended plot scale.
| | 00:06 | That's because the scale of our plot
will dictate how large our text needs to
| | 00:09 | be, such that it's
readable on the printed sheet.
| | 00:13 | Fortunately, if I know my plot scale,
AutoCAD will size my text automatically.
| | 00:18 | In this lesson, we're going to learn how to
create predictably sized text in our drawings.
| | 00:23 | On my screen, I have got an
architectural floor plan and I would like to label
| | 00:27 | each one of these rooms.
| | 00:28 | Now, before I get started, let me
mention that there is already a layout
| | 00:32 | created for this drawing.
| | 00:34 | And if we take a look at the layout,
we can see that the scale of the
| | 00:37 | viewport is 3/16" = 1'-0".
You know what?
| | 00:41 | Good practice says you never
take the title blocks word for it.
| | 00:44 | I am going to double-click in this viewport.
| | 00:46 | Let's look right down here.
| | 00:48 | Yes in fact, it is 3/16' = 1'-0".
| | 00:51 | All right, let's double-click out, we'll go
back to model space and I can create my labels.
| | 00:57 | Now, here is my problem.
| | 00:58 | How large should I make my text such
that it's readable on my printed sheet?
| | 01:03 | Better yet, how large should I make my
text if I wanted to be a specific size
| | 01:08 | when it's printed on the sheet?
| | 01:09 | A couple of years ago, we used have
to work out the math to set our text
| | 01:13 | types in model space.
| | 01:14 | Now, AutoCAD does everything automatically.
| | 01:17 | Let me show you how it works.
| | 01:18 | I am going to create a text style.
| | 01:21 | Notice, I already have
some styles in this drawing.
| | 01:24 | These are the styles that are being
used on my title block, by the way.
| | 01:27 | I am going to click New and I'm
going to call the style, Room Labels.
| | 01:33 | And I would like these to have the Arial font.
| | 01:36 | Let's make it Bold.
| | 01:37 | Then we'll come down to Size.
| | 01:39 | Now, instead of setting a size here just
yet, I am going to come over and click
| | 01:43 | the Annotative button.
| | 01:45 | And when I do, notice my Text
Style has an icon next to it.
| | 01:49 | That means that this text style will
automatically size itself to match my plot scale.
| | 01:55 | Since this style is set to Annotative, I
can set the height I would like my text
| | 01:59 | to be on my paper, right here.
| | 02:02 | I would like it to be 3/16" and
that's it, my Text Style is Current.
| | 02:07 | Let's click Close and we can create our text.
| | 02:11 | We do have to do one thing first.
| | 02:13 | Take a look right down here.
| | 02:15 | This is my Annotation Scale flyout.
| | 02:17 | Let me click this to open it up and we'll
set this to our plot scale. 3/16" = 1'-0".
| | 02:24 | Now, when I create my text or any
annotative object, AutoCAD is going to properly
| | 02:29 | size it for this plot scale.
| | 02:31 | I am going to create some multiline text.
| | 02:33 | Let me zoom in a little bit and I'll click
right here, and I'll set my column. This
| | 02:41 | is the Living Room. We'll make one
more up here. This one is the Kitchen.
| | 02:47 | Now, we could keep creating new ones
or, if you like to recycle, you can copy
| | 02:52 | these to the other rooms
and then just change them.
| | 02:55 | Notice, if I place my cursor over this
text, I can see the Annotative icon.
| | 03:00 | This is a visual reminder to
let you know that text is sizing
| | 03:03 | itself automatically.
| | 03:04 | I am going to double-click and
we'll change this to Bedroom.
| | 03:09 | We'll change this one to Bathroom.
| | 03:13 | I can then copy these for the other rooms.
| | 03:20 | Let's jump back out to
our layout and take a look.
| | 03:23 | Notice, my text is definitely legible.
| | 03:25 | Let's zoom in a little bit and I am
going to take a quick measurement.
| | 03:28 | Remember, we wanted this text to
appear 3/16" tall on our printed sheet.
| | 03:34 | I am going to launch my Distance command
and I don't have object snaps with this text.
| | 03:38 | So I am going to click really close,
right here and then I am going to lock my
| | 03:42 | Ortho and we'll pull up to the top of
the L and notice our height is 3/16".
| | 03:48 | From this point on, it would be a good idea
to make all of your text styles annotative.
| | 03:53 | By using Annotative text, we can be
certain that our text will always be a
| | 03:57 | consistent size on our plots,
regardless of the scale we use of our drawing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Annotative property to automatically size dimensions| 00:01 | Our rule for dimensions is
the same as our rule for text.
| | 00:04 | We should never place dimensions in a
drawing until we know our intended plot scale.
| | 00:09 | Fortunately, dimension
styles can also be annotative.
| | 00:12 | So, once I know my plot scale,
AutoCAD will set the size of my
| | 00:16 | dimensions automatically. Let's take a look.
| | 00:19 | On my screen, I've got a
mechanical example and I'd like to add some
| | 00:22 | dimensions to this drawing.
| | 00:24 | Before we get started, let me mention
that I've already created a layout, and if
| | 00:28 | we look right down here, we can see
that my part is being displayed at a scale
| | 00:32 | of 1:2 or half scale, meaning my part
is showing up at half its true size.
| | 00:39 | Now, I've already verified my
viewport scale, so I know that's good.
| | 00:43 | Let's return to model space
and we'll create our dimensions.
| | 00:47 | At this point, I have not yet made a
dimension style, so we'll do that first.
| | 00:51 | Let me bring up the Dimension Style
Manager and I'll click New and then I'll
| | 00:56 | give my style a name. I am going
to call this Annotative Dimensions.
| | 01:02 | I will be starting with the same
settings as the standard style and then I am
| | 01:07 | going to put a check in this box,
this will ensure that my new style is
| | 01:10 | Annotative and I'll click Continue.
| | 01:13 | Now, I can go through and
adjust the settings for my New Style.
| | 01:16 | Here is the way it works.
| | 01:18 | Anytime you have a size setting in this
dialog box, you want to set the size to
| | 01:23 | the size you want your
dimension to appear on paper.
| | 01:26 | So all of these sizes are paper sizes.
| | 01:29 | I am going to start out by going to
the Lines tab and I'm going to change the
| | 01:34 | amount of my extension lines extend beyond
the dimension lines. We'll make that 0.10.
| | 01:41 | That's the distance right here, by the way.
| | 01:42 | Let's go to Symbols and Arrows. I'd
like my Arrow size to be a little smaller.
| | 01:47 | I'll make that 0.12.
| | 01:49 | Let's go to Text. I'd like my
Text height to be a little smaller.
| | 01:52 | Let's make it 0.10.
| | 01:55 | Once again, all of these are the sizes
I want my dimensions to appear on paper.
| | 01:58 | Since we are talking about text, you
might wonder if you're making an Annotative
| | 02:02 | Dimension style, do you have to use an
annotative text style with it? No, you don't.
| | 02:07 | You can use a Standard Text Style.
| | 02:09 | I am going to do one more thing. We'll
go to Primary Units and we'll set our
| | 02:13 | Precision to two spaces, and I'll click OK.
| | 02:18 | Notice my Dimension Style
has the Annotative icon.
| | 02:21 | This means that it will
automatically size itself to match my plot scale.
| | 02:25 | It happens to be current, so I'll click Close.
| | 02:28 | I'm going to come down to the
Annotation Scale flyout and click, and I am going
| | 02:33 | to set this to match my plot scale, 1:2.
| | 02:36 | Since I've made that change,
I am going to do a regen.
| | 02:39 | Let's type re and hit Enter and
when I do, watch my line types.
| | 02:44 | Notice my line types also
conform to this annotation scale.
| | 02:47 | All right, I am going to create a Linear
dimension from the endpoint here to the
| | 02:52 | endpoint here, and I'll pull this out.
| | 02:54 | I'll create another one from the
endpoint here to the endpoint here.
| | 02:59 | Now, I am not going to dimension everything,
I am just going to put a few dimensions in.
| | 03:03 | We'll create one from here to here,
and we'll pull it out to the endpoint
| | 03:06 | here, and you know what?
| | 03:08 | Let me zoom in a little bit.
| | 03:09 | I don't like that I grabbed this so far down.
| | 03:11 | Let me select this dimension.
| | 03:12 | I am going to grab the grip and
move it up to the endpoint here.
| | 03:16 | That looks a little bit better.
| | 03:17 | Let me back up a little bit, and you know what?
| | 03:20 | Let's do a scientific experiment.
| | 03:22 | What if I changed my Annotation Scale to
1:4. Will that affect these dimensions? No.
| | 03:29 | It'll only affect any new
objects that you create.
| | 03:31 | I am going to create a
Radial dimension right here.
| | 03:35 | Notice the size difference. In the
event my part was being plotted at quarter
| | 03:39 | scale, this would be an appropriately
sized dimension. Now, I don't need this.
| | 03:44 | I am going to erase it, and let's
set our Annotation Scale back to 1:2.
| | 03:50 | I will then create an
appropriately sized radial dimension.
| | 03:54 | That's pretty good.
| | 03:55 | Let's return to our Layout and take a look.
| | 03:58 | As you can see, my dimensions are legible and
they are appropriately sized for this viewport.
| | 04:03 | From this point on, it would be a good idea to
make all of your Dimension Styles annotative.
| | 04:08 | This way you can ensure that your
dimensions are always consistently sized,
| | 04:12 | regardless of the scale of your plot.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Annotative property to automatically size callouts| 00:01 | You're probably wondering about this and
you're right, multileaders can also be annotative.
| | 00:06 | In this lesson, we're going to
learn how to create predictably sized
| | 00:09 | multileaders in our drawings.
| | 00:11 | On my screen, I've got an
architectural example and I'd like to create some
| | 00:15 | multileaders to label the part
numbers of some of these plumbing fixtures.
| | 00:20 | Before I do that, I want to verify the
plot scale of this drawing, so let's take
| | 00:24 | a look at the layout that's been created.
| | 00:26 | I am going to look right down here
and I could see my geometry is being
| | 00:29 | displayed at a scale of one-
quarter of an inch equals a foot.
| | 00:33 | Knowing that, we'll return to
model space, and I'm going to create an
| | 00:37 | annotative multileader style.
| | 00:39 | Let's go to the Annotation panel. We'll
bring up our Multileader Style Manager.
| | 00:44 | I am going to click New and I am going
to call this Annotative Multileaders.
| | 00:50 | I'll be starting with the same
settings as the standard style, and then I
| | 00:53 | am going to put a check in the Annotative
box to ensure that my new style is annotative.
| | 00:59 | Let's click Continue and then I can
make adjustments to my style settings.
| | 01:04 | Now, just like a Dimension Style,
anytime you see a size setting in this box,
| | 01:08 | you want to set the size to the size you want
your leader to appear when printed on paper.
| | 01:13 | All of these are paper sizes.
| | 01:15 | I am going to make a couple of changes.
| | 01:18 | Let's change the Arrowhead Size to 1/8".
| | 01:23 | I am going to go to Leader Structure
and I'm going to change the length of my
| | 01:27 | Landing distance. Let's click in
here and we'll make this 1/8" as well.
| | 01:34 | Let's go to Content and I'll
set my Text height to 1/8".
| | 01:39 | When I am finished, I'll click OK.
| | 01:41 | Notice my new style is Annotative, so
it will size itself appropriately to
| | 01:45 | match my plot scale.
| | 01:47 | It happens to be current, so
we'll come down and click Close.
| | 01:50 | I will then set my Annotation Scale to
match my plot scale, and we'll set this
| | 01:55 | to 1/4" = 1'-0",
| | 01:57 | the same as our plot scale.
| | 02:00 | Let's zoom in a little bit.
| | 02:01 | I am going to start out by
creating a label for these basins.
| | 02:04 | We'll launch the Multileader command
and you know what? I'd like to be able to
| | 02:09 | point right to the edge of this object.
| | 02:11 | Let's look at a new object snap.
| | 02:12 | I am going to Shift+Right-Click and
then I'll come down and select Nearest.
| | 02:17 | This will guarantee that I grab a
point on the edge of this entity.
| | 02:20 | Let me pull this out a little
bit and give myself some word wrap.
| | 02:28 | I am going to pull it out just a little
bit more. There we go. That looks better.
| | 02:38 | Let's create one more.
| | 02:39 | I am going to launch the command again.
| | 02:42 | We'll use our new Nearest object snap
and I'll grab the edge of the back of this
| | 02:47 | toilet and I'll create one more call out.
| | 02:54 | That looks pretty good.
| | 02:56 | I know these guys are sized appropriately.
| | 02:58 | Let's go back to our Layout and take a look.
| | 03:02 | It would be a good idea to make all
of your Multileader Styles annotative.
| | 03:06 | If you do this, your Multileaders
will always be legible and they will be
| | 03:09 | consistently sized on all of your plots.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Revising the scale assigned to annotations| 00:01 | In this lesson, I am going to show you
how to fix a problem that many beginning
| | 00:04 | students run into when they start
using Annotative Styles, and that is what
| | 00:08 | you do if you've already annotated your
drawing and you find out you've used the wrong scale?
| | 00:13 | On my screen, I've got a
mechanical example. This drawing contains
| | 00:16 | several annotations.
| | 00:18 | If I hover over these, we can see the
icon that shows us that these were created
| | 00:22 | using an Annotative Style.
| | 00:25 | Now, all of my annotations were created
using an annotative scale of 1:1 because
| | 00:30 | I made the assumption that my part
would fit on my sheet at that scale.
| | 00:34 | Let's take a look at our layout.
| | 00:36 | This is a standard A-size sheet
and my layout contains a viewport.
| | 00:41 | Let's go to the Layer control and
we'll turn on the viewport layer and then
| | 00:45 | I'll double-click in the middle of my viewport
and we'll do a zoom extends to see our geometry.
| | 00:50 | Finally, we'll come right down here
and we'll set our viewport scale to 1:1.
| | 00:55 | Now, here is my problem. My annotations
look great, but unfortunately, my part
| | 01:00 | doesn't fit on my sheet. Let's try this.
| | 01:02 | I'm going to change the viewport scale
to 1:2, and notice, now the part fits on
| | 01:08 | the sheet, but all of my annotations disappear.
| | 01:11 | That's because my annotations were
designed for a 1:1 viewport and this
| | 01:15 | viewport isn't 1:1.
| | 01:17 | Let's look at how we can fix this.
| | 01:19 | First of all, I know I have to go with
the scale, so I am going to center this a
| | 01:23 | little bit better on my sheet.
| | 01:25 | I will then double-click out and before
I do anything else, I am going to zoom
| | 01:29 | in and we'll change our Scale down here.
| | 01:32 | We'll make sure this says 1:2.
| | 01:35 | Then we'll return to model space.
| | 01:38 | To fix this, I am going to go to the
Annotation Scale and I'm going to set this
| | 01:41 | to what I should have used, 1:2.
| | 01:44 | Then I am going to go to the Annotate
tab. We'll come all the way down to the
| | 01:48 | Annotation Scaling panel and I am
going to click this flyout and select Add
| | 01:53 | Current Scale. This will add the
current Annotation Scale to all of the
| | 01:57 | objects that I select.
| | 01:59 | I am just going to window
every thing, and right-click.
| | 02:04 | Now, my annotations are
appropriately sized for a half-scale viewport.
| | 02:08 | Let me zoom in a little bit. Notice as
I place my cursor over this object, we
| | 02:12 | see two annotative icons.
| | 02:14 | That's because my annotations are
now supporting two different scales.
| | 02:19 | If I select this, notice we can
see the other size right here.
| | 02:20 | Now, I am going to grab
all of these and right-click.
| | 02:22 | This is my 1:1 size.
| | 02:24 | Now, this isn't a bad thing, but you know
what? I don't need the 1:1 scale version anymore.
| | 02:30 | So I am going to deselect this and I
am going to do a zoom extends, and let's
| | 02:33 | remove the unnecessary scale.
| | 02:37 | To do that I am going to go back to my
Annotation Scale and we'll set this to
| | 02:40 | 1:1. We'll go to our Annotation
Scaling panel and this time I am going to
| | 02:45 | select Delete Current Scale. This will
remove the current scale from any object I select.
| | 02:56 | Finally, we'll make sure our Annotation
Scale is set at 1:2, in the event I add
| | 03:01 | more annotations to this drawing.
| | 03:02 | Let me back up a little bit and my
annotations look pretty good. They just
| | 03:06 | overlap a little bit.
| | 03:08 | I am going to select this note, and
I'll click my grip and I'll pull this out a
| | 03:12 | little bit. Maybe this dimension would
look a little bit better over here. Maybe
| | 03:19 | these dimensions would look a little bit
better if they were farther away. That looks good.
| | 03:26 | Once again, let's return to our Layout.
| | 03:28 | As you can see, I didn't have to erase
my annotations and start over. We were
| | 03:33 | able to correct the ones that we already had.
| | 03:36 | The only thing we have left to
do is turn off the viewport layer.
| | 03:41 | In the event we annotate our drawing
using the wrong scale, we don't have to
| | 03:44 | start over. We can simply add the
correct scale and then remove the incorrect
| | 03:48 | one from our annotative objects.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
17. Sharing DataSaving drawings to other formats| 00:00 | Occasionally, we may be asked to send
our AutoCAD drawing to someone else.
| | 00:04 | When this happens, it's important to
remember that everyone doesn't necessarily
| | 00:07 | use the most current version of AutoCAD.
| | 00:09 | Some firms, in fact, don't use AutoCAD at all.
| | 00:12 | They may use a completely different CAD program.
| | 00:15 | Let's look at how we can save our
drawings for clients who may not be using the
| | 00:18 | same software as we are.
| | 00:19 | On my screen, I've a got a plan of survey.
| | 00:22 | Let's say that I'm a surveyor and I
need to send this drawing to a civil
| | 00:26 | engineer and let's say the civil
engineer isn't using AutoCAD 2010.
| | 00:30 | Maybe they're using AutoCAD 2000.
| | 00:33 | Let me show you how we can save this
drawing as an older release, such that we
| | 00:36 | can email the file to our client
and they'll be able to open it.
| | 00:40 | To do that, I'm going to come up to the
Application menu and then I'll come down
| | 00:43 | and select Save As, and in the Files of
type area, I'm going to click the flyout
| | 00:49 | and notice that we can save our
drawing as several older releases of AutoCAD.
| | 00:53 | We can go all the way back to release 14.
| | 00:56 | Looking at the bottom in the menu, we can
see that my file can also be saved as a dxf.
| | 01:01 | Dxf stands for Drawing Exchange Format.
| | 01:04 | Select this format if your client is
using CAD program other than AutoCAD,
| | 01:08 | because just about every CAD
package you can open a DXF file.
| | 01:12 | Now, my client is using AutoCAD 2000
| | 01:14 | so I'll select that and I don't
want to overwrite my original drawing,
| | 01:18 | so I'm going to add a suffix to my
File name and then we can click Save.
| | 01:24 | Now before I click this, it's
important to mention that there are certain
| | 01:27 | features that exist now that
didn't exist in older releases.
| | 01:31 | So, certain things like Annotative
objects aren't going to work the same for my
| | 01:35 | client as they do for me.
| | 01:37 | AutoCAD will convert these objects into
something else like plain text, so that
| | 01:41 | my client will be able to see them.
| | 01:43 | I'm going to finish with my Save and
the file that we've created could now be
| | 01:47 | sent to the client and he would be
able to open this without any problems.
| | 01:50 | No matter what CAD package our client
may be using, whether it be an older
| | 01:54 | version of AutoCAD or a program from
another company, we can still provide our
| | 01:58 | client with a drawing they can use by
simply saving as an alternate format.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Plotting to PDF| 00:00 | The PDF file format is the industry
standard for exchanging documents.
| | 00:04 | In AutoCAD 2010, we can
create PDF files of our drawings.
| | 00:08 | This means we can collaborate with any of our
clients, even if they don't have a CAD program.
| | 00:12 | On my screen, I've got a finished
drawing and my drawing has been set up in a layout.
| | 00:17 | I've plotted this a couple times.
| | 00:18 | And let's say I just received a call
from my client and they want me to provide
| | 00:22 | them this drawing as a PDF.
| | 00:24 | Well, back in the old days that meant I
needed to own a version of Adobe Acrobat
| | 00:28 | in order to create my file,
| | 00:29 | but not anymore. In AutoCAD
2010 we can plot directly to PDF.
| | 00:34 | To do that, I'm going to come up and
launch the Plot command and no matter what
| | 00:38 | printer I was using, I'm going to
come down and select DWG to PDF.
| | 00:43 | This is a virtual printer that gets
installed with AutoCAD and that's all I have to do.
| | 00:48 | I can come down and click OK.
| | 00:50 | I'm going to save my PDF in the Chapter_17
folder, inside the exercise files directory.
| | 00:55 | I'm going to keep the file
name the same and I'll click Save.
| | 00:58 | On my screen is an example of the finished PDF.
| | 01:04 | When it comes right down to it,
no matter who your client is,
| | 01:07 | they can always view a PDF file.
| | 01:09 | Plotting the PDF may be the easiest way to
make your drawings accessible to everyone.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Plotting to the Design Web Format| 00:00 | Sometimes a client may want to review our
CAD drawing, but they don't have AutoCAD,
| | 00:04 | so a DWG file isn't helpful.
| | 00:07 | At times like these, we can
ship our client a DWFx file.
| | 00:10 | The DWFx stands for Design Web Format,
and a DWFx file can be opened or plotted
| | 00:16 | from a current version of Internet Explorer.
| | 00:18 | On my screen, I have got a finished
drawing that's been set up in a layout.
| | 00:22 | Let's say I need to send this
drawing to my client for their review.
| | 00:26 | And let's also say that my client
doesn't have a version of AutoCAD.
| | 00:30 | So, what I am going to do is
plot this drawing as a DWFx.
| | 00:34 | To do that, I am going to launch the
Plot command and regardless of the plotter
| | 00:38 | I was using, I am going to select DWFx ePlot.
| | 00:42 | This is a virtual printer that is
installed automatically with AutoCAD.
| | 00:46 | That's all I have to do.
| | 00:47 | I can come down and click OK, and I am
going to save my file in the chapter_17
| | 00:52 | folder, inside the Exercise Files directory.
| | 00:54 | I am going to accept the
default name and we will click Save.
| | 00:59 | The file that I just created can be
opened natively in Internet Explorer.
| | 01:03 | I am going to bring up my Windows
Explorer. We will navigate into the Exercise
| | 01:08 | Files folder. We will look in chapter
_17 and right here is our DWFx file.
| | 01:13 | I am going to right-click and select Open
With and I can choose Internet Explorer.
| | 01:19 | Now, if you don't see Internet Explorer
on your machine, you can select Choose
| | 01:22 | Program and you'll be able to
find Internet Explorer in this list.
| | 01:26 | Let me select that and click OK and then I
will click and allow the blocked content.
| | 01:35 | This is how my client could review the file.
| | 01:37 | Notice even though I'm in Explorer, I can
pan and zoom just like we can in AutoCAD.
| | 01:43 | There is also a ribbon with tabs.
| | 01:45 | It happens to be collapsed.
| | 01:46 | Let me open this up.
| | 01:48 | This is where my client could
print the drawing if he wanted to.
| | 01:52 | If you wanted to take this concept to
the next level, you could look at Markup
| | 01:55 | and Measure and this is where the
client could make comments or take
| | 01:58 | measurements, just something else to explore.
| | 02:02 | Let's close our Windows and return to AutoCAD.
| | 02:06 | Plotting our files to the DWFx format
allows our clients to collaborate on the
| | 02:10 | design process, even if they don't have AutoCAD.
| | 02:13 | So long as they have a current version
of Internet Explorer, they can easily
| | 02:17 | view or print our drawings.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sending drawings via email| 00:00 | E-mail is the primary way
that companies communicate.
| | 00:03 | Using e-mail, we can ship our drawings to
clients or sub-consultants in a matter of seconds.
| | 00:08 | In this lesson, we are going to learn
how to use AutoCAD to e-mail our drawings.
| | 00:11 | On my screen, I have got a
civil engineering example.
| | 00:14 | This is a drawing of a site
plan for a proposed public park.
| | 00:18 | Let's say I would like to
e-mail this drawing to a surveyor.
| | 00:21 | The fastest way to do that is to
come up to the Application menu.
| | 00:25 | Then I will come down to Send
and then we will select e-mail.
| | 00:27 | Then, as you can see, AutoCAD launches my
e-mail program and adds my file as an attachment.
| | 00:34 | All I have to do is enter my
surveyor's e-mail address and click Send.
| | 00:38 | As you can see, emailing a drawing
from AutoCAD couldn't be easier.
| | 00:41 | In less than five clicks, you can send your
file on its way and hopefully meet your deadline.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionGoodbye| 00:00 | Well, we've come to the end.
| | 00:02 | Let me say it's been my privilege to
work with you for the last few hours.
| | 00:05 | I hope you've enjoyed the time as
much as I have, and even though our time
| | 00:09 | together has ended, now it's your time
to take the skills that you've learned
| | 00:13 | and the foundation that you've
started and build on it. Who knows?
| | 00:16 | Maybe someday in the future you and I
may end up working on the same project.
| | 00:20 | Until then, I wish you the best of luck.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
